Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and

Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II®
Installation and Operation Manual
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
Copyright April 16, 2015
4/16/15
E24690
Disclaimer
While every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of this document,
Raven Industries assumes no responsibility for omissions and errors. Nor is any
liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of information contained
herein.
Raven Industries shall not be responsible or liable for incidental or consequential
damages or a loss of anticipated benefits or profits, work stoppage or loss, or
impairment of data arising out of the use, or inability to use, this system or any of
its components. Raven Industries shall not be held responsible for any
modifications or repairs made outside our facilities, nor damages resulting from
inadequate maintenance of this system.
As with all wireless and satellite signals, several factors may affect the availability
and accuracy of wireless and satellite navigation and correction services (e.g.
GPS, GNSS, SBAS, etc.). Therefore, Raven Industries cannot guarantee the
accuracy, integrity, continuity, or availability of these services and cannot
guarantee the ability to use Raven systems, or products used as components of
systems, which rely upon the reception of these signals or availability of these
services. Raven Industries accepts no responsibility for the use of any of these
signals or services for other than the stated purpose.
©Raven Industries, Inc. 2015
Table of Contents
Appendices
Calibration Reference Sheet ................................................................................................... vii
Unit Definitions and Conversions ........................................................................................... viii
Unit of Measure Definitions .............................................................................................. viii
Unit of Measure Conversions ........................................................................................... viii
Chapter 1
Important Safety Information................................................. 1
Safety Information ..................................................................................................................... 1
Hydraulic Safety .................................................................................................................. 2
Electrical Safety ................................................................................................................... 2
Chapter 2
Introduction............................................................................. 3
Envizio Pro Features ................................................................................................................. 4
Speed Compensated Product Control and Datalogging ...................................................... 4
On-Screen Guidance ........................................................................................................... 5
Internal DGPS Receiver Options ......................................................................................... 5
Optional Features ................................................................................................................ 7
Front Panel ................................................................................................................................ 8
Resistive Touch Screen Technology .................................................................................... 8
Icon Based Operation .......................................................................................................... 8
USB File Transfer ................................................................................................................ 9
Rear Panel .............................................................................................................................. 10
Care and Use .......................................................................................................................... 11
Technical Specifications .................................................................................................... 12
Updates ................................................................................................................................... 14
Chapter 3
Installation............................................................................. 15
Overview of the Installation Process ....................................................................................... 15
Kit Contents ....................................................................................................................... 16
Mounting the Field Computer .................................................................................................. 17
Cable Platforms and Connections ........................................................................................... 18
Generation 1 Cable Connections ...................................................................................... 18
Generation 2 Cable Connections ...................................................................................... 20
DGPS Antenna ........................................................................................................................ 21
Installing Optional Equipment .................................................................................................. 23
Boom Sense Wire ............................................................................................................. 23
AccuBoom™ ..................................................................................................................... 24
Light Bar ............................................................................................................................ 25
TM-1 Tilt Module ................................................................................................................ 25
SmarTrax™ ....................................................................................................................... 26
Serial Console ................................................................................................................... 26
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
i
Table of Contents
AutoBoom® ....................................................................................................................... 27
CANbus Network Connection .................................................................................................. 27
Chapter 4
CAN Networking and Diagnostics ...................................... 29
CAN Diagnostics ..................................................................................................................... 30
Node Version Information .................................................................................................. 31
Readdressing Product Nodes ............................................................................................ 31
Reset CANbus Defaults ..................................................................................................... 32
Retry CAN Communication ............................................................................................... 32
Service Mode ..................................................................................................................... 32
Additional Node Options .................................................................................................... 33
CAN Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................. 34
CAN Node Off-line Errors .................................................................................................. 34
Chapter 5
Startup, Initial Setup, and Setup Wizards........................... 37
Overview ................................................................................................................................. 37
Initial Setup ........................................................................................................................ 37
Startup ..................................................................................................................................... 38
Touch Screen Calibration .................................................................................................. 39
Initial Setup Wizard ................................................................................................................. 40
Setup Wizards ......................................................................................................................... 42
Setup Wizard Menu ........................................................................................................... 42
Product Section Setup Wizard ................................................................................................ 43
Using the Product Section Setup Wizard .......................................................................... 43
Product Control Setup Wizard ................................................................................................. 44
Using the Product Control Setup Wizard ........................................................................... 45
AutoBoom® Setup Wizard ...................................................................................................... 49
Using the AutoBoom® Setup Wizard ................................................................................ 49
Chapter 6
Basic Operation .................................................................... 51
Overview ................................................................................................................................. 51
Home Screen .......................................................................................................................... 51
GPS Status ........................................................................................................................ 52
Wireless Communications Status ...................................................................................... 53
Information ......................................................................................................................... 53
Closing Jobs and Power Down .......................................................................................... 54
Job Files .................................................................................................................................. 55
Overview ............................................................................................................................ 55
Starting a Job .......................................................................................................................... 56
Setting up a Job ................................................................................................................. 56
Guidance Screen ..................................................................................................................... 62
Guidance Features ............................................................................................................ 62
ii
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Table of Contents
Using Guidance Patterns .................................................................................................. 63
Product Control Features .................................................................................................. 66
Menu ....................................................................................................................................... 72
Home ................................................................................................................................. 72
Guidance Views ................................................................................................................ 72
A-B Path Tools ................................................................................................................... 73
Field Markers ..................................................................................................................... 77
Field Review Mode ............................................................................................................ 78
Field Review Mode Tools .................................................................................................. 78
Field Boundaries ............................................................................................................... 80
Field Boundary Tools ......................................................................................................... 81
Drift Shift ............................................................................................................................ 83
Prescription Maps and Variable Rates .................................................................................... 85
Loading Prescription Maps ................................................................................................ 85
Applying Prescription Maps ............................................................................................... 86
Using Prescription Maps ................................................................................................... 87
System Alarms ........................................................................................................................ 87
Alarms Area ....................................................................................................................... 88
Audible Alarms .................................................................................................................. 88
Chapter 7
Tools Menu ............................................................................ 89
Accessing and Navigating the Tools Menu ............................................................................. 89
Wizard Menu ..................................................................................................................... 90
System Menu .................................................................................................................... 90
GPS Menu ......................................................................................................................... 90
Computer Menu ................................................................................................................. 90
Vehicle Menu ..................................................................................................................... 91
Show All ............................................................................................................................ 91
Navigation ......................................................................................................................... 91
On-Screen Keyboard ......................................................................................................... 92
System Menu .......................................................................................................................... 93
Control Interface ...................................................................................................................... 94
Product Control Options .................................................................................................... 94
Boom Master and System Options .................................................................................... 97
Serial Port Configuration ................................................................................................... 98
CAN Diagnostics ............................................................................................................... 98
Product Control ....................................................................................................................... 99
Application Type .............................................................................................................. 100
Speed .............................................................................................................................. 101
Valve ................................................................................................................................ 103
Calibration Settings ......................................................................................................... 109
AccuBoom ....................................................................................................................... 113
Volume and Area Settings ............................................................................................... 113
Feature Settings .................................................................................................................... 114
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
iii
Table of Contents
Zero Speed ...................................................................................................................... 114
Decimal Shift ................................................................................................................... 115
Display Smoothing ........................................................................................................... 115
Ratio Rate ........................................................................................................................ 115
Agitator ............................................................................................................................ 115
PWM Smart Control ......................................................................................................... 115
Dual Loop Control ............................................................................................................ 116
Standby Pressure (PWM Valves Only) ............................................................................ 116
Alarm Settings ....................................................................................................................... 116
Bin Alarm ......................................................................................................................... 117
Vacuum Alarm ................................................................................................................. 117
CAN Audible Alarm .......................................................................................................... 117
Flow Error Cal (CAN Motor Control) ................................................................................ 117
NH3 Configuration ........................................................................................................... 117
Dual Flow (%) Percent ..................................................................................................... 118
Low Pressure ................................................................................................................... 118
Low Tank or Bin ............................................................................................................... 118
Low Limit ......................................................................................................................... 118
Low Supply Alarm ............................................................................................................ 118
Max Pressure Alarm ........................................................................................................ 119
Off Rate Percent .............................................................................................................. 119
Current Alarms ................................................................................................................ 119
Section Assignments ............................................................................................................. 119
AutoBoom® ........................................................................................................................... 120
Steering ................................................................................................................................. 120
GPS Menu ............................................................................................................................. 120
Reverse Sensing ............................................................................................................. 121
GPS Health ...................................................................................................................... 122
Differential ....................................................................................................................... 125
Default Differential ........................................................................................................... 131
Output .............................................................................................................................. 131
Source ............................................................................................................................. 133
Tilt Sensor ....................................................................................................................... 134
Drift Shift .......................................................................................................................... 134
Computer Menu ..................................................................................................................... 135
Display ............................................................................................................................. 135
Region ............................................................................................................................. 137
Updates ........................................................................................................................... 138
File Maintenance ............................................................................................................. 140
Web ................................................................................................................................. 140
Vehicle Menu ......................................................................................................................... 141
Low Speed Mode ............................................................................................................. 141
Guidance Width ............................................................................................................... 141
Offsets and Implement Type Selection ............................................................................ 142
iv
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Table of Contents
Sections ........................................................................................................................... 147
Profiles ............................................................................................................................ 152
Show All ................................................................................................................................ 152
Chapter 8
Software Updates and File Maintenance .......................... 153
Overview ............................................................................................................................... 153
File Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 154
File Outputs ..................................................................................................................... 154
Performing File Maintenance .......................................................................................... 155
File Structure ......................................................................................................................... 158
ePro Directory ................................................................................................................. 158
Updates ................................................................................................................................. 160
Applying Software Updates ............................................................................................. 162
Chapter 9
Using AccuBoom™ ............................................................ 163
Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 163
CAN Switch Box .............................................................................................................. 163
AccuBoom™ Setup ............................................................................................................... 164
On Override ..................................................................................................................... 164
Aggressiveness ............................................................................................................... 165
Master Pressure .............................................................................................................. 166
Turn Off Percent .............................................................................................................. 166
Look Ahead ..................................................................................................................... 167
Enable Zero Speed Override Popup ............................................................................... 167
Enabling AccuBoom™ .......................................................................................................... 167
AccuBoom™ Modes ........................................................................................................ 169
On-Screen Switch Box .......................................................................................................... 171
Using Zone Maps .................................................................................................................. 172
Loading a Field Boundary ............................................................................................... 172
AccuBoom™ Mapping Tools ........................................................................................... 173
On-Screen Tools .............................................................................................................. 173
Creating an AccuBoom™ Zone Map ............................................................................... 174
AccuBoom™ Zone Map Examples ................................................................................. 176
Chapter 10
Using AutoBoom®.............................................................. 179
Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 179
PowerGlide Plus .............................................................................................................. 179
UltraGlide ........................................................................................................................ 180
AutoBoom® Operation .......................................................................................................... 180
Status Display .................................................................................................................. 180
AutoBoom® Indicators .................................................................................................... 181
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
v
Table of Contents
Chapter 11
Troubleshooting ................................................................. 183
Troubleshooting Information .................................................................................................. 183
General Issues ................................................................................................................ 183
Setup Issues .................................................................................................................... 184
Job Issues ....................................................................................................................... 184
Coverage Map Issues ...................................................................................................... 185
Error Messages ..................................................................................................................... 185
Job Error Messages ........................................................................................................ 185
GPS Error Messages ....................................................................................................... 186
CAN Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 186
Appendix A Calculating the Calibration Values.................................... 187
Speed Cal .............................................................................................................................. 187
Wheel Drive Speed Sensor ............................................................................................. 188
Speedometer Drive Speed Sensor .................................................................................. 189
Liquid Applications ................................................................................................................ 190
Boom Cal ......................................................................................................................... 190
Meter Cal ......................................................................................................................... 191
Valve Cal ......................................................................................................................... 194
Valve Cal 2 ...................................................................................................................... 195
Flow Cal (Dual Loop Control Mode) ................................................................................ 195
Sgain (Pressure System Gain - Dual Loop Control Mode) .............................................. 195
Rate Cal ........................................................................................................................... 196
Tiered Boom Settings ............................................................................................................ 197
Granular Applications ............................................................................................................ 199
Boom Cal ......................................................................................................................... 199
Spreader Constant ........................................................................................................... 199
Verification of Spreader Constant .................................................................................... 200
Product Density ............................................................................................................... 200
Rate Cal ........................................................................................................................... 200
Spinner RPM ................................................................................................................... 201
Additional Calibration Data .................................................................................................... 202
Entering Tank Volume or Bin Level .................................................................................. 202
Reset Volume/Area Display Information .......................................................................... 202
Reset Display Distance ................................................................................................... 202
Appendix B Testing Cables .................................................................... 203
Speed Sensor Extension Cable ............................................................................................. 203
Testing the Speed Sensor Extension Cable .................................................................... 203
Flow Meter/Encoder Extension Cable ................................................................................... 204
Testing the Flow Meter/Encoder Cable ............................................................................ 204
vi
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Table of Contents
Appendix C Wireless Communications & Remote Service ................. 205
Wireless Communication Status ............................................................................................ 205
Wireless Status Screen ......................................................................................................... 206
Site Information ............................................................................................................... 206
Remote Service ............................................................................................................... 207
Connection Status ........................................................................................................... 207
File Manager ................................................................................................................... 208
Registration ..................................................................................................................... 208
File Transfer Settings ...................................................................................................... 210
Appendix D Weather Station .................................................................. 211
Weather Station Overview ..................................................................................................... 211
Connecting the Weather Station ............................................................................................ 212
Weather Station Activation Key ....................................................................................... 212
Weather Station Configuration ........................................................................................ 212
Using the Weather Station ..................................................................................................... 213
Appendix E Updating CAN Nodes via the Envizio Pro ........................ 215
Appendix F Updating the
On-board DGPS Receiver .................................................. 217
Required Components .......................................................................................................... 217
Receiver Information ....................................................................................................... 218
Updating the On-Board DGPS Receiver ............................................................................... 218
Appendix G Tank Fill Monitor Calibration ............................................. 221
Overview ............................................................................................................................... 221
Tank Fill Calibration ............................................................................................................... 221
Tank Fill Operation ................................................................................................................ 222
Appendix H Blockage Monitoring Sensors ........................................... 223
System Overview .................................................................................................................. 223
Blockage Node Detection ................................................................................................ 223
Configuring Blockage Sensor Loops ..................................................................................... 224
Configure Sensor Loops .................................................................................................. 225
Blockage Monitor Status ........................................................................................................ 226
Setting the Sensitivity ............................................................................................................ 227
Appendix I
OmniSeed™ Calibration..................................................... 229
OmniSeed Calibration Overview
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
........................................................................................... 229
vii
Table of Contents
Remote Tank Console ..................................................................................................... 229
Optional Ultrasonic Bin Level Sensors ............................................................................ 229
OmniSeed Calibration Procedures ........................................................................................ 230
Optional Bin Pressure Sensor Calibration ....................................................................... 231
Fan Calibration ................................................................................................................ 231
Metered Weight ............................................................................................................... 232
Section Setup .................................................................................................................. 233
Section Assignments ....................................................................................................... 234
Section Switch Mapping .................................................................................................. 235
Bin Level Sensor Calibration ................................................................................................. 236
Capacitive Bin Level Sensors .......................................................................................... 236
Optional Ultrasonic Bin Level Sensors ............................................................................ 237
Remote Calibration Console ................................................................................................. 238
Kit Contents ..................................................................................................................... 238
Console Connection ........................................................................................................ 238
Console Power ................................................................................................................ 239
Remote Tank Console Operation .................................................................................... 239
Using the Tank Console To Adjust Settings ..................................................................... 242
Troubleshooting ..................................................................................................................... 244
Appendix J
Serial Console Interfaces................................................... 245
Console Connection .............................................................................................................. 245
Serial Control Setup and Configuration ................................................................................. 246
Section and Guidance Width Configuration ..................................................................... 246
AccuBoom™ Configuration ............................................................................................. 248
Operation ............................................................................................................................... 249
Hopper Contents ............................................................................................................. 249
Area Covered & Coverage Mapping Information ............................................................. 250
Automatic Variable Rate .................................................................................................. 250
Appendix K Reference of Icons ............................................................. 251
Navigation ............................................................................................................................. 251
Home Screen ........................................................................................................................ 252
Information ....................................................................................................................... 252
GPS Status ...................................................................................................................... 253
Wireless Communications Status .................................................................................... 254
Tools Menu ............................................................................................................................ 254
File Maintenance ............................................................................................................. 255
CAN Diagnostics ............................................................................................................. 256
Guidance Patterns ................................................................................................................. 257
Guidance Screen ................................................................................................................... 257
Guidance Views ............................................................................................................... 258
On-Screen Switch Box .................................................................................................... 258
viii
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Table of Contents
Field Review Mode Tools ................................................................................................ 259
A-B Path Tools ................................................................................................................. 260
Field Boundary Tools ....................................................................................................... 263
Alarms ................................................................................................................................... 264
AccuBoom™ ......................................................................................................................... 264
On-Screen Tools .............................................................................................................. 265
AutoBoom® ........................................................................................................................... 266
AutoBoom® Status Indicator ........................................................................................... 266
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
ix
Table of Contents
x
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Calibration Reference Sheet
Record the settings and calibration values used when programming the field computer and keep this sheet for
future reference or when contacting a service technician.
Circle the setting selected on the field computer for the following options:
Units
US (Acres)
SI (Hectares)
Speed
Sensor
SP1 (Wheel Speed)
SP2 (Radar)
Turf (1000 Square Feet)
Speed Cal
Write down the selected settings for each configured control channel in the spaces provided.
Control Channel
1
Control Channel
2
Control Channel
3
Control Channel
4
Control
Type
Valve Type
Write down the calculated calibration values in the spaces provided.
Section Widths (Boom Cal)
1.
5.
9.
13.
2.
6.
10.
14.
3.
7.
11.
15.
4.
8.
12.
16.
Meter Cal
Rate Cal
Volume in
Tank/Bin
Valve Cal
1.
1.
1.
1.
2.
2.
2.
2.
3.
3.
3.
3.
4.
4.
4.
4.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
vii
Calibration Reference Sheet
Unit Definitions and Conversions
Unit of Measure Definitions
Abbreviation
Definition
Abbreviation
Definition
GPM
Gallons per Minute
dm
Decimeters
lit/min
Liters per Minute
m
Meter
dl/min
Deciliters per Minute
MPH
Miles per Hour
PSI
Pounds per Square Inch
km
Kilometers
kPa
Kilopascal
km/h
Kilometers per Hour
GPA
Gallons per Acre
US
Volume per Acre
lit/ha
Liters per Hectare
SI
Volume per Hectare
ml/ha
Milliliters per Hectare
TU
Volume per 1,000 Square Feet
GPK
Gallons per 1,000 Square Feet
[]
Metric Numbers
mm
Millimeters
lb/acre
Pounds per Acre
cm
Centimeters
kg/ha
Kilograms per Hectare
Unit of Measure Conversions
To convert the meter cal value into the selected unit of measure, divide the original number printed on the Flow
Meter label by the desired conversion value.
Fluid Ounces Conversion Formula
Liters Conversion Formula
Pounds Conversion Formula
Original Meter Cal
Original Meter Cal
Original Meter Cal
128
3.785
Weight of One Gallon of Product
Liquid
Area
• 1 U.S gallon = 128 fluid ounces
• 1 square meter = 10.764 square feet
• 1 U.S. gallon = 3.785 liters
• 1 hectare = 2.471 acres or 10,000 square meters
• 1 U.S. gallon = 0.83267 imperial gallons
• 1 acre = 0.405 hectares or 43,560 square feet
• 1 U.S. gallon = 8.34 pounds (water)
• 1 square mile = 640 acres or 258.9 hectares
Length
Pressure
• 1 millimeter (mm) = 0.039 inches
• 1 psi = 6.89 kPa
• 1 centimeter (cm) = 0.393 inches
• 1 kPa = 0.145 psi
• 1 meter (m) = 3.281 feet
Weight
• 1 kilometer (km) = 0.621 miles
• 1 Pound = 16 Ounces
• 1 inch = 25.4 mm or 2.54 cm
• 1 Pound = 0.45 Kilograms
• 1 mile = 1.609 km
viii
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
CHAPTER
1
Important Safety
Information
Chapter1
Safety Information
NOTICE
Read this manual and the operation and safety instructions included with the implement and/or controller
carefully before installing the Envizio Pro field computer.
• Follow all safety information presented within this manual.
• If you require assistance with any portion of the installation or service of Raven equipment, contact a local
Raven dealer for support.
• Follow all safety labels affixed to the system components. Be sure to keep safety labels in good condition
and replace any missing or damaged labels. To obtain replacements for missing or damaged safety labels,
contact a local Raven dealer.
When operating the machine after installing the Envizio Pro field computer, observe the following safety
measures:
•
•
•
•
Be alert and aware of surroundings.
Do not operate the field computer while under the influence of alcohol or an illegal substance.
Remain in the operator’s position in the machine at all times when the field computer is engaged.
Determine and remain a safe working distance from other individuals. Disable the field computer when the
safe working distance has been diminished.
• Disable the field computer prior to starting any maintenance work on the machine or parts of the field
computer.
• Follow all label instructions for proper chemical mixing, handling and container disposal methods.
DANGER
Thoroughly bleed the nurse tank hose and all other system lines prior to disassembling the flow meter, fittings,
and hoses, especially in the case of anhydrous ammonia.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
1
Chapter 1
CAUTION
Hydraulic Safety
• Raven Industries recommends that appropriate protective equipment be worn at all times when working on
any hydraulic system.
• Never attempt to open or work on a hydraulic system with the equipment running. Care should always be
taken when opening a system that has been previously pressurized.
• Exercise caution when disconnecting the hydraulic hoses or purging is required, be aware that the hydraulic
fluid may be extremely hot and under high pressure.
• Any work performed on a hydraulic system must be done in accordance with the machine manufacturer’s
approved maintenance instructions.
• When installing hydraulics or performing diagnostics, maintenance or routine service, ensure that
precautions are taken to prevent any foreign material or contaminants from being introduced into the
machine’s hydraulic system. Objects or materials that are able to bypass the machine’s hydraulic filtration
system will reduce performance and possibly damage the hydraulic valves.
Electrical Safety
• Always verify that the power leads are connected to the correct polarity as marked. Reversing the power
leads could cause severe damage to the equipment.
• Ensure that the power cable is the last cable to be connected.
• Always remove the power connections for the field computer and any control nodes from the vehicle battery
before jump starting or welding on any component of the vehicle. Jump starting or welding on the equipment
will damage the field computer and nodes.
2
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
CHAPTER
2
Introduction
Chapter2
Envizio Pro field computers are multi-purpose tools offering the latest technology in precision agriculture with
features including product application control, field map and application reports, as well as field guidance. The
Envizio Pro and Envizio Pro II field computers are available with an optional internal DGPS (Differential Global
Positioning System) receiver to simplify console installation and allow the system to be transferred to other
vehicles over the growing season.
This manual provides information for the following Envizio Pro series field computers:
• Envizio Pro™
• Envizio Pro II®
FIGURE 1.
Note:
Versatile Envizio Pro or Envizio Pro II Field Computers
Envizio Pro series field computers are also capable of interfacing with various Raven control
systems and optional features.Refer to the Optional Features section on page 7 or contact a local
Raven dealer for a full list of features and systems available for use with the field computer or
purchasing assistance.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
3
Chapter 2
This document is intended to provide information regarding the following aspects of the Envizio Pro field
computers:
•
•
•
•
•
Installation
Initial Setup and Calibration
Basic Operation
Updates and Feature Activation
Advanced Features and Operation
Envizio Pro Features
The following descriptions offer a brief introduction to the capabilities of the Envizio Pro field computers and
some of the optional features available for use with each of these systems.
Speed Compensated Product Control and Datalogging
Envizio Pro field computers are capable of monitoring or controlling product application via either a serial or
CANbus rate control system.
Raven CANbus Control
The Envizio Pro field computers are capable of controlling up to four products or control channels through
product control nodes connected to a CANbus system. The field computer automatically adjusts the application
rate of each product according to the speed of the vehicle, width and status of programmed sections and a
programmed target rate.
With the optional variable rate application (VRA) feature, the Envizio Pro field computers are also capable of
controlling a single product according to a prescription map.
Note:
An optional multiple product control key is required to enable control channels three and four on
the Envizio Pro and Envizio Pro II field computers.
A multi-product VRA key is available to unlock variable rate control features for multiple product
control channels. A single product VRA key is required to successfully authorize the multiple
product VRA key.
4
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Introduction
Serial Rate Control
The Envizio Pro system may be used to monitor and map applications controlled by another Raven serial
console, such as the Raven SCS 440 or 460 consoles, via a serial connection. Variable rate capabilities of the
field computer may also be utilized with a Raven serial console to automatically adjust application rates based
upon a prescription map loaded on the Envizio Pro series field computer.
Note:
The Envizio Pro is compatible with the Raven SwitchPro™ switch box and may be used to replace
an existing serial rate controller with a Raven CANbus control system using the existing control
hardware and cabling.
On-Screen Guidance
The Envizio Pro field computers provide on-screen guidance in the form of a Course Direction Indicator (CDI)
and on-screen light bar. The on-screen navigation features Last Pass, Pivot, Fixed Contour and Straight Line
guidance patterns. In addition, the field computer can output GPS information and simulated radar speed to an
external Raven light bar. See Chapter 5, Startup, Initial Setup, and Setup Wizards, for more information
regarding guidance patterns and the Guidance screen.
Internal DGPS Receiver Options
Both the Envizio Pro and Envizio Pro II offer options for an internal Differential GPS (DGPS) receiver to reduce
cab clutter and simplify transfer of the control system between vehicles for use during various operations such
as planting, spraying and harvesting. A range of receiver options is available to fit into almost any existing
system or to expand DGPS capabilities as field operations grow and change.
Note:
Field computers without the internal DGPS receiver require an external DGPS receiver for
operation.
The internal receiver in either the Envizio Pro or Envizio Pro II may be disabled to allow an
optional external receiver, such as a Raven Invicta or Phoenix series or virtually any new or
existing DGPS receiver, to be connected to the system. Refer to Chapter 7, Tools Menu for details
on configuring the field computer to operate with external DGPS receivers and light bars.
Contact a local Raven dealer for more information about additional options or features available
with the Envizio Pro or Envizio Pro II internal receiver.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
5
2
A real-time, as-applied map is displayed on-screen while application information is logged and saved by the
field computer. This job information may then be transferred to a USB flash drive, copied to a home or office
PC and used to create printed reports and coverage maps.
Chapter 2
Envizio Pro II Field Computers
The Envizio Pro II field computer features a dual frequency DGPS receiver which includes Satellite Based
Augmentation System (SBAS) correction for use with the Wide Area Augmentation System (WAAS) or
European Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service (EGNOS) as standard options. The NovAtel GL1DE®
feature may be used either in conjunction with a SBAS correction signal as a position smoothing feature or as
an independent correction source for areas with limited SBAS coverage. Both options are available as a
standard feature of the internal dual frequency receiver.
The following optional correction sources may also be used with the Envizio Pro II field computer:
GLONASS. With an optional activation code, the dual frequency receiver may be unlocked to utilize the Global
Navigation Satellite System (GLONASS) satellite constellation which may be used to enhance the standard
GPS satellite coverage.
OmniSTAR. The Envizio Pro II field computer (P/N 063-0173-537) is available with an OmniSTAR capable
receiver for use with an optional OmniSTAR HP or XP subscription. OmniSTAR subscription services
provide an alternative differential source which broadcasts corrections from a worldwide array of reference
sites.
Note:
Contact OmniSTAR for details and subscription information.
Slingshot® GS and Satellite GS. GS subscription services offer a decimetric correction source delivered via
either a satellite based correction network or over a wireless network via a Slingshot Field Hub. Contact a local
Raven or Slingshot dealer for subscription details and additional information.
RTK. The Envizio Pro II internal receiver may be upgraded to receive Real-Time Kinematic (RTK) or a
Continuously Operating Reference Station (CORS) network correction services to improve accuracy and
repeatability for precision operations such as planting and strip tilling, or side dressing.
Envizio Pro Field Computers
Envizio Pro field computers feature an internal DGPS receiver which includes Satellite Based Augmentation
System (SBAS) correction for use with the Wide Area Augmentation System (WAAS) and European
Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service (EGNOS) as standard options.
The following optional correction sources may also be used with the Envizio Pro field computer:
e-Dif. An Extended Differential (e-Dif) activation key is available to provide an autonomous correction source in
areas without minimal differential correction systems.
6
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Introduction
Optional Features
Flexibility of the Envizio Pro means that each field computer can be integrated into many existing Raven
product control systems. The field computer can be used to control chemical injection and anhydrous ammonia
applications, planting and harvesting operations or be integrated into an existing serial control system for
mapping and guidance features. The following are examples of various Raven systems or features which may
be added to the field computer to enhance or modify the control system for a specific operation:
• Raven product control systems.
• AccuBoom™ or AccuRow™ automatic section control systems.
• OmniRow® automatic planter population, singulation, and section control system for complete crop input
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2
control.
OmniSeed™ automatic seeder control system for products applied from an air cart.
AutoBoom® automatic boom height management systems.
SmarTrax™ series automatic assisted steering systems.
TM-1 Tilt Module offers tilt corrected DGPS guidance over rough and hilly terrain.
Slingshot® Field Hub for communication and GPS corrections delivered via a cellular service provider.
SmartYield™ Pro yield monitoring systems.
Sidekick™ or Sidekick Pro™ direct injection systems for automatic rate control of injected chemicals.
AccuFlow™ and AccuFlow HP™ series systems for anhydrous ammonia (NH3) product application.
• Spectrum® Technologies WatchDog Sprayer Station for weather monitoring.
• Amazone Amatron+, Bogballe Calibrator Zurf, and Rauch LH5000 spreader control systems.
Contact a local Raven dealer for more information about these and other optional features and components
available for use with the Envizio Pro.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
7
Chapter 2
Front Panel
The front panel of the Envizio Pro features a touch screen for operator input, the power button and also
provides convenient access to a USB port for file transfer and software updates.
FIGURE 2.
Envizio Pro User Interface
Power
Touch Screen
USB Port
NOTICE
Failure to close a job before turning the
console’s power off may result in a loss of
information for that job. Make sure to properly
close any open jobs before powering down the
field computer.
Resistive Touch Screen Technology
Resistive touch screen technology offers clear visibility across a range of lighting conditions and even in direct
sunlight while the touch screen functionality places menus and options literally at the operator’s finger tips.
CAUTION
Do not use sharp objects, such as ball point
pens, pocket knives, screwdrivers, etc. on the
Envizio Pro display.
Icon Based Operation
Operation of the field computer can be done at a glance due to the icon based interface. Easily recognizable
icons allow the operator to quickly select features or use functions without diverting attention from other
important operations.
8
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Introduction
USB File Transfer
Memory within the field computer is used to store current job and application information. Application
information for past jobs should be periodically transferred to a USB flash drive and copied to a home or office
PC to view and more permanently store this information. Use a USB flash drive with at least 512 MB of
memory (maximum 4 GB) for transferring these files. Storage devices may be purchased at many retail
locations or a local Raven dealer.
4 GB USB Flash Drive (P/N 524-0002-065)
2
FIGURE 3.
Note:
Install the USB flash drive only when transferring files. Do not start the field computer with a flash
drive connected or leave the drive inserted during normal operation.
For additional information on the available memory resources on specific consoles, refer to the
Technical Specifications section on page 12.
CAUTION
Damage to the field computer may occur if the
USB ports are used to charge mobile devices
such as cellular phones, tablets, or mp3
devices. The USB ports should only be used for
performing file transfer and maintenance.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
9
Chapter 2
Rear Panel
The following is a brief overview of the connections and ports available on the back of the Envizio Pro field
computers.
The Rear Panel offers an additional USB Port as well as a port for connecting an optional wireless router for
wireless communication. Signal is fed into the internal DGPS receiver through the antenna port located above
the mounting posts.
CAUTION
Damage to the field computer may occur if the
USB ports are used to charge mobile devices
such as cellular phones, tablets, or mp3
devices. The USB ports should only be used for
performing file transfer and maintenance.
The main and auxiliary interface connections are also located on the rear panel. These connections will be
used to connect the field computer with the various components and hardware for the specific control system.
FIGURE 4.
Envizio Pro Rear Panel Features and Connectors
Ethernet Port
USB Port
Antenna Port
Auxiliary
Interface
Connector
Main Interface
Connector
Mounting
Posts
Note:
Envizio Pro field computers without an internal DGPS receiver will not feature an antenna port.
The part number, serial number and hardware revision of the field computer are located on the tags located on
the back of the console. Please have this information available when contacting customer support.
10
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Introduction
Care and Use
Refer to the following guidelines for proper care and use of the Envizio Pro field computer.
CAUTION
• Do not apply liquid or glass cleaner directly to the surface of the touch screen. Harsh chemicals may
damage the touch screen. Clean the touch screen and console exterior as needed with a soft cloth
dampened with glass cleaner. Apply the cleaner to the cloth and then wipe the screen gently.
be used.
• Do not expose the field computer to precipitation, condensation, or other liquids. Store the computer in a dry
environment when not in use.
• Mount the field computer securely and route cables to prevent tripping hazards and to keep the wires from
pinching or breaking.
• When temperatures are expected to be 10° F [-12° C] or lower, remove the field computer from the vehicle
and store it in a climate controlled environment.
• Always remove the power connections for the field computer and any control nodes from the vehicle battery
before jump starting or welding on any vehicle components. Jump starting or welding on the equipment will
damage the field computer and nodes.
• Field computer damage may occur if the USB ports are used to charge mobile devices such as cellular
phones, tablets, or mp3 devices. The USB ports should only be used for performing file transfer and
maintenance.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
11
2
• Do not use a pointed or sharp instrument on the touch screen. Only a fingertip or an approved stylus should
Chapter 2
Technical Specifications
Envizio Pro and Envizio Pro II
Dimensions
Weight
Environmental
Power
Ports
Operating
Temperature
Storage
Temperature
Operating
Voltage
USB
Ethernet
Amp
Plate/Arm
Mounting
U.S.
6.26 in.
8.43 in.
3.46 in.
Metric
15.9 cm
21.41 cm
8.79 cm
6.5 in.
16.51 cm
3.68 lbs.
1.67 kg
32° F to 158° F
0° C to 70° C
-4° F to 185° F
-20° C to 85° C
Height
Width
Depth
Diagonal
(screen)
9 VDC to 28 VDC
Reverse Polarity Protected
2 (1 on front, 1 on back)
1 (Back)
2 (Back)
Vesa Plate with
RAM Mounting Arm
Screws
(Provided)
10-32 x 1/2” Long
On Board Memory Resources
Description
Envizio Pro (w/o GPS)
Envizio Pro (w/o GPS)
Envizio Pro II
(dual frequency GPS)
Envizio Pro II
(dual frequency GPS)
Note:
12
063-0173-315
063-0173-315
Hardware
Revision
A or B
C
Available
Memory
512 MB
1 GB
063-0173-301
A or B
512 MB
063-0173-301
C
1 GB
Part Number
All Envizio Pro field computers with part number 063-0172-865, regardless of hardware revision,
provide 512 MB of on board memory resources.
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Introduction
Amp Connector Pin Definitions
Auxiliary Amp
Connection
1.
Main Amp Connector
Battery Negative
2.
Ext. Switch
3.
CAN Hi
2.
Ext. Switch
4.
CAN Lo
3.
CAN Hi
5.
DGPS Receive
4.
CAN Lo
6.
DGPS Transmit
5.
7.
DGPS CTS
DGPS Receive
(To External Devices)
8.
DGPS RTS
6.
9.
Console Transmit
DGPS Transmit
(To External Devices)
10.
Console Receive
7.
Auxiliary Receive
11.
RS232 Ground
8.
Auxiliary Transmit
12.
Console CTS
9.
Auxiliary CTS
13.
Console RTS
10.
14.
+ 12 V Ignition
15.
+ 12 V Switched
11. Auxiliary RTS
16.
Battery Positive
12. RS232 Ground
2
Main Amp
Connection
Auxiliary Amp Connector
1.
DGPS Transmit (Corrections In)
DGPS Receive (Corrections In)
13. Not Used
14. Radar Out
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
13
Chapter 2
Updates
Raven software and documentation updates may be made available periodically on the Raven Applied
Technology web site:
www.ravenhelp.com
At Raven Industries, we strive to make your experience with our products as rewarding as
possible. One way to improve this experience is to provide us with feedback on this manual.
Your feedback will help shape the future of our product documentation and the overall service
we provide. We appreciate the opportunity to see ourselves as our customers see us and are
eager to gather ideas on how we have been helping or how we can do better.
To serve you best, please send an email with the following information to
[email protected]
-Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
-P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
-Any comments or feedback (include chapter or page numbers if applicable).
-Let us know how long have you been using this or other Raven products.
We will not share your email or any information you provide with anyone else. Your feedback
is valued and extremely important to us.
Thank you for your time.
14
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
CHAPTER
3
Installation
Chapter3
Overview of the Installation Process
The following is intended as an overview of the installation process. These instructions cover the basic
installation of the Envizio Pro and necessary hardware. For additional instructions on installing optional
hardware with the field computer, refer to the instructions provided with the optional component(s). Instructions
for building a CAN (Controller Area Network) system can be found in Chapter 4, CAN Networking and
Diagnostics.
Basic installation of the Envizio Pro field computer is as follows:
1.
Review kit contents
2.
Mount the field computer
3.
Mount the DGPS antenna
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
15
Chapter 3
Kit Contents
Before proceeding with installation of the field computer, review the contents provided with the field computer.
TABLE 1. Envizio
Pro II with Scalable GPS Kit Contents
Envizio Pro II with
OmniSTAR Ready
Components
Envizio Pro II Field Computer
MBA-6 (Helix) Antenna
Antenna Cable (20’)
Aerial Antenna Mounting
Plate (Optional)
Mounting Kit (includes
Hardware)
OmniSTAR XP/HP
Authorization Codeb
Envizio Pro Installation and
Operation Manual
Envizio Pro Quick Reference
Guide
Part Number 117-5010-009VWLa
063-0173-537
1
063-0172-651
1
115-0171-787
1
063-0172-971
1
117-0171-132
1
077-0180-081
1
016-0171-148
1
016-0171-149
1
a. The kit letter indicates the included options for internal
receiver correction source(s). ‘VWL’ kits are enabled for SBAS
only.
b. OmniSTAR or GS activation and subscription must be
purchased separately if not included with the kit.
TABLE 2. Envizio
Pro with Switch Pro Kit Contents
Envizio Pro II with Envizio Pro without
SBAS
GPS Receiver
Components
Versatile Envizio Pro II Field
Computer with Built-in Receiver
Versatile Envizio Pro Field
Computer without Built-in Receiver
Versatile Switch Pro Kit
Envizio Pro to Switch Pro Cable
MBA-6 (Helix) Antenna
Antenna Cable (20’)
Mounting Kit (includes Hardware)
Envizio Pro Installation and
Operation Manual
Envizio Pro Quick Reference Guide
16
Part Number
117-0171-382
063-0173-301
1
063-0173-315
117-0171-383
1
117-0171-381
115-0171-821
063-0173-317
115-0171-787
117-0171-132
1
1
1
1
1
016-0171-493
1
016-0171-494
1
1
1
1
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Installation
Envizio Pro Kit Contents (Drawing Number 054-2040-004)
3
FIGURE 1.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
17
Chapter 3
Mounting the Field Computer
Refer to the following requirements when selecting a mounting location for the Envizio Pro field computer:
• Mount the field computer inside of the machine cabin or driver compartment within easy reach of the driver
or operator. The field computer is not weatherproof.
• Securely fasten the RAM mounting arm to a suitable, flat surface. Once mounted, the RAM mounting arm
must provide a stable base for the console and should not impede normal machine operation.
• Mount the field computer in a location where it will not be jarred during normal equipment operation. Keep
the computer clear of moving elements within the machine’s cab.
• Route all cables to avoid tripping hazards and protect the cable from kinking or breaking during operation.
To mount the Envizio Pro or Envizio Pro II field computer:
Note:
If the CAN Switch Box will be installed with the Envizio Pro field computers, use the mounting
hardware provided with the CAN Switch Box. Refer to the CAN Switch Box Installation and
Operation Guide for mounting instructions.
1.
Mount the circular base of the RAM socket arm (P/N 117-0171-132) securely within the cab of the vehicle.
2.
Using the four mounting posts and supplied hardware, secure the field computer to the square plate of the
RAM mounting arm.
FIGURE 2.
Envizio Pro and Envizio Pro II Rear Panel
Auxiliary Interface
Connector
Mounting Posts
Main Interface
Connector
3.
18
Insert the ball mounting posts into the socket mounting arms and tighten the hand screw to secure the field
computer at the desired mounting location.
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Installation
Cable Platforms and Connections
Two cable platform options are available for use with the Envizio Pro field computers. Each platform offers a
range of optional features which can be added to the control system at any time.
NOTICE
Please review the Raven CANbus Network
Installation Manual for installation instructions
for the specific cable platform being installed
with the field computer prior to beginning
installation. Contact a local Raven dealer for
assistance or to purchase additional
components necessary to set up the CANbus
system.
Generation 1 Cable Connections
3
Important: Ensure that the Envizio Pro field computer has been properly mounted and all component cabling is
connected properly before connecting the Envizio Pro to power.
FIGURE 3.
Generation 1 Main Interface Cable Connection Diagram
To Field Computer
Main Interface Port
+12V DC
GND
Auxiliary
Power Output
3 Amps Max.
CANbus
Ext. Switch
Console
DGPS
+12V Switched
1.
Route the conduit with red and white leads to a clean, controlled power source such as a clean power bus
bar or junction box.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
19
Chapter 3
2.
Connect the red lead wire to a clean +12V DC power source.
CAUTION
Even when the field computer is powered off,
the computer will draw a small current from the
battery. Connect the red wire to a controlled
power source or, if the machine will not be in
use for an extended period of time, remove
power from the field computer.
To prevent accidental data loss, the red wire
should be connected to a clean power source.
3.
Connect the white wire to ground.
Note:
FIGURE 4.
Do not connect the orange wire to external power. The orange wire is switched power out of the
field computer. When the field computer is powered, +12V DC is applied to the orange wire to
power an external device. If more than one amp is required to power a device connected to the
orange wire, install a relay to switch the higher currents.
Relay (P/N 415-1001-009) Terminals
Batt +
Batt -
12V Switched
to Node Power
To 12V Switched Orange
Wire Key Switch
20
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Installation
Generation 2 Cable Connections
The chassis cable platform requires the following components:
• Machine specific chassis cable
• Envizio Pro chassis interface cable (P/N 115-0172-001)
• CAN Switch Box kit (P/N 117-5020-001)
Note:
Generation 2 Cable Connection Diagram (Drawing Number 054-5000-001)
3
FIGURE 5.
Contact a local Raven dealer for switch box options. Refer to the Raven CANbus Network
Installation Manual for additional cabling information for the generation 2 cable platform.
Note:
The CAN Switch Box is not used with the optional Raven OmniRow system.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
21
Chapter 3
Chassis Interface Cable and CAN Switch Box Connection
Note:
The CAN Switch Box and switch box mounting bracket should be mounted to the Envizio Pro field
computer prior to beginning the following procedure. Refer to the CAN Switch Box Installation and
Operation Guide for detailed instructions.
1.
Locate the single round connector labeled ‘To Chassis or SmarTrax Tee Cable’ on the Envizio Pro/Viper Pro
chassis interface cable (P/N 115-0172-001).
2.
Insert this connector into the ‘To Cab Cable’ on the chassis cable installed on the vehicle. Thread the
connectors together to secure the connection.
3.
Route the end of the cable with two round connectors to the back of the Envizio Pro and connect to the
main and auxiliary ports.
4.
Connect the 2-pin Deutsch connector labeled ‘Switched Power Output’ to the back of the CAN Switch Box.
5.
Connect the 4-pin Deutsch connector labeled ‘CANbus’ to the back of the CAN Switch Box.
6.
Connect the 3-pin round connector labeled ‘GPS Speed Out’ to the back of the CAN Switch Box.
Note:
Disconnect the 3-pin ‘GPS Speed Out’ connection if using GPS speed over CAN as the speed
source. Refer to the Speed Cal section on page 187 for additional assistance with speed sensor
types and speed calibration values.
If the chassis interface cable (P/N 115-0172-001) is installed and the internal DGPS receiver will
be used for DGPS reception, the ‘Internal GPS Receiver Output’ and ‘GPS Receiver/DGPS’ port
connectors must be connected together.
DGPS Antenna
Note:
To enable the guidance capabilities of the field computer, DGPS signal must be supplied by one of
the following:
• The internal DGPS receiver
• An optional external receiver capable of outputting messages at a minimum of 10 Hz.
For more information on configuring the Envizio Pro or Envizio Pro II field computers for one of the
above options, see Chapter 7, Tools Menu.
With the internal receiver, the Envizio Pro or Envizio Pro II only requires a connection to a DGPS antenna in
order to create application maps. To ensure the best possible signal reception, the following recommendations
should be considered when selecting the DGPS antenna mounting position.
• Mount the DGPS antenna to the tallest point of the vehicle (usually the vehicle’s cab) using the standard
magnet mount.
• Make sure that the DGPS antenna has a clear 360° view of the sky.
• Mount the DGPS antenna at least of 36” [92 cm] from other antennas (e.g. radio, cellular, etc.) to avoid
signal interference.
• The simplest setup is achieved by mounting the antenna on the center-line of the vehicle.
22
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Installation
Aerial Antenna Mounting Plate (Optional)
An optional aerial antenna mounting plate (P/N 063-0172-971) is included with field computers featuring a
helix style antenna. If no suitable magnetic mounting location exists on the vehicle, this mounting plate may be
affixed to the tallest point of the vehicle to provide a magnetic surface for mounting the GPS antenna.
Connecting the Antenna to the Internal DGPS Receiver
1.
(Helix antennas only) Connect the antenna cable (P/N 115-0171-787) to the antenna.
2.
Route the cable into the cab and connect to the antenna port on the back of the field computer.
FIGURE 6.
Antenna Port for Internal DGPS Receiver
Note:
3.
3
Antenna Port
Envizio Pro consoles without the internal DGPS receiver will not feature the antenna port.
If the chassis interface cable (P/N 115-0172-001) is installed and the internal DGPS receiver will be used for
DGPS reception, the ‘Internal GPS Receiver Output’ and ‘GPS Receiver/DGPS’ port connectors must be
connected together.
FIGURE 7.
Envizio Pro and Envizio Pro II Antenna Options for Internal DGPS Receivers
MBA-3 Antenna Kit
(P/N 117-0171-141)
Patch Antenna
(P/N 063-0172-101)
MBA-3
Helix Antenna
(P/N 063-0172-480)
20’ TNC (M) - BNC (M) Cable
(P/N 115-0171-787)
Note:
MBA-6
Helix Antenna
(P/N 063-0172-651)
20’ TNC (M) - BNC (M) Cable
(P/N 115-0171-787)
The Envizio Pro II requires an MBA-6 helix antenna (P/N 063-0172-651) for use with RTK, GS, or
OmniSTAR correction sources with the internal GPS receiver.
Connecting External DGPS Receiver Systems
1.
Follow installation instructions included with any optional or additional external DGPS components before
connecting to the field computer or related cabling.
2.
Signal from an external DGPS receiver must be routed into the field computer via the connector labeled
‘GPS Receiver’ or ‘DGPS’ on the main interface cable (P/N 115-0171-746) or chassis interface cable (P/N
115-0172-001).
3.
For help with setting up the field computer to use the signal from an external receiver, refer to Chapter 7,
Tools Menu.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
23
Chapter 3
Installing Optional Equipment
The following sections offer descriptions of optional hardware or configurations in which the Envizio Pro is
capable of operating.
Boom Sense Wire
The boom sense wire may be connected to the master switch functions of the machine to allow seamless
operation of vehicle master on/off and the field computer mapping feature.
If the boom sense wire is properly connected, the vehicle master on/off switch also toggles the product
coverage mapping based on a +12V signal detected on this wire.
Generation 1 Cabling
Connect the spade connector on the main interface cable (P/N 115-0171-746) labeled “Ext. Switch” (external
switch) to the machine master switch.
FIGURE 8.
Main Interface Cable (P/N 115-0171-746) Boom Sense Wire Connection
Boom Sense Wire
Note:
24
Contact the machine manufacturer for more information on connecting the boom sense wire on the
specific machine.
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Installation
Generation 2 Cabling
Connect the spade connector on the main interface cable (P/N 115-0172-001) labeled “Ext. Switch” (external
switch) to the machine master switch.
FIGURE 9.
Field Computer Cabin Cable (P/N 115-0172-001) Boom Sense Wire Connection
To Field Computer
To Chassis Cable
Note:
Revision A or B cabin cables may not provide the purple boom sense wire. Contact a local Raven
dealer for additional options or to replace the cable.
Contact the machine manufacturer for more information on connecting the boom sense wire on
the specific machine.
AccuBoom™
Refer to the machine specific installation materials for instructions on installing AccuBoom on the machine.
Note:
When used with a CAN product control system, AccuBoom requires a boom/speed node with
program D or newer for proper AccuBoom functionality.
AccuBoom™ Master Switch
The AccuBoom master switch option will allow AccuBoom to toggle coverage mapping and section information
as reported by the AccuBoom node.
To enable the AccuBoom master switch, connect the orange wire with white stripe on the AccuBoom node
harness to the machine master switch. Contact a local Raven dealer for more information on part numbers and
availability of the AccuBoom feature for the specific sprayer model.
Contact the machine manufacturer for more information on connecting this feature.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
25
3
Boom Sense Wire
Chapter 3
Light Bar
Envizio Pro field computers are capable of interfacing with an external Raven light bar through the auxiliary
interface cable (P/N 115-0171-745) or the chassis interface cable (P/N 115-0172-001).
If an external light bar is desired, follow the installation instructions provided with the light bar before
connecting the light bar to the field computer. Once installation of the light bar is complete, connect the light bar
cable to the serial connector labeled ‘COM 3’ on the appropriate interface cable. See Chapter 7, Tools Menu,
for information on configuring the field computer to send messages to the external light bar.
TM-1 Tilt Module
GPS receivers output position information relative to the position of the DGPS antenna. Most often, the
antenna is mounted on the top of the machine which means the GPS location is only accurate when the
machine is on level ground. On uneven terrain, such as side hills, the actual ground position may differ from
the location of the GPS antenna.
FIGURE 10.
Reported GPS Position Error Due to Side Hill
Tilt
Angle
Error
ST ARLI N
K
Antenn
a
Height
Error
The Raven TM-1 Tilt Module compensates for any tilt of the vehicle from a level field condition. To supply tilt
compensated GPS signal, the Raven TM-1 Tilt Sensor receives a raw DGPS signal from the DGPS receiver
and outputs a tilt corrected signal to guidance devices or controllers.
If connected directly to the ‘DGPS’ connector on the main interface cable (P/N 115-0171-746) or chassis
interface cable (P/N 115-0172-001), the field computer may be used to configure the TM-1. Refer to the TM-1
Tilt Module Installation and Operation manual for details and installation diagrams for installing the Tilt Module
with the Envizio Pro field computer.
Note:
See the System Menu section on page 93 for information on setting up the TM-1 using the field
computer.
When routing tilt corrected signal through a SmarTrax controller and back into the Envizio Pro, the
TM-1 will need to be calibrated through the SmarTrax controller rather than the field computer. See
the SmarTrax Quick Start Guide or Operator’s Manual for more details on setting up and operating
the TM-1 with a SmarTrax controller.
26
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Installation
SmarTrax™
Envizio Pro field computers are capable of operating with optional Raven hydraulic and mechanical drive
assisted steering systems such as Raven SmarTrax or SmarTrax MD.
GPS signal is routed into the SmarTrax controller and then fed into the field computer via the ‘DGPS’
connector on the Envizio Pro main interface cable (P/N 115-0171-746) or chassis interface
cable (P/N 115-0172-001).
When the SmarTrax system is engaged, the assisted steering system controls the vehicle steering system,
either hydraulically or by mechanically turning the steering wheel, to guide the vehicle along a guidance path
displayed on the field computer Guidance screen. See the Source section on page 133 to configure the
Envizio Pro to use an optional SmarTrax system.
Serial Console
Envizio Pro Gen 1 Cable Platform with Serial Control Console
3
FIGURE 11.
The Envizio Pro may be connected to a Raven serial control console via a serial port connection. In this
configuration, the field computer is primarily used for the data logging, mapping, and guidance.
Note:
If connected to a serial control console, the field computer does not require a separate boom/
speed or product control node. An AccuBoom, AutoBoom, or SmarTrax node still may be
connected to the field computer.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
27
Chapter 3
Use one of the following Raven RS-232 cables to connect the serial port on the back of the serial control
console to the connector labeled ‘Console’ on the Envizio Pro interface cable.
Description
RS-232 cable - 3 ft.
RS-232 cable - 10 ft.
Note:
Part Number
115-0171-040
115-0159-822
Use only a Raven RS-232 communication cable between the field computer and the serial control
console. Contact a local Raven dealer for purchasing and more information.
See Chapter 7, Tools Menu, to setup the field computer for the serial console connection.
AutoBoom®
Follow the machine or implement specific installation manual to install the AutoBoom hydraulic valve and
hoses.
NOTICE
Read all safety requirements and precautions in
the machine specific installation manual prior to
operating a machine equipped with the
AutoBoom feature. Failure to follow safety
precautions may lead to damage to equipment,
injury or death.
CANbus Network Connection
Envizio Pro field computers are capable of controlling up to four product nodes or control channels (with
required activation keys) on a CANbus system. The field computer will automatically scan for CAN product
control, planter control, AccuBoom, AutoBoom, SmarTrax, boom sense and speed nodes connected through
the CAN connection.
See Chapter 4, CAN Networking and Diagnostics, or the Raven CANbus Installation Manual, for additional
information.
28
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
CHAPTER
4
CAN Networking and
Diagnostics
Chapter4
A Controller Area Network, or CAN, system is a high-integrity serial data communications bus that operates at
a data rate of 250 kilobits per second for real-time control applications and uses special cables and terminators
for operation. The CAN protocol has excellent error detection and confinement capabilities, making it very
suitable and reliable for agricultural applications.
CAN systems allow products to be added to a control system at any time. Up to four product control nodes or
control channels can be connected to the Envizio Pro control system for any combination of liquid, granular,
chemical injection or spinner control applications.
The diagrams in this chapter show different hardware configurations for use with Envizio Pro series field
computers. Some diagrams show optional features which may not apply to each system. These features and
components are not required for CAN operation and optional features and cables may be ignored during a
basic installation.
NOTICE
Refer to the Raven CANbus Network
Installation Manual for installation information
for individual CANbus control components. Be
sure each component is properly mounted and
cables are connected prior to powering the field
computer.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
29
Chapter 4
FIGURE 1.
30
Envizio Pro Dual Product (Liquid/Granular) CAN Control System
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
CAN Networking and Diagnostics
CAN Diagnostics
The field computer must be able to communicate with the CANbus system when monitoring or controlling
product application. If configured as a CAN control console, the Envizio Pro should automatically establish
communication with the boom/speed node, the AccuBoom, AutoBoom, or SmarTrax Terrain Compensation
nodes (if installed), and up to four product control nodes via the CANbus.
Note:
Product nodes may need to be readdressed prior to detecting each node on the CANbus. See the
Readdressing Product Nodes section on page 31 for detailed instructions on readdressing the
product nodes.
Contact a local Raven dealer for more information on required activation keys for controlling up to
four products using the Envizio Pro field computers.
To view a list of nodes currently detected on the CANbus network:
1.
Select the Information icon in the upper, right corner of the Home screen.
2.
Touch the
icon on the About Envizio Pro screen to display the CAN Diagnostics screen.
Readdress Nodes
4
Reset Defaults
Retry CAN
Communication
Service Mode
Update Nodes
Note:
Node Hardware
Information
Select Channels
If a product is not found, troubleshoot the node to determine why the field computer cannot
communicate with the node. See the CAN Troubleshooting section on page 34 for more
information about CAN communication failures.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
31
Chapter 4
Node Version Information
The CAN Diagnostics screen displays the software version, software revision and program number of each
node detected on the CANbus.
1.20 (143)
Software
Version
Software
Revision
Program
Number
Readdressing Product Nodes
If the field computer is unable to detect a CANbus node on startup, troubleshoot the CANbus and the node
(see the CAN Troubleshooting section on page 34) and then readdress the CANbus:
Note:
Only nodes controlling product application will need to be addressed if multiple product nodes are
on the CANbus (e.g. single product, dual product, motor control, planter control, etc.).
1.
Select the Information icon in the upper, right corner of the Home screen.
2.
Touch the
icon on the About Envizio Pro screen to display the CAN Diagnostics screen.
3.
Touch the
button to begin readdressing the product control nodes.
4.
When prompted to cycle power on the first product node, disconnect the logic power from the product node
to be controlled as Product 1. After approximately 3 seconds, reconnect the node logic power. The field
computer should have recognized the node as ‘Product 1.’
5.
If additional product nodes are installed in the CANbus, repeat step 4 to readdress the remaining product
nodes as necessary.
6.
Touch the Accept icon to finish readdressing the product nodes.
32
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
CAN Networking and Diagnostics
Reset CANbus Defaults
NOTICE
Resetting system defaults will clear all
calibration information from any product control
nodes. Before resetting system defaults, it is
recommended to write down any necessary
calibration information that may help to
recalibrate the system.
To reset all product control nodes on the system:
1.
From the Home screen, touch the Tools Menu icon and access the Control Interface screen from the
System menu.
2.
Touch the
icon along the right side of the screen to access the CAN Diagnostics screen.
3.
Touch the
button to clear all product node or control channel settings. Use the Calibration Reference
Sheet section on page vii if necessary to record the required calibration values for system operation. To
help record additional settings for each node, step through or review the Product Control Setup Wizard
section on page 44.
4.
Touch the Accept icon to proceed with the system reset or select the Cancel icon to return to the CAN
Diagnostics screen without resetting the CANbus system.
Note:
Refer to the Product Control Setup Wizard section on page 44 for assistance recalibrating the
product control nodes.
If a node currently connected to the CANbus system is not displayed on the CAN Diagnostics screen, touch
the
button to start the CAN system. If the node still does not appear on the CAN Diagnostics screen, the
CANbus system may need to be readdressed. Review the Readdressing Product Nodes section on page 31
for instructions on readdressing the product nodes.
Service Mode
The service mode is intended for use by a trained Raven technician and may be used to assist with
troubleshooting and diagnostics. Contact a local Raven dealer for additional assistance.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
33
4
Retry CAN Communication
Chapter 4
Additional Node Options
The following features or options may also be available via the CAN Diagnostics screen:
Select Control Channels
The Raven product controller node is capable of providing up to four product control channels on
an Envizio Pro control system. By default, the product controller will make two control channels
available to the field computer for controlling product application.
Select one of the product controller node channels and select the Select Channels icon (shown to
the left) to set the number of control channels available via the node.
Note:
The Select Channels icon will display the current number of channels which the node is providing
to the field computer. Each control channel must be configured separately via the Tools Menu.
Hardware Summary
Select a node from the list displayed on the CAN Diagnostics screen and touch this icon to view
detailed node hardware information if available. The hardware summary screen provides node
operating information that may be helpful when contacting technical support or while
troubleshooting CAN communication issues.
Note:
If the node is not capable of providing hardware information, the Hardware Summary screen will
display “N/A” for the unavailable diagnostic values.
Update CAN Nodes
Select a node from the list displayed on the CAN Diagnostics screen and touch this icon to update
the node firmware via the CANbus network using the field computer. Refer to Appendix E,
Updating CAN Nodes via the Envizio Pro, for additional assistance performing a node update
using the field computer.
34
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
CAN Networking and Diagnostics
CAN Troubleshooting
Although the control algorithm is located within the CAN node, all of the same troubleshooting techniques that
are used in a traditional hard-wired or serial control systems still apply to a CAN system and the behavior of the
system remains the same. Flow and speed sensors, as well as the control valve and boom valves, are used in
the same fashion.
CAN Node Off-line Errors
Occasional reports have been received on Raven consoles sporadically losing communication with one or
more CAN nodes. The most likely causes for this problem are:
1.
Corroded and/or open connections in the circuit.
2.
Computer and/or CAN node logic power and grounds connected to a “dirty” power source (dirty power is
defined as any circuit with a variable load that exceeds 1 ampere). This is especially true of circuits loaded
by electrical coils.
3.
Computer and/or nodes connected to different power and/or ground sources. This can result in components
operating at different voltage planes.
4
Refer to the Raven CANbus Network Installation Manual for detailed troubleshooting procedures and
information.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
35
Chapter 4
36
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
CHAPTER
5
Startup, Initial Setup,
and Setup Wizards
Chapter5
Overview
The first time the Envizio Pro field computer is powered up, the field computer will require some information
about the machine, implement, and the type of applications, products and additional features connected to the
system. The field computer gathers this information through a setup wizard which will prompt the user to input
the required information to setup the computer for the first time.
Initial Setup
The initial setup wizard will automatically begin when the console is powered up for the first time. This process
should only take a few minutes to complete and is only required during the initial power up sequence.
Note:
If the field computer displays an alert regarding an authorization code after starting the console,
contact a local Raven for assistance. Refer to the Special Features Registration section on
page 138 for instructions on entering the authorization code.
The initial setup wizard will require the following vehicle information:
•
•
•
•
Desired language and display units for operation.
Guidance width (width of boom or implement without fence row nozzles, foam markers, etc.).
Antenna offsets (left/right, fore/aft) and height.
Whether the field computer will be interfacing with a CAN system, another Raven serial console, or none of
these systems.
• How the boom master switch operation should be monitored by the field computer.
Other Required Wizards
Additional wizards may be required during the initial startup depending upon the settings and selections
entered during this process. Detailed descriptions of those wizards are also available in this chapter.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
37
Chapter 5
Launching Wizards
To start the setup wizards after the initial power up has been completed, select the wizard icon in the upper left
corner of the Tools menu.
See the Setup Wizards section on page 42 for a detailed description of the other available wizards.
Startup
The Envizio Pro field computer will take several seconds to power up and initialize the user interface, DGPS
reception and the other features of the system.
During startup, the field computer will display the following prompt.
Ignore this prompt to allow the field computer to startup normally.
Note:
38
To launch the touch screen calibration wizard, touch the screen while this prompt is displayed.
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Startup, Initial Setup, and Setup Wizards
Touch Screen Calibration
The touch screen displays an arrow in the location last selected. If the arrow does not appear in the location
previously touched, the touch screen may need to be recalibrated.
Note:
The Envizio Pro does not require re-calibration of the touch screen every time the console is
powered on. Use this procedure only if you are having difficulty with the user interface or the
cursor appears in a different location than selected on the touch screen.
To Re-calibrate the Touch Screen
1.
When prompted, touch the screen to begin re-calibration of the touch screen. The first calibration target will
appear.
Note:
2.
The operator has approximately seven seconds to touch the screen to begin the calibration
process.
Touch the center of the target.
Note:
Each of the four following targets will require the operator to touch the center of the target.
3.
After all of the calibration targets have been completed, test the touch screen calibration by touching in
various areas of the screen.
4.
Two options will appear in the lower left corner of the screen:
5
• Touch ‘Accept’ to apply the screen re-calibration and start the field computer.
• Touch ‘Cancel’ to reject the screen calibration. The field computer will re-apply the previous
touch screen calibration before starting the Envizio Pro management software.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
39
Chapter 5
Initial Setup Wizard
The initial setup wizard will automatically begin when the Envizio Pro is powered up for the first time. This
wizard will step through the initial settings and calibration values required for operation of the field computer
and control system. This process is only required during the initial power up sequence.
Any values or settings programmed during the initial setup wizard may be modified or refined later through the
Tools Menu.
Note:
Many of the values entered in the initial setup wizard are required for guidance and/or product
control features of the control system. Therefore, the more accurate these values, the more
accurate the control system will be.
Review the following steps and sections for assistance with completing the initial setup wizard. To confirm the
settings displayed on a screen and proceed with the initial setup wizard, touch the ‘Next’ or ‘Accept’ icons. If
available, the ‘Previous’ icon will step back to the previous Setup screen.
Previous
Note:
Next
Accept
The following steps are provided as a process overview. The following procedure will reference
specific sections in Chapter 7, Tools Menu, for details on specific settings and configuration
assistance.
1.
The Region screen is displayed automatically when the field computer is powered on for the first time.
Select the preferred language and units for display on the field computer. Refer to the Region section on
page 137 for details on the available settings or region selections.
2.
If desired, configured the time zone by selecting the Time Zone
icon in the upper, right corner of the
Region screen. Refer to the Time Zone Settings section on page 137 for details.
3.
Touch the Next
4.
The Control Interface screen will be displayed. Select the Product Control option desired for interfacing with
the control system on the configured implement. For detailed information on the control option settings,
refer to the Product Control Options section on page 94.
Note:
icon proceed with the initial field computer setup.
It is not possible to complete configuration of the OmniSeed control option until the activation key
is entered on the field computer. Select the ‘None’ option to complete the initial configuration
wizard. Refer to the Special Features Registration section on page 138 for a procedure to enter
the activation key and then return to the Setup Wizard menu and restart the set up wizard to
configure the OmniSeed Control Interface.
5.
Review the available system options at the bottom of the Control Interface screen. See the Boom Master
and System Options section on page 97 for details.
6.
Touch the Serial Port
icon in the upper, right corner of the screen to configure an optional serial device
or light bar if desired. See the Serial Port Configuration section on page 98 for information on the available
serial port settings.
7.
Select the CAN Diagnostics
icon in the upper, right corner of the screen to check the status of the
network and nodes currently detected and communicating with the field computer. Review the CAN
Diagnostics section on page 30 for information on using the field computer to check status and readdress
the CANbus.
40
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Startup, Initial Setup, and Setup Wizards
8.
Touch the Next
icon to proceed with the initial field computer setup.
9.
Use the on-screen keypad to enter the implement, boom, or header width to the nearest inch [centimeter].
The value entered on this screen must be equal to the boom, implement, or header width which completes
a field operation as the vehicle drives through the field. See the Guidance Width section on page 141 for
more information on the Guidance Width value.
10.
Once the Guidance width value is entered, select the Next
icon to proceed to the Implement Type
screen.
11.
Select one of the following options for an initial implement type to which the field computer will be
connected during field operations.
Self Propelled or Mounted Implement. This option is best suited for fixed implements such as self-propelled
sprayer, a harvester or combine, or an implement mounted to a tractor 3-point hitch. See the Self Propelled
or Mounted Implement section on page 142 for details on configuring implements using this implement
type.
Trailed Implement. Select this option to configure implements such as anhydrous tool bars, pull-type
sprayers, planters, or air seeders with the air cart towed behind the seed drill. Refer to the Trailed
Implement Tractor Setup section on page 144 for assistance with the trailed implement configuration.
Trailed Implement with Tow Between. This option has been designed for seeder implement configurations
with the air cart towed between the tractor and seed drill. Refer to the Trailed Implement with Tow Between
Setup section on page 146 for more information and assistance using the trailed implement with tow
between option.
Additional implements may be configured at a later time for different towed implement or tractor
configurations. Save Profiles for each configured tractor and implement configuration to simplify set up
when moving the field computers between vehicles or the tractor is hitched to different implements. Refer to
the Profiles section on page 152 for information on saving or loading vehicle profiles.
12.
Touch the Next
icon to continue with the implement setup process. Refer to the specific implement
setup process in the Offsets and Implement Type Selection section on page 142 for details on completing
the implement configuration.
13.
After the specific implement setup process is completed, touch the Next
calibration wizard and display the Setup Wizards Menu screen.
5
icon to complete the initial
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
41
Chapter 5
Setup Wizards
The setup wizards simplify the task of setting up the Envizio Pro control system for different products,
implements or vehicles. Each setup wizard will display a series of prompts for which settings and calibration
values will be required.
Setup Wizard Menu
After the initial setup is complete, a menu of the available setup wizards can be displayed by selecting the
wizard icon in the upper left corner of the Tools menu.
See Chapter 7, Tools Menu, for detailed descriptions of the other features accessible through the Tools menu.
The Setup Wizard Menu will display the available setup wizards which may be used to complete the initial
setup of the field computer.
Note:
Depending upon previous options selected during the initial setup wizard, completion of some
wizards may be required before the field computer is ready for operation.
Only setup wizards which apply to the system will be displayed in the Setup Wizard Menu. For
example, if a Glide Series AutoBoom system is not present on the CANbus, the AutoBoom setup
wizard will not be displayed on this screen.
To launch a wizard, touch the icon next to the desired setup wizard to begin. Touch the Accept
the Setup Wizard Menu.
Note:
icon to exit
During the initial setup wizard, the Accept icon will be available only after all required wizards have
been completed.
Refer to the following sections for detailed instructions on completing the setup wizards.
42
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Startup, Initial Setup, and Setup Wizards
Product Section Setup Wizard
The product section setup wizard will guide the operator through configuring section widths and will require the
following information:
•
•
•
•
Number of sections
Section widths
Section configuration
Desired section labels
Using the Product Section Setup Wizard
1.
Touch the Product Section Setup Wizard icon. The Number of Sections screen will display.
2.
Use the Up and Down arrow buttons to setup the number of sections for the vehicle or implement. Touch
Note:
icon to proceed to the Section Width screen.
To utilize automatic or individual section control, plumbing or section control hardware on the
vehicle or implement must allow for individual section control. If the machine is not capable of
controlling individual sections, set the number of sections to 1 and enter the overall boom or
implement width on the Section Width screen.
3.
Configure the width of each section starting with the
far left section. Use the on-screen keypad to enter
the section width.
4.
Touch the Next
icon to accept the entered
value and advance to the next section to the right.
Note:
To skip a section, enter a value of zero as
the section width.
5.
Repeat step 3 and step 4until the widths have been
entered for all sections.
6.
Touch the Next
icon on the last Section Width
screen to advance to the Configure Sections screen.
7.
If desired, touch the ‘Configure Section Labels’
button to customize section labels for the configured sections. Refer to the Configuring Section Labels
section on page 150 for additional assistance with configuring section labels displayed by the field
computer during field operations.
8.
Select the Section Mapping option if desired to manually configure the section switch functions for
customized functionality during field operations.
5
the Next
For Example:If using the switch box to control multiple products assigned to overlapping boom
configurations (e.g. seeder implement with liquid sections), the section mapping feature allows the switch box
to be configured so that the left most seed sections for 2 seed product sections are enabled or disabled using
the same switch. Refer to Figure 2 on page 235 for a graphic of this example.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
43
Chapter 5
9.
The field computer also allows the operator to set and adjust the location of configured sections. For
standard configurations, such as a sprayer boom, a combine header or a single section implement, select
the Auto Configure button to automatically align sections end-to-end along the swath midpoint.
Note:
Individual section locations may be manually modified after the operator has selected to
automatically configure the section locations.
For implement configurations where sections are staggered, overlapping or spread out, touch the Manually
Configure button to manually adjust the fore/aft and left/right offsets for each individual section. Refer to
Manually Configure Sections section on page 151.
Note:
10.
The offset distances represent the offset from the DGPS antenna to the center of the selected
section.
Select the Auto or Manually Configure buttons and then touch the Next
Wizard Menu screen.
icon to return to the Setup
Product Control Setup Wizard
The product control setup wizard will require the following information for each product connected to the field
computer CANbus control system:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Note:
44
Speed cal and sensor type
Application type
Valve cal and valve type
Meter cal
Rate cal
Section assignments
By default, the product controller node is set to provide two control channels for the field computer.
The initial configuration wizard will need to be completed before the number of control channels
may be modified.
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Startup, Initial Setup, and Setup Wizards
Using the Product Control Setup Wizard
1.
Touch the Product Control Setup Wizard icon to begin the setup wizard. The Speed Cal screen will display.
2.
Use the radio buttons toward the left side of the screen to select the type of speed sensor which will be
used with the control system.
3.
Touch the button labeled ‘Speed Cal’ and use the on-screen keypad to enter the calibration value for the
speed sensor installed on the vehicle. Refer to the Speed section on page 101 for more information about
the speed cal value.
Raven Industries recommends the following speed calibration values for initial system setup.
Sensor Type
Setting
Radar/GPS
Wheel
Recommended Initial Speed Cal
Used with
External Raven GPS
Receiver
Internal DGPS Receiver
GPS Speed over CANbus
Raven Radar
Wheel Magnets
Speedometer Drive Speed
Sensor
English
Metric
785
199
812
1000
598
1000
206
1000
152
254
612
155
These values are good starting points and generally yield adequate results, however, the speed cal should
be refined for each specific vehicle and speed sense system. See Appendix A, Calculating the Calibration
Values, for instructions on refining the speed cal value.
Note:
The GPS speed over CANbus feature is only available with specific Raven speed sense nodes.
This feature utilizes NMEA speed over ground data transmitted over the CAN network which
eliminates the need for a separate, external speed sensor.
NOTICE
The test speed and distance values are not required to complete initial setup of the field computer.
Refer to the System Menu section on page 93 for detailed information about these settings.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
45
5
When using the GPS speed over CANbus
feature, no calibration or adjustment is
necessary or recommended to the speed cal
value. Losing GPS signal for more than a
second will also result in loss of the CAN speed
signal which may affect product application in
progress.
Chapter 5
4.
Touch the Next
icon to continue the product control set up. The Application Type screen will display for
the first product control channel.
5.
Use the scroll bar if necessary and select the type of application which the field computer will be interfacing
with on control channel 1. See the Application Type section on page 100 for more information on the
available application types.
6.
Touch the Next
icon to proceed to the Valve Calibration screen.
Standard/Fast/Fast Close
7.
PWM/PWM Close
Select the type of control valve which will be used on the first control channel. Touch the ‘Reset Valve Cal’
button to let the field computer insert the recommended initial calibration value.
Raven Industries recommends the following valve calibration values for initial system setup.
Control Valve Type
Standard
Fast and Fast Close
PWM and PWM Close
Valve Cal
2123
743
43
These values are good starting points and will generally yield adequate results, however, the valve cal
46
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Startup, Initial Setup, and Setup Wizards
should be refined for the individual control valves installed on each specific machine. See Appendix A,
Calculating the Calibration Values, for instructions on refining the valve cal value.
Note:
The Valve Advance button is only available if the assigned product node has software version 1.50
or higher. Refer to the Valve Advance (Standard or Fast Valve) section on page 105 for
information about the Valve Advance feature.
The Modify PWM Settings button will only be displayed if PWM or PWM Close is selected as the
valve type. Refer to the Modify PWM Settings (PWM or PWM Close Valve) section on page 106
for information on these settings.
8.
Touch the Next
icon. The field computer will display a
prompt for one of the following:
• Meter cal for the flow meter used to measure the first
control channel 1 (liquid products). The flow meter
calibration number can be found on the tag attached
to the flow meter. Refer to the Meter Cal section on
page 191 for details on adjusting the meter cal.
Note:
Copy the information from the tag for future reference
as the tags may fade or be lost during operation.
• Density of product 1 (granular products). Refer to
Product Density section on page 200 for details on the product density required for the control
system.
• Spinner cal (spinner control nodes). Refer to the Spinner RPM section on page 201 for
information on calculating the spinner cal value necessary for spinner control.
Use the on-screen keypad to enter the correct value.
9.
Touch the Next
icon. The field computer will display a
prompt for one of the following:
• Rate cal (liquid and granular products). Review
Appendix A, Calculating the Calibration Values, for
information on calculating the rate calibration value
for a specific application type.
• RPM cal (spinner control nodes). Refer to the
5
Spinner RPM section on page 201 for information on
the necessary RPM cal to control spinner speed
during field operations.
Use the on-screen keypad to enter the target rate or spinner
RPM for product 1.
10.
If a granular application control type is selected, the field computer will prompt the operator for the Spreader
Constant. Refer to the Spreader Constant section on page 199 for details on calculating and adjusting the
spreader constant value for the specific application equipment.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
47
Chapter 5
11.
Touch the Next
icon. The Section Assignments screen for the first control channel will be displayed.
Select the desired sections for the first product application. To turn product application off from sections,
touch the check corresponding to sections until a red x displays.
12.
Touch the Next
icon to complete the Product Control Setup Wizard for the first control channel.
If only one product control channel is available in the CANbus control system, the display will return to the
Setup Wizard Menu.
If additional product control channels are available, the field computer will automatically restart the Product
Control Setup Wizard for each channel in sequence. Repeat step 4 through step 12 to configure remaining
control channels and complete the Product Control Setup Wizard.
13.
After the last control channel configuration is complete, touch the Accept
icon to proceed to the Home
screen.
Note:
48
During initial setup of the field computer, the Accept icon will only be displayed on the Setup
Wizard Menu once all required wizards have been completed.
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Startup, Initial Setup, and Setup Wizards
AutoBoom® Setup Wizard
If an optional Glide Series AutoBoom system has been installed, the AutoBoom setup wizard is available to
calibrate and verify system settings during the initial setup.
The AutoBoom setup wizard may require the following information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Pressure Set (PowerGlide Plus)
Sensor Height and Sensor Height Offsets (UltraGlide)
PWM Frequency and Minimum Pressure Percent
Speed
Sensitivity
Stability Factor
®
Using the AutoBoom Setup Wizard
5
Refer to the CAN AutoBoom Calibration & Operation Manual for more information regarding setup and use of
the Glide Series AutoBoom system.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
49
Chapter 5
50
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Basic Operation
CHAPTER
Chapter6
6
Overview
This chapter contains information regarding the basic operation of the Envizio Pro field computer in a CANbus
control system, including:
• Home screen
• Guidance patterns
• Shutting down
• Using the guidance screen
• Starting jobs
Home Screen
After the initial startup, the field computer will automatically startup to the Home screen.
The Home screen offers access to the following features of the Envizio Pro field computer:
Start or
Resume Job
Note:
Access the
Tools Menu
Shutdown
The Envizio Pro should be properly shutdown before turning the power off on the field computer.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
51
Chapter 6
GPS Status
The current source and status of DGPS signal is displayed in the upper, left corner of the Home screen.
RTK or
CORS
Note:
OmniSTAR
HP
OmniSTAR
XP/G2
Satellite GS
Slingshot GS
NovAtel
SBAS
(WAAS/EGNOS) GL1DE® or e-Dif
Standard
The standard GPS shield will be displayed if the Envizio Pro field computer cannot determine the
type of corrections being sent from the DGPS receiver.
The status icon on the Home screen will display:
• Green if the status of GPS is okay.
• Yellow if an error or cautionary condition has been encountered.
• Red if GPS is non-functional. Make sure the DGPS antenna cable connections are secure and the antenna
has a clear, 360° view of the sky.
Note:
Refer to the GPS Menu section on page 120 for additional information on settings or features
available for the above correction sources.
RTK Fixed and Float Modes
When using an RTK correction source with the internal dual frequency GPS receiver, the GPS status indicator
may be used to determine whether the receiver is operating in RTK fixed or float modes. The RTK shield will
display:
• Green to indicate a fixed RTK position. This mode indicates that the receiver has a full RTK position fix and
is providing sub-inch corrections. The GPS Health screen will display a value of 4 for the differential mode
when operating in RTK fixed mode.
• Yellow to indicate that the receiver is operating in RTK float mode. This mode indicates that the receiver is
not able to provide a full RTK position lock due to the distance from the base station, visibility of the sky,
time of day or interference around the base station location. In the float mode, the receiver is still providing
a coarse RTK correction signal, but accuracy of the receiver may not be at a sub-inch level. The GPS
Health screen will display a value of 5 for the differential mode when operating in RTK float mode.
Touch the shield icon to display the GPS Status screen. Refer to the GPS Menu section on page 120 for more
information on the GPS Status screen.
52
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Basic Operation
Wireless Communications Status
The current status of wireless communication is displayed along the top of the Home screen display.
This icon will appear:
•
•
•
•
Gray if no wireless communications device is connected to the field computer.
Green if communication is okay.
Yellow if an error condition has been encountered.
Red if wireless communication is not available.
Touch the shield icon to display the Wireless Status screen. Refer to the Appendix C, Wireless
Communications & Remote Service for more information.
Information
6
Touch the information icon in the upper, right corner of the home screen to display the software and image
versions currently installed on the field computer.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
53
Chapter 6
Closing Jobs and Power Down
Be sure to close any open job files before turning the field computer power off. The Envizio Pro should be
powered down using the Shutdown icon on the Home screen.
NOTICE
Failure to properly close a job before turning off
the field computer may result in a loss of
application data or other information for that job.
Make sure to properly close any open jobs
before shutting down the computer.
To end jobs on the Envizio Pro:
1.
Open the menu on the Guidance screen and touch the green home icon to return to the Home screen.
2.
The Home screen will be displayed. The Home screen displays ‘Job in progress’ during an active job and
the Shutdown icon is replaced by the Stop icon.
Stop
3.
Touch the Stop icon to close the currently active job.
Note:
54
Touching the Start icon with a job in progress will return to the Guidance screen of the active job.
To begin a new job, first touch the Stop icon to close the job in progress before selecting the Start
icon.
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Basic Operation
4.
Confirm closing the open job file by touching the green check mark. To keep the current job open, touch the
red ‘x.’ Closed jobs can be re-opened later by selecting an existing job file during the Start Job procedure.
See the Setting up a Job section on page 56 for more information.
5.
The Stop icon will be replaced with the Shutdown icon. Touch the Shutdown icon to power down the field
computer.
Job Files
Overview
The Envizio Pro stores field and product information in job files. In general, job files are created for each field
and contain the following information:
•
•
•
•
Target rate (min and max)
Coverage area and area within a field boundary
Volume of product applied
Prescription map information (if applicable)
These files are automatically created for each job started on the Envizio Pro.
Note:
To ensure field computer memory resources are available, Raven recommends performing file
maintenance periodically to remove unused job files from the memory on the console. Refer to
Chapter 8, Software Updates and File Maintenance for more information.
A job file allows the operator to:
• Create and save new field boundary and coverage maps and other information for each application without
erasing or modifying previous jobs stored on the field computer.
• Load previously created job files and coverage maps to resume a job at a later date. Saved field
boundaries, zone maps, guidance paths or other information stored on the field computer for the job may be
recalled to continue the application right where the operator left off.
• Save and load job files at any time during a field application. This allows the field computer to work in
6
multiple fields or on different applications without losing application information for any other existing or
unfinished job file.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
55
Chapter 6
Starting a Job
Before starting field guidance and creating a job file, the Envizio Pro field computers require the operator to
check and verify job information. During this process, the operator may choose to create a new job or to
resume an existing job as well as enable features and options to be used during the field operation.
Note:
If the field computer will be controlling products via a Raven CAN system, make sure all nodes
connected to the CANbus are recognized and programmed correctly. Refer to Chapter 4, CAN
Networking and Diagnostics if nodes do not appear to be recognized by the field computer.
During the job setup process, the field computer may require the following information:
•
•
•
•
Type and name of the job to be created
Optional automatic section control systems such as AccuBoom or AccuRow
Product control and rate information
Optional AutoBoom system
Setting up a Job
This section contains detailed instructions for setting up a job. Depending upon the application and other
features of the product control system, some of the following steps may not be required to begin all jobs.
1.
Touch the Start icon on the Home screen. The Start Job - Verify Settings screen will be displayed.
Note:
Settings and features displayed on this screen may not be accessible while a job is in progress.
Verify that all settings are correct and all nodes connected to the CANbus are detected by the
control system before beginning the job. If the status of any nodes connected to the CANbus
display ‘Node Offline,’ refer to Chapter 4, CAN Networking and Diagnostics, before starting the job.
2.
Touch the Job button and refer to the Job File Setup section on page 58 to name a new job file or resume
an existing job saved on the field computer.
3.
Touch the AccuControl button to enable or disable an available automatic section control feature (i.e.
AccuBoom or AccuRow) or select a zone map. Refer to AccuControl Setup section on page 59 for details
on configuring the AccuBoom feature. Review the AccuRow or OmniRow Calibration and Operation Manual
for more information on the section control feature on planter control systems.
4.
Select the Product buttons to configure product nodes or control channels to control product application
during the active job. See the Product Setup section on page 59 for more information on setting up the
nodes or control channels.
56
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Basic Operation
5.
Touch the Accept
icon in the lower, right corner of the screen to begin the job. See the Guidance
Screen section on page 62 for more information. Touch the Cancel icon to end job setup without starting the
job.
Note:
6.
Canceling the job will discard any settings or selections made on the setup screens. Any
configured settings or selections will be lost.
If an optional AutoBoom system is detected on the CANbus, the AutoBoom Setup screen will be displayed.
Refer to the AutoBoom® Setup section on page 61 to enable or disable the AutoBoom feature.
Direction of Travel
The last direction of travel detected by the field computer is displayed on the Start Job - Verify Settings screen.
If the direction of travel indicator displays incorrectly, touch the indicator to manually toggle the last detected
GPS direction.
Note:
The direction of travel indicator is also displayed on the GPS Health screen and may be toggled
during a job if necessary.
6
Refer to the Reverse Sensing section on page 121 for more information or to enable the direction
of travel indicator. The direction of travel indicator will not be displayed if a SmarTrax 3D node is
detected on the CANbus and the terrain compensation feature is active.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
57
Chapter 6
Job File Setup
Select the Job button to select an existing job file or rename the new job.
Note:
Renaming new job files is highly recommended if a specific job will be referenced at a later date.
The operator should enter field location, product or any other information which may help identify
specific job files. Names of job files entered on the field computer cannot begin or end with a
space.
The Select Job screen will display.
To Resume an Existing Job: Select the existing job file from the list and touch the Accept icon to return to the
Verify Settings screen. When the Guidance screen is displayed, coverage maps from the existing job will be
displayed on the Guidance screen.
To Start a New Job: On the Select Job screen, touch the Create New icon. The New Job: Enter
Name screen is displayed. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the name of the new job file.
Touch the Accept icon to confirm the entered name and return to the Start Job - Verify Settings
screen. Touch the Cancel icon to return to the Start Job - Verify Settings screen without
accepting the job name.
Note:
58
Job names stored on the field computer cannot begin or end with a space.
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Basic Operation
AccuControl Setup
If an optional section control feature is available, touch the AccuControl button to create a new zone map or
load a previously created plant zone map for the job.
Note:
Refer to Chapter 9, Using AccuBoom™, for more information about using AccuBoom. For details
on using the AccuRow feature, refer to the AccuRow or OmniRow Calibration and Operation
manual.
The status for optional section control features may be displayed as follows:
• Disabled - Feature is available or CANbus node is communicating, but optional features are not
enabled for this system.
• Enabled - Feature is available or CANbus node is communicating and optional system features
are enabled.
• Node Not Detected - The CANbus node is currently not detected by the field computer.
If selected, the name of the selected zone map will be displayed in the zones field.
Product Setup
To setup product nodes or control channels, select the corresponding Product button to setup the product
control for the selected node.
If the optional multi-product activation key is entered, up to four product nodes or control channels
may be displayed on the Verify Settings screen.
6
Note:
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
59
Chapter 6
The selected Product Setup screen will be displayed.
Enable Product. Select the “Enable Product” option to enable control for the selected product. If the product is
not enabled during job setup, the job must be closed and a new job file started to allow the node or channel
to control product application.
Rate Control Mode. Choose the preferred rate control mode for the product. Select between Off, Manual or
Automatic.
Note:
If a CAN Switch Box is installed with the field computer, the rate control mode must be set using
the product control switches on the switch box. The field computer will display the selected mode
for each product.
Product Name. The currently selected product name is displayed on the Product Name button. Touch the
Product Name button to display the Start Job - Select Product screen.
Select a product name from the displayed list or create a new name by touching the Create New
icon. Use the displayed keypad to enter the name of the new product.
Note:
Product names entered on the field computer cannot begin or end with a space.
Touch the Delete Product icon to remove a product name from the list.
Target Rate. The currently entered target rate is displayed on the Rate button. Touch the Rate
button and use the displayed keypad to set a new target rate.
60
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Basic Operation
Prescription (Rx) Setup
Touch the prescription icon to assign a prescription map to the selected control channel.
Refer to the File Maintenance section on page 154 for assistance with transferring maps onto the Envizio Pro.
AutoBoom® Setup
6
If an optional AutoBoom system is detected on the CANbus, the field computer will display the AutoBoom
setup screen before accessing the Guidance display and features. Review the AutoBoom Calibration and
Operation Manual for detailed operation of this feature with the Envizio Pro field computers.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
61
Chapter 6
Guidance Screen
During a field operation, or job, on the Envizio Pro field computers, the Guidance screen provides the
application or coverage information and will likely be the most viewed screen during a job. Using DGPS
coordinates, the field computer offers several field guidance tools to help reduce operator fatigue and minimize
skips and overlaps during product application.
Guidance Features
The following features are available during a job on the Envizio Pro field computer:
1
2
3
4
5
Guidance Path
Override Reverse
Vehicle Direction
Previously
Applied Area
Vehicle Indicator
6
Note:
7
8
9
With the reverse sensing feature enabled, it may be necessary to manually override
the course of the vehicle indicator. The direction of travel icon (shown to the right) will
be displayed on the Guidance screen any time the field computer detects that the
vehicle is traveling in reverse. Touch the reverse direction icon to manually toggle the
direction of travel displayed on the Guidance screen.
If the reverse direction icon is not displayed on the Guidance screen, touch the GPS Status
Indicator and touch the direction of travel icon along the right side of the screen to manually toggle
the displayed vehicle course.
1.
On-Screen Light Bar - The on-screen light bar illuminates to represent the vehicle’s location with respect to
the displayed guidance path.
The center square displays green when the vehicle is “on line.” As the vehicle moves away from the line,
the center square will turn yellow and the surrounding ovals will begin illuminating to represent distance
from the guidance path. See the System menu section in Chapter 7, Tools Menu, to setup the light bar
display.
2.
GPS Status Indicator - Displays the current GPS correction source and signal status. Review the GPS
Status section on page 52 for details.
3.
Distance from Path - This display shows the distance and the direction to the guidance path. The value
displayed is in feet (English) or meters (Metric) and the arrow points in the direction to the displayed
guidance path.
62
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Basic Operation
4.
Speed or COG Display - Vehicle speed or Course Over Ground is displayed in this area. Touch this area to
toggle between the Speed or COG display.
5.
Day/Night Mode - Touch this icon to toggle the Guidance display for day or night operations.
6.
Swath Number - During straight line, pivot and fixed contour guidance patterns, the number of the current
swath is displayed in this area. When in Last Pass mode, this area displays LAST.
7.
Zoom - Touch the Zoom icon to cycle through the zoom levels on the displayed guidance screen. Pressing
the zoom icon at the maximum zoom level (Level 5) will return to the minimum zoom. Continue pressing the
zoom icon to cycle through the zoom levels as desired.
8.
Guidance Pattern - Touch the icon displayed in this area to toggle between the available guidance patterns.
See the Using Guidance Patterns section on page 63 for more information on using specific patterns.
9.
Menu - Guidance screen views, path tools and options, and AccuBoom mapping features are all accessible
through the Menu. See the Menu section later in this chapter for more information on using tools and
features found within the Menu.
SmarTrax™ Status Display
If the optional SmarTrax system has been installed, the status of the system will appear on the Guidance
screen.
Using Guidance Patterns
The following Guidance Patterns are available on the Envizio Pro:
•
•
•
•
Enhanced Last Pass
Straight (A-B) Line
Fixed Contour
Pivot
6
Refer to the following descriptions for more information on the available Guidance Patterns as well as using
selected patterns during a job.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
63
Chapter 6
Enhanced Last Pass
The Last Pass pattern uses the last, or nearest, applied
or covered area and the guidance width to create the
following guidance path.
While this pattern does not require the operator to set ‘A’
or ‘B’ points, a previously applied or covered area must
be present in the active job before this pattern will
display the next guidance path. The Last Pass must
follow the previous applied area and will not project
subsequent paths beyond the next guidance path.
The Last Pass guidance pattern has been enhanced to
provide accurate steering along the displayed guidance
path with systems such as the Raven SmarTrax
assisted steering systems. Contact a local Raven dealer
for more information about Raven assisted steering systems available for use with the Envizio Pro field
computer.
The Enhanced Last Pass is well suited to provide guidance for irregular swaths due to irregular field
boundaries, well heads, or waterways, etc.
Note:
The Last Pass guidance pattern is designed to function in areas with a single, well defined,
continuous coverage or as-applied map. If the coverage map displays multiple coverage areas or
breaks in coverage, one of the other guidance patterns may provide better results and is
recommended.
Headlands Mode. If the Last Pass pattern attempts to lock onto headlands swaths incorrectly, be sure to
select the ‘Enable Last Pass Headlands Mode’ option on the Select Pattern screen while setting up the job.
This will allow the field computer to ignore the headlands passes when working the field in alternating 180°
swaths.
If the Last Pass guidance pattern will be used to cover the field in a rectangular pattern (outside to inside) leave
the ‘Enable Last Pass Headlands Mode’ option disabled (empty).
64
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Basic Operation
Straight (A-B) Line
The Straight Line, or parallel, guidance pattern is
created by drawing a straight line through two user
defined points (points A and B). After setting the A and B
points, the field computer can use the programmed
guidance width and the original path to project parallel
guidance paths for the rest of the coverage area.
As long as the Straight (A-B) Line pattern is active and
the original path is available, the field computer will
display the nearest path regardless of previous
application history or coverage mapping.
See the A-B Path Tools section on page 73 for help
using the A-B guidance line tools and features with the
Straight Line pattern.
The Straight (A-B) Line pattern is well suited for applications within rectangular fields and row crops.
Fixed Contour
The Fixed Contour guidance pattern allows the operator
to record and save an irregular swath pattern and to use
the same tools available for other A-B paths. Similar to
the Straight Line pattern, the operator sets the first, or A,
point of the swath and begins driving the swath. The
field computer records points along the driven path until
the operator sets the B point. The field computer then
connects the recorded points and displays the Fixed
Contour path. After the A and B points are set, the field
computer is able to use the programmed guidance width
and the original path to project additional contour paths
for the rest of the coverage area.
As long as the Fixed Contour pattern is active and the
original path is available, the field computer will display
the nearest path regardless of previous application
history or coverage mapping. See the A-B Path Tools section on page 73 for help using the A-B guidance line
tools and features with the Fixed Contour pattern.
The Fixed Contour pattern is ideal for creating and saving swaths which follow irregular field boundaries,
waterways, well heads, etc., or where the ability to skip swaths in an irregular pattern is necessary.
Note:
Curvature of the Fixed Contour guidance path should not be too aggressive. Overly aggressive
curves may produce undesirable results.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
6
Always be aware of sharp turns when using the Fixed Contour pattern if an assisted steering
system such as Raven SmarTrax system is engaged. Contact a local Raven dealer for more
information about Raven assisted steering systems available for use with the Envizio Pro field
computer.
65
Chapter 6
Pivot
The pivot pattern is designed to provide guidance within
row crops with a center pivot, or circle, irrigation system.
To begin guidance using the pivot pattern, the operator
must set two points along the circumference of the field
or the swath furthest from the irrigation hub.
Set the first, or ‘A,’ point at the start of the swath furthest
from the irrigation hub and drive along the field
circumference and set the second, or ‘B,’ point at the
end of the swath. Using these two operator defined
points and the vehicle guidance width, the field computer
calculates circular paths stepping toward the center of
the field area.
As long as the Pivot pattern is active and the original
path is available, the field computer will display the
nearest circular path regardless of previous application history or coverage mapping. Currently, this pattern
does not require that the entire circumference of the field is driven before beginning guidance; however, better
results are achieved by driving further along the guidance line.
See the A-B Path Tools section on page 73 for additional assistance when using the A-B guidance line tools
and features with the Pivot pattern.
Product Control Features
In addition to guidance features of the Envizio Pro, the Guidance screen displays product control information,
coverage maps, as well as vehicle and GPS information.
1
2
3
Previously
Applied Area
Guidance Path
Vehicle Indicator
4
1.
5
6
7
Product Rate Display - This area displays the target and actual rates for each product enabled for the
current job. Touch the names area of the product rate display to toggle the selected product.
The Guidance screen displays area covered and volume indicators corresponding to the selected product.
Touch the target and actual rates area to access additional features and configuration settings while in a
job. See the Product Rate Display section on page 68 for more information on using this display.
66
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Basic Operation
2.
Tank or Bin Indicator - Displays the volume of product remaining in the tank or bin. Touch this area to
display the Volume Configuration screen. See the Tank or Bin Indicator section on page 67 for more
information.
3.
Area Covered - This indicator displays the area covered during the current job.
4.
On-Screen Switch Box - If an optional automatic section control feature is enabled for the current job, the
on-screen switch box icon will be displayed in this location. Touch this icon to access the section control
feature screen to control individual sections or activate the feature override. Refer to the On-Screen Switch
Box section on page 171 for more information on using the on-screen switch box to configure section
control modes or the AccuBoom override feature.
5.
Section Status - The label for each section configured on the field computer appears in this area. Active
sections appear green while sections currently disabled (or toggled off) appear in white.
Note:
With the optional AccuBoom feature installed, section labels displayed in amber signify that
AccuBoom control of the section is enabled, but AccuBoom has toggled the section off.
6.
Swath Number - During straight line, pivot and fixed contour guidance patterns, the number of the current
swath is displayed in this area. When in Last Pass mode, this area displays LAST.
7.
Menu - Guidance screen views, path tools and options, and AccuBoom mapping features are all accessible
through the Menu. See the Menu section on page 72 for more information on using tools and features found
within the Menu.
Tank or Bin Indicator
The tank or bin level indicator displays an estimate of
product remaining in the tank or bin for the selected
product.
Touch this indicator to view the Tank or Bin Volume
Configuration screen. The Volume Configuration
screen will display the current level remaining in the
tank or bin.
Current Level
6
To adjust the tank or bin level for the selected product:
1.
Use the keypad to enter the volume of product remaining.
2.
Touch the Accept icon to enter the new tank or bin level and return to the Guidance screen. The tank or bin
level indicator will display the entered level.
Note:
Touch the Cancel icon to exit the Volume Configuration screen without keeping any changes made
on this screen.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
67
Chapter 6
Reset Tank or Bin Button. Touch the Reset button to quickly reset the tank or bin level to the preprogrammed bin or tank size.
Tank or Bin Size Button. Touch the tank or bin size button to configure the volume of product in the tank or
bin. Each product control node may have a separate volume and tank or bin level.
Note:
If the Reset button will be used to recalibrate the bin or tank level, the bin or tank size should be
set at the volume of product in the tank after refilling; not necessarily the capacity of the bin or tank.
Tank Fill. If an optional tank fill system is installed and detected by the Envizio Pro, the field computer will
display the fill system interface. Refer to Appendix G, Tank Fill Monitor Calibration, for assistance with using
the tank fill system.
Ultrasonic Bin Level Sensor. If an ultrasonic bin level sensor is installed, the volume reading does not need
to be reset when refilling bins. Refer to the Tank Volume or Bin Level section on page 113 for details on
calibrating the ultrasonic bin level sensor when the product bins are empty.
Product Rate Display
The field computer displays rate information for each enabled product in the upper, right corner of the
Guidance screen.
The following information appears in the Product Rate Display:
•
•
•
•
Name of each enabled product
Target rate of each product
Actual rate of each product
Selected product
Note:
While monitoring product application from a separate rate control console via a serial connection,
the field computer will display the number of products currently enabled on the rate controller.
Selected Product. During a single product application, the product enabled during the job setup process will
always be selected during the job.
If additional products are enabled, the name and rates of the selected product are highlighted. To toggle the
currently selected product, touch the product names within the Product Rate Display. Tank or bin volumes,
area applied and coverage maps are displayed according to the product selected in the Product Rate Display.
68
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Basic Operation
In Job Product Configuration
Several product control settings and display options are available during a job by touching the rates area of the
Product Rate Display. The following screen is displayed:
1
3
2
4
5
The following information is displayed on this screen:
1.
Application information
2.
Selected product
3.
Control mode
4.
Target rate
5.
Display options
Touch the green check mark to return to the Guidance screen.
To view and setup additional settings for each product, touch the green arrow to display the Product Control
Configuration screen. Refer to the Product Control section on page 99 for more information on product control
configuration.
Application Information. The Application Information displays the following information for the selected
product:
• Area per hour
• Pressure or fan speed - if an optional pressure transducer (P/N 422-0000-059) or fan speed sensor
(P/N 063-0171-277) has been installed
• Volume per minute
• Control status
• If a PWM or PWM Close valve is setup to control the selected product, the duty cycle of the PWM valve
6
appears in this area
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
69
Chapter 6
Selected Product. The selected product icon displays the current node or control channel for which the in job
product settings are displayed. If multiple products are enabled during the job setup, the selected product icon
may also be used to cycle through enabled nodes or control channels to configure other nodes or control
channels without returning to the Guidance screen.
If only one product is enabled for the current job, the selected product icon will display
similar to icons shown to the left. The displayed product node or control channel is
always selected during the active job.
Product 1
Only
Product 2
Only
If additional products are enabled for the current job, the selected product allows the
operator to cycle through the enabled nodes or control channels.
Before modifying any settings displayed on the screen, check that the correct product
node or control channel is selected.
Cycle to
Product 2
Cycle to
Product 1
Control Mode. Use the control mode to set the mode of operation for the product control valve. Select:
• Off to turn off product control for the selected product.
• Manual to control the actual application rate manually.
• Automatic to allow the field computer to control product application rates automatically.
Note:
If a CAN Switch Box is installed with the field computer, the field computer will display the control
mode set using the Product Control switches on the switch box. Refer to the CAN Switch Box
Installation and Operation Guide for additional operation of the CAN Switch Box.
Target Rate. The name and target rate of the selected product are displayed on a button on the In Job Product
Configuration screen. Touch this button and use the displayed keypad to adjust the target rate.
Display Options. Additional displays may be enabled or disabled with the options at the lower portion of the
screen.
70
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Basic Operation
The following screen features are available on this screen:
•
On-Screen Rate Bump buttons - While in CAN product control mode, Rate Bump buttons may be used to
increase or decrease the application rate of the selected product by a user defined rate “bump” value.
Select the ‘Enable On-Screen Rate Bump Buttons’ option to show these buttons on the Guidance screen.
When the product is in automatic mode, the Rate Bump buttons will increase or decrease the target rates
for the selected product. When in Manual mode, the Rate Bump buttons increase or decrease the actual
application rate.
Note:
The ‘INC/DEC’ switch on the CAN Switch Box offers the same functionality as the on-screen rate
bump buttons in both the manual and automatic control modes.
• On-Screen Pressure or Fan Speed display - If an optional pressure transducer or fan speed sensor have
been installed and configured, the field computer can display the monitored values on the Guidance screen.
Select the ‘Enable On-Screen Pressure or Fan Spd’ option to display the Pressure for liquid products or the
Fan Speed for granular products.
• Enable On-Screen Option - Select the ‘Enable On-Screen Option’ to select an optional second information
display on the Guidance screen.
6
Select the ‘Pressure #2’ option to display pressure from a second optional transducer. The ‘Pump RPM’
option may be enabled to display the RPM of the corresponding injection pump.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
71
Chapter 6
Menu
Guidance path tools, field boundary tools, and additional guidance views are available by accessing the Menu
in the lower right corner of the Guidance screen.
The features and tools available in the Menu will depend upon the selected view, active guidance pattern, and
features enabled when the Menu was accessed. Review the following icons and their descriptions for help
working within the Menu.
Home
Touch the Home icon to return to the Home screen. The job in progress will continue in the
background. Note that some Tools Menu screens may not be accessible while a job is in progress.
Guidance Views
The down field and bird’s eye views are the primary screens used while a job is in progress. These views
seamlessly integrate guidance and navigation information with rate control information. This minimizes the
amount of time which the operator must focus on the field computer and allows more time to manage other
important aspects of the operation. Touching one of the following icons will switch the guidance view to the
indicated perspective.
The Down Field view is the initial view displayed when a job is started. This is a simulated
perspective as seen from the cab of the vehicle.
72
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Basic Operation
Switch to the Bird’s Eye view to change to a view from above the vehicle position. This view will
display all of the same guidance features and tools as the down field view.
A-B Path Tools
The following tools and features may be found in the Menu when the Straight Line, Fixed Contour, or Pivot
guidance patterns are active.
Note:
The following icons may not appear in the Menu at the same time. Tools may only be available
before or after a guidance line has been set.
Loading an A-B Line
If an A-B Line has been saved on the field computer, touch the Load A-B Line icon to load the
saved line into the current job. This icon will not appear if an A-B Line has already been set. Reset
the line to access the Load A-B Line tool.
Note:
The A-B Line must be stored on the field computer internal memory to be able to access and load
the guidance path. Be sure to transfer all necessary files to the field computer before beginning a
job.
Names or descriptions of A-B Lines stored on the field computer cannot begin with a space.
Setting A-B Points
Touching the Set A icon will place the first, or A, point of the path at the vehicle’s current location.
Regardless of where the vehicle moves from this point, the field computer will use the selected
pattern to connect this point with the next set point. After the Set A icon is selected, the Set B icon
will appear.
Touch the Set B icon to place the second, or B, point of the guidance path. Once the B point has
been set, the field computer will use the selected pattern to create the guidance path displayed on
the Guidance screen.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
73
6
To create a new A-B line, the operator must set A and B points. The following icons and tools may be used to
set a new A-B line.
Chapter 6
Set B by Heading
The Set B by Heading feature is only available with the straight line guidance pattern. This feature allows the
operator to set an A-B line before completing the first swath.
Use the Set B by Heading feature to create a guidance path along a heading. Touch this icon and
use the displayed keypad to enter a heading between 0° and 359° (with 0° being due North).
Note:
If Set B by Heading is selected before an A point has been set, the field computer will place the A
point at the vehicle location when Set B by Heading was selected.
A-B Path Tools
The following tools are available in the Menu when a compatible A-B line is displayed on the Guidance screen.
Select the A-B Tools icon to access additional tools for use with the current A-B line.
Select the Reset A-B Line icon to clear the displayed path. If the displayed path will need to be
recalled in the future, be sure to save the current path before selecting reset.
Touch the Save A-B Line icon to save the displayed path. Once saved, an A-B line may be
recalled at any time or loaded into other jobs. In addition, saved paths can be transferred from the
field computer via the File Maintenance feature. See Chapter 8, Software Updates and File
Maintenance for details on the file maintenance feature and transferring saved paths.
Note:
Names or descriptions of saved A-B lines cannot begin with a space.
Use the Re-calibrate A-B Line tool to re-calibrate the displayed path to the machine’s current
position. Due to DGPS drift over time, this feature allows the operator to re-calibrate the A-B line to
a known position in a field.
74
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Basic Operation
Nudge Feature
The Nudge Feature allows the operator to fine tune the displayed path for actual field conditions. For example,
if the displayed path guides the vehicle too close to crop rows, nudge the line to the left or right to adjust the
path and guide the vehicle away from rows.
Note:
The Nudge Feature is only available with A-B guidance paths (Straight Line, Pivot, Fixed Contour).
The Nudge Feature works especially well with the Raven SmarTrax assisted steering systems. Contact a local
Raven dealer for more information about these systems.
On-Screen Nudge Enabled
To enable and use the on-screen nudge feature to adjust a displayed guidance path:
1.
Begin a job and set A and B points for a guidance path using the Straight Line, Fixed Contour or Pivot
patterns.
2.
Select the Menu icon in the lower, right corner of the display and select the Edit Nudge icon to display the In
Job Nudge Settings screen.
Note:
Touch the Reset Nudge button at the bottom of the Nudge Settings screen to reset any
adjustments to the path displayed on the Guidance screen.
On the Nudge Settings screen, select the ‘Enabled’ radio button to display the nudge control icons on the
Guidance screen during field operations.
4.
Touch the Nudge 1 and Nudge 2 buttons and use the on-screen keypad to enter the desired values for each
nudge setting. Select the desired units for the entered nudge value and touch the Accept icon to return to
the Nudge Settings screen.
5.
Select either the ‘Nudge 1’ or ‘Nudge 2’ radio button to select the active nudge applied when the on-screen
nudge controls are used. During field operations, the active nudge radio buttons may be used to quickly
select one of the pre-configured nudge values.
6
3.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
75
Chapter 6
6.
Touch the Accept icon to return to the Guidance screen.
Nudge
Left/Right
Active Nudge
Value
Total Nudge
applied to
displayed path
The following icons will be displayed on the Guidance screen if the on-screen nudge controls option is set to
enabled.
Touch the Nudge Right icon to move
the displayed guidance path to the
right. The distance which the path will
be nudged is determined by the user
defined value for the active nudge.
Touch the Nudge Left icon to move
the displayed guidance path to the
left. The distance which the path will
be nudged is determined by the user
defined value for the active nudge.
Guidance Menu Nudge Tools
The nudge feature may also be accessed via the Guidance menu to make small adjustments to the guidance
path if the on-screen nudge tools are not enabled. To Nudge a displayed guidance path without the on-screen
nudge controls:
1.
Begin a job and set A and B points for a guidance path using the Straight Line, Fixed Contour or Pivot
patterns.
2.
Select the Menu icon in the lower, right corner of the display and select the A-B Tools icon.
The following nudge icons are available in the Menu:
Touch the Nudge Right icon to move
the guidance path to the right in 1 inch
[2 cm] increments.
76
Touch the Nudge Left icon to move
the guidance path to the left in 1 inch
[2 cm] increments.
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Basic Operation
Field Markers
Field markers allow the operator to mark locations such as well heads, rock
piles, or points of interest during a field operation. Markers will be displayed
during the operation and will allow the operator to view the marker information.
To place a field marker:
1.
Touch the Menu icon in the lower, right corner of the guidance display.
2.
Select the Marker icon. A field marker will be placed at the current vehicle
location.
Touch the marker to access marker information or delete the field marker.
Note:
Field markers are independent of job information and will be
displayed for subsequent jobs in the area of the field marker.
Marker Information
Touch the base of the marker and select the Information icon to display the Marker Information screen. This
screen displays the marker name, current distance to the marker, and geographic coordinates.
Touch the name field and use the on-screen keyboard to rename the marker.
Note:
Marker names should not begin or end with a space.
Delete Markers
6
To delete a marker, touch the base of the marker and select Delete to remove the field marker.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
77
Chapter 6
Field Review Mode
Unlike the guidance views, the field review mode allows the operator to pan and zoom the display
to any area of the field.
2
1
3
5
The field review mode displays the following information:
1.
Coverage map
2.
Area within a completed field boundary
3.
Coverage area tally
4.
Selected product
Field Review Mode Tools
In field review mode, the following icons appear along the bottom of the Guidance screen:
• Pan lock
• Show overlaps
• Switch product
Pan Lock
The pan lock feature locks the current view in field review mode.
When the pan lock is disabled, the display will automatically scroll to the vehicle indicator as the
indicator moves out of the current view. Disable the pan lock to always display the vehicle
indicator while in field review mode.
When the pan lock is enabled, the display is locked to the current view regardless of the vehicle
indicator position. The operator can manually pan and zoom with the pan lock enabled to view
specific portions of a field while in field review mode.
To pan the display manually, touch the Field Review screen. The point touched will become the
center of the field review display.
78
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Basic Operation
Show Overlaps
In addition to coverage, the field review mode can display application overlaps. The show overlaps feature
displays areas where active sections entered a previously applied area and allows the operator to quickly
review skips and overlaps on the same screen.
With the show overlaps feature disabled, the field review mode displays the covered areas
(including overlaps) in a solid green color. Touch this icon to toggle the show overlaps feature.
When the show overlaps feature is enabled, application overlaps are displayed in red. Overlaps
appear where application (i.e. active sections) cover previously applied areas. Note that the area
covered will not display as an overlap unless product application has overlapped.
Select Product
The field review mode displays coverage information based upon the selected product. If only one product has
been enabled, the product is always selected and the Select Product icon will not appear on the Field Review
screen.
If additional products are enabled for the current job, touch the Select Product icon to cycle through the
enabled products.
For Example:
Control channel 1 is currently selected. Touch this icon to cycle the Field Review screen to
channel 2.
Control channel 2 is currently selected. Touch this icon to cycle the Field Review screen back to
channel 1.
Toggle Maps on the Guidance Screen
During a job with an active prescription or zone map, the field computer will display either map on the
Guidance and Field Review screens. If both a prescription map and a zone map will be used, the operator may
toggle which map to display on the guidance and field review screens by selecting the toggle maps icon.
To toggle the displayed map, touch:
The view prescription map icon to display the loaded prescription map on all guidance displays.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
79
6
The view zone map icon to view the loaded zone map.
Chapter 6
Field Boundaries
A field boundary and zone map may be created for each job on the Envizio Pro field computer.
Field Boundary
A field boundary provides a visual reference of the outline of the current field on the display.
Field
Boundary
Once a field boundary has been completed, the Envizio Pro can calculate and display the area within the field
boundary in acres (English) or hectares (Metric) in field review mode. Only one field boundary may be
recorded per job.
If the optional AccuBoom, automatic section control, system is enabled, a field boundary will also create a
basic zone map of the current field. Refer to Chapter 9, Using AccuBoom™, for more information on field
boundaries with the AccuBoom system or contact a local Raven dealer for more information about the Raven
AccuBoom system.
Zone Maps
If the optional AccuBoom, automatic section control, feature is enabled, a map of spray and/or no-spray zones
may be created and saved with the job. Refer to Chapter 9, Using AccuBoom™, for more information on field
boundaries with the AccuBoom system or contact a local Raven dealer for more information about the Raven
AccuBoom feature.
80
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Basic Operation
Field Boundary Tools
The following Menu tools and features are available while creating a field boundary.
Note:
Zone maps are only available if the Raven AccuBoom, automatic boom section control, feature is
enabled. Refer to Chapter 9, Using AccuBoom™, for more information using the AccuBoom
feature or contact a local Raven dealer for more information about the Raven AccuBoom system.
Loading a Field Boundary
A previously recorded boundary may be loaded into the current job file by selecting the Load Field
Boundary icon in the Menu. A list of job files or boundaries stored on the field computer is
displayed. Select the desired boundary to load into the current job.
Note:
Field boundaries exported from the Envizio Pro will be named either using the job file name
entered when the job was started or the Zone Map name set for the map created during the job.
Shapefile boundaries may be renamed on a PC or laptop computer and re-imported to the Envizio
Pro for future operations.
Recording a New Field Boundary
Touch the Record Field Boundary icon to begin recording a new field boundary. While a field
boundary is being recorded, the Pause and End Field Boundary icons (see the following icon
descriptions) are displayed on the Guidance screen.
Recorded
Boundary Path
6
Pause/End
Boundary
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
81
Chapter 6
Pause, Resume and End Boundaries
The following icons will appear on the Guidance screen while a field boundary is being recorded.
Pause/End
Boundary
Touch the Pause Boundary icon to pause recording of the field boundary. Use this feature when
the vehicle’s path will not reflect the boundary such as when re-filling tanks, etc. To resume
recording, touch the Resume icon.
While paused, the Resume Boundary icon replaces the Pause and End Boundary icons on the
Guidance screen. Touch this icon to resume recording of the current boundary.
To finish recording a boundary, touch the End Field Boundary icon. Note that the field computer
draws a straight line from the boundary starting point to the vehicle’s current location when closing
a boundary.
Boundary Tools
Once a field boundary has been completed, the following tools will be available through the Menu on the
Guidance screen.
Touch the Boundary Tools icon to display additional boundary tools available for the current job.
Touch the Delete Boundary icon to reset the current field boundary. A field boundary must be
present in the current job or this icon will not appear in the Menu.
AccuBoom™ Tools
Additional tools and features may be available in the Menu if the optional AccuBoom system is enabled for the
current job. Refer to Chapter 9, Using AccuBoom™, for more information using the AccuBoom feature or
contact a local Raven dealer for more information about the Raven AccuBoom system.
82
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Basic Operation
Drift Shift
Note:
The drift shift feature must be enabled prior to starting a job to allow the following features to be
available during the field operation. Refer to Drift Shift section on page 134 for assistance with the
drift shift settings.
Manual Coverage Adjustment
To manually adjust the reported position of all job features:
Touch the Menu icon in the lower, right corner of the guidance display.
2.
Select the Drift Shift icon.
3.
Use the fine and coarse nudge arrows on the screen to adjust the field features displayed to the actual
vehicle location. As the job features are adjusted, the cumulative nudge applied in each direction is
displayed in the lower, right corner of the display.
4.
Touch the Menu icon and select the Accept button to accept the applied drift shift values and return to the
Field Review mode or Cancel to undo the applied shift adjustments.
6
1.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
83
Chapter 6
Reference Point
Note:
When the drift shift feature is enabled, the field computer will automatically place a reference point
at the start of each job. The reference point will allow the machine operator to quickly shift field
features by shifting all field features based upon the current vehicle position and the reference
point set or configured by the machine operator.
Reference Point Settings:
1.
Touch the Menu icon in the lower, right corner of the guidance display.
2.
Select the Drift Shift icon.
3.
Touch the Drift Shift icon displayed in the lower, right corner of the display to access the Drift Shift Settings
screen. Use the following features to set the reference point or shift the coverage features:
Set Drift Correction Now. With the vehicle positioned at the actual reference point, touch the “Set Now”
button to shift the reference point and all field features to the current vehicle position.
Set Reference Point Here. Touch the “Set Here” button to reset the reference point to the current vehicle
location. The previous reference position will be lost.
84
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Basic Operation
Prescription Maps and Variable Rates
With the optional variable rate application (VRA) feature enabled, the Envizio Pro is capable of using a
prescription map to automatically change the target application rate.
Envizio Pro field computer uses the shapefile format for prescription maps used to provide variable rate
product control. If the variable rate feature is activated, a prescription map, created using GIS (Geographic
Information Systems) software capable of creating shapefiles, may be transferred to the field computer. These
shapefiles must be in a polygon shape format that complies with the ESRI (Environmental Systems Research
Institute) shapefile specifications and must also be in the WGS (World Geodetic System) 84 datum.
The .shp, .shx, and .dbf files required to create a shapefile prescription map must be saved to the rxMaps
folder on a USB flash drive to allow the field computer to locate and transfer the required files to internal
memory. Refer to the Chapter 8, Software Updates and File Maintenance, for additional assistance with
performing file maintenance or creating the required folder structure on a USB flash drive for use with the
Envizio Pro.
To ensure peak performance of the field computer during variable rate applications, create maps with a
minimum number of zones. Maps with too many zones may yield undesired results or limit performance of the
field computer. To help limit the number of zones within a map, use the equipment, or Guidance, width as a
guide. The smallest zones on the map should be no smaller than the width of the equipment applying the
product. For example, if the boom on a sprayer is 90 feet [27 m] wide for each swath, zones within the
prescription map should not be less than 90 feet [27 m] square.
If the prescription map contains zero rate zones, the system must have either a PWM or Fast valve controlling
product. The valve type and valve cal programmed on the field computer must be set to PWM Close or Fast
Close mode, depending upon which valve is installed in the system. See the Prescription (Rx) Settings section
on page 112 for additional prescription map set up information.
Note:
If the optional AccuBoom system is enabled, AccuBoom will turn off sections valves in zero rate
zones.
Loading Prescription Maps
Prescription maps are loaded onto the field computer using the File Maintenance features described in the File
Maintenance section on page 140.
Prescription maps must have three separate files, each with the same file name. A file with the .shp, .shx, and
.dbf file extensions are all essential for each prescription map to function correctly. If any of these files are
missing, or named differently, from the rxMaps folder, the field computer will not be able to load the prescription
map.
Names of prescription map files loaded on the field computer cannot begin with a space.
6
Note:
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
85
Chapter 6
Applying Prescription Maps
A prescription map may be applied to any enabled product during the Start Job process. With the variable rate
feature enabled, the Start Job - Verify Settings screen displays the name of the prescription map along with the
product to which the prescription map will be applied.
To Apply a Prescription Map
1.
Touch the Rx symbol in the corresponding Product button.
For example, touch the Rx symbol in the Product 1 button to apply a prescription map to the product
controlled by the first product node.
Note:
2.
To remove a prescription map, touch the ‘Prod1’ area of the button to display the Product Setup
screen. Touch the Rate button and enter a value.
A list of available prescription maps is displayed on the Start Job - Select Rx Map screen.
Select the name of the prescription map to apply to the selected product and then touch the Accept
icon to apply the prescription map.
Note:
3.
86
To modify the rates within the selected prescription map, select the Rate Conversion button. Use
the on-screen keypad to enter the multiplier of the prescription map for the current job.
Verify other job settings before beginning the job. Refer to the Starting a Job section on page 56 for more
information.
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Basic Operation
Using Prescription Maps
The field computer will display the prescription map used during product application on the guidance screens.
Prescription Rate of
Selected Zone
To display the prescription rate for any zone displayed in the prescription map while in the field review mode,
touch the desired zone on the screen. The display will center the location touched on the screen and display
the prescription rate in the lower, left corner.
System Alarms
Important warning and alert information is immediately displayed on the screen in the Alarms area.
6
The Alarms area displays icons representing the portion of the system which requires the operator’s attention.
In addition to visual alarms, the operator may wish to enable the audible alarms feature of the Envizio Pro field
computers.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
87
Chapter 6
Alarms Area
Depending upon the alert or warning condition, the field computer may display one or more of the following
icons:
AutoBoom
Product Control
Show All
Touch any of the displayed icons to display information regarding the corresponding alarm.
• The Product Control Alarm icon is displayed if an alarm condition such as a low bin or tank, or when product
control cannot reach the target rate.
• The AutoBoom Alarm icon is displayed if an alarm condition such as sensors too low or high, the pressure
is higher than the set point, or if a sensor has gone off line. Refer to Chapter 10, Using AutoBoom®, for
more information about the optional Glide Series AutoBoom system and troubleshooting AutoBoom alarms.
• Touch the Show All Alarms icon to view all current alarm conditions.
Hiding the Alarms Area
Once the operator has reviewed any alert information, the Alarms area can be hidden to resume operation.
1.
To hide the Alarms area, touch the green check
mark icon.
2.
If the alarm condition still exists, an Alarm icon
appears on the screen until the alarm condition has
been cleared. Touch this icon to re-display the
Alarms area.
3.
For help clearing alarm conditions, refer to Chapter
11, Troubleshooting, for product control
troubleshooting information. Refer to the CAN
AutoBoom® Calibration and Operation Manual for
information about using and troubleshooting the
optional Glide Series AutoBoom system or the
OmniRow® Calibration and Operation Manual for assistance with the OmniRow system.
Audible Alarms
Audible alarms are enabled by default. To disable the notification tone or change available alarm settings, see
the Alarm Settings section on page 116 to setup the Audible Alarms.
88
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
CHAPTER
7
Tools Menu
Chapter7
Accessing and Navigating the Tools Menu
After the initial setup wizards are complete, all settings and configurations are accessible by selecting the Tools
icon on the Home screen.
The Tools menu contains the following submenus:
•
•
•
•
•
Wizard
System
GPS
Computer
Vehicle
Note:
Verify that the field computer is setup correctly for the job, vehicle, and application prior to starting
an actual job application. See the Product Control section on page 99 to enter a test speed and
check settings while the vehicle remains stationary.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
89
Chapter 7
The Quick Access Bar appears along the top of the Main Tools menu screen.
Touch any of the icons to display a detailed view of the selected submenu.
Wizard Menu
The Setup Wizard Menu is available in the Tools menu. Review the Setup Wizards section on
page 42 for more details on using the setup wizards.
System Menu
Access the System menu to setup the product control system, or configure the optional
AccuBoom or AutoBoom systems.
GPS Menu
Use the GPS menu to adjust the internal GPS receiver or to enable the field computer to receive
DGPS from an external receiver. The GPS menu also contains screens to review the status of
GPS reception, set message outputs (for the internal DGPS receiver only), or select the PRN.
Computer Menu
The Computer menu sets display and feature settings of the field computer. Access the Computer
menu to change the display brightness, language, and units, as well as activate features or update
the Envizio Pro software.
If the light bar interface option is enabled, the Computer menu will also contain options for
adjusting the brightness of the external light bar. See the Serial Port Configuration section on page 98, for
more information on setting the light bar interface.
90
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Tools Menu
Access the Vehicle menu to setup or modify vehicle profiles for each machine or implement with
which the field computer will be used. Profiles allow the operator to setup GPS antenna heights
and offsets as well as the swath width and section setup for each implement once and quickly
reload a vehicle’s profile when transferring the Envizio Pro between vehicles.
Show All
Select the Show All icon to show an overview of the Tools menu. The Show All screen is displayed
each time the Tools menu is accessed.
Navigation
The following icons will be used to navigate within the menu screens and to edit and save settings:
Touch the Home icon to return to the Home screen.
Touch the Accept icon to confirm any changes to a screen. Touching the Accept icon will save
those settings and proceed to the next screen.
Touch the Cancel icon to exit the current screen without saving any changes made on a screen. If
the Cancel icon is displayed in gray, the cancel feature is currently unavailable.
Like the Accept icon, the Next icon accepts changes and proceeds to the next screen in a setup
procedure. Touch this icon where it appears to access more settings or to continue a setup
procedure. The last screen in a setup procedure should display the Accept icon.
Touch the Previous icon to return to the last screen displayed during a setup procedure or wizard.
The Up icon, where it appears, increases displayed values in preset increments. Touch this icon to
increase a value until the desired value is displayed.
The Down icon, where it appears, decreases displayed values in preset increments. Touch this
icon to decrease a value until the desired value is displayed.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
91
7
Vehicle Menu
Chapter 7
On-Screen Keyboard
Data entry on the Envizio Pro is quick using the full, on-screen keyboard.
Clear
Character
Entry Field
Character
Selected
Backspace
Shift
Cancel
Diacritic
Characters
Accept
This keyboard is displayed when entering or modifying profile, product, or job names or while browsing the web
with a wireless modem. The following features may be used with the keyboard:
Character Entry
When the keyboard is touched, the character selected will display above the key. If the character displayed is
not the character intended for entry, continue touching the screen while dragging to the correct character to
enter. The character will not be entered in the character entry field until the touch is released.
If the Envizio Pro is set to a language with diacritical signs (e.g. accent, grave, tilde, etc.), these special
characters may be entered by:
1.
Touch and hold the desired basic character for approximately 3 seconds.
2.
Drag drag to the diacritic character in the popup displayed.
3.
Release the touch to enter the selected character.
Note:
Diacritic symbols are only available if the language selected on the Envizio Pro contains these
characters.
Shift/Caps Lock
The keyboard displays the character set that will be entered in the character field when any of the keys are
selected. To shift the character set to lowercase, touch the
key.
Note:
The keyboard automatically capitalizes the first character entered into the character entry field. To
cancel this feature, touch the
key before entering characters using the keyboard.
Touch the
key to enter the next character using the uppercase character set. Double tapping the
or
keys will enable caps lock and display the
key. Touch the
key again to disable caps lock
Symbols
When browsing the web using the field computer, the
key to display the symbols keyboard. Touch the
92
key will be displayed on the keyboard. Touch the
key to return to the alphabetic keyboard.
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Tools Menu
Backspace and Clear
icon above the keyboard to clear all
7
Touch the
key to delete the previously entered character or the
characters within the character entry field.
Accept/Cancel
Touch the
key on the keyboard to accept the text or characters displayed in the character entry field. The
displayed text or characters will be entered in the selected text field on the previous screen.
Touch the
key to return to the previous screen without entering the keyed text or characters.
System Menu
The System menu contains the options for setting up how the Envizio Pro will interface with the product control
hardware. The System menu also contains setup screens for the optional AccuBoom, AutoBoom systems.
Touch the System icon in the quick Access Bar to display a detailed System menu screen.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
93
Chapter 7
Control Interface
The multi-functional capabilities of the Envizio Pro means that the field computer is capable of interfacing with
various control and monitoring systems. To function properly in any one of the possible systems, the field
computer must be set up to receive application information from the correct source.
The following sections describe the options displayed on the Control Interface screen and will help with
selecting the appropriate product control and available options for the system.
Product Control Options
The product control options configure the Envizio Pro to
monitor or control product application, coverage or
harvest operations. The following options are available
for use on the field computer:
Note:
If the Envizio Pro will be connected to a
CANbus with another CAN controller (such
as a Raven SCS 4400/4600) with
AccuBoom, be sure the control interface
option is set to ‘None.’ This option allows the
field computer to monitor CANbus nodes
without trying to control product nodes. In
this configuration, the boom master options
will not be displayed.
None
Select ‘None’ if the Envizio Pro will not be controlling product application (e.g. towing a disc, plow or rake). With
this option selected, the Envizio Pro will only provide guidance for field operations.
Raven Serial Console
This option is used when the field computer is connected to another Raven product control console, such as a
Raven SCS 440 or SCS 460, connected to the ‘Console” port on the interface cable. In this configuration, the
field computer will monitor and display application information sent from the Raven console.
The Envizio Pro receives application information such as rate and boom status to create an as-applied or
coverage map. This information is also used by the field computer when providing guidance. The field
computer can still be connected to an optional CAN AccuBoom node for automatic section control. In this
configuration, the field computer and AccuBoom will automatically control boom sections according to saved
field boundaries. The optional AutoBoom system can also be controlled by the field computer in this mode to
provide automatic boom height control.
Raven CAN Console
This option should be used when another control console will be used to control product nodes on the CANbus.
In this configuration, the Envizio Pro field computer will only monitor and display application information sent
over the CANbus.
Note:
94
Control inputs must be made via the CAN control console. The Envizio Pro product control
features will not be available during application when set to the Raven CAN Console control
option.
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Tools Menu
CAN Sprayer/Spreader Control
Note:
7
Select ‘CAN Sprayer/Spreader Control’ if the field computer will be used to control up to four products (with
required multi-product activation key) via a CANbus system.
If more than one product node has been installed with the field computer, be sure to
check that all product control nodes are addressed correctly before proceeding.
Touch the CAN Information icon (shown right) and review the CAN Diagnostics
section on page 30 to re-address the product nodes.
The Boom Master Options list is replaced by AccuBoom Options if ‘CAN Product Control’ is
selected. See the CAN Options section on page 97 for details.
CAN AccuRow Only
Select ‘CAN AccuRow Only’ if the field computer will be interfacing with an optional AccuRow system to
provide automatic section control for a multi-section planter implement. Refer to the AccuRow Calibration &
Operation Manual for additional set up and operation information.
CAN Planter Control
Select ‘CAN Planter Control’ if the field computer will be interfacing with an optional Raven OmniRow system.
The OmniRow system allows the field computer to control seed population rate and offers AccuRow, automatic
row or planter section shut off. Refer to the OmniRow® Calibration & Operation Manual for additional set up
and operation information.
Bogballe Calibrator Zurf
The field computer may be used in conjunction with the Bogballe Calibrator Zurf console for guidance and
monitoring of product applications using Bogballe weight systems. Refer to Appendix J, Serial Console
Interfaces, for additional information.
Kuhn/Rauch LH5000
The field computer may be used in conjunction with the Kuhn/Rauch LH5000 console for guidance and
monitoring of product applications using an existing Kuhn/Rauch system. Refer to Appendix J, Serial Console
Interfaces, for additional information.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
95
Chapter 7
Amazone Amatron+
The field computer may be used in conjunction with the Amazone Amatron+ console for guidance and
monitoring of product applications using an existing Amazone system. Refer to Appendix J, Serial Console
Interfaces, for additional information.
Yield Monitor
Select ‘Yield Monitor’ if the field computer will be interfacing with an optional Raven SmartYield system to
monitor and log yield and moisture data during harvest operations. Refer to the SmartYield Calibration &
Operation Manual for additional information.
SmartYield Pro
Select ‘SmartYield Pro’ if the field computer will be interfacing with an optional Raven SmartYield Pro CANbus
yield monitoring system to monitor and log yield and moisture data during harvest operations. Refer to the
SmartYield Pro Calibration & Operation Manual for additional information.
OmniSeed
Select the OmniSeed option if the field computer will be interfacing with the optional Raven OmniSeed system
to provide seed rate control for an air seeder system.
Note:
A registration code is required to interface with the Raven OmniSeed system. If attempting to
select OmniSeed during the initial start up, select ‘None’ for the product control option to complete
the wizard.
Contact a local Raven dealer for more information and to purchase the required activation key.
Refer to the Special Features Registration section on page 138 for instructions on entering the
OmniSeed activation key before setting up the air seeder control system.
96
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Tools Menu
The available system or boom master options allow the operator to select the preferred method to toggle
recording of the coverage map. Depending upon the product control system and any detected CAN hardware,
the following options may be available to configure the input of the master switch used with the field computer:
None/Raven Serial Console
The following options are available if the product control options is set to either ‘None’ or ‘Raven Serial
Console’:
Note:
If the Envizio Pro is connected to a CANbus with another CAN controller (such as a Raven SCS
4400/4600) with AccuBoom, be sure the control interface option is set to ‘None.’ This option allows
the field computer to monitor CANbus nodes without trying to control product nodes. In this
configuration, the boom master options will not be displayed.
Envizio Pro Boom Sense Wire. Select this option if the boom sense wire has been connected as instructed
in the Boom Sense Wire section on page 23.
On-Screen Vehicle Arrow. This option allows the operator to touch the Vehicle Arrow (shown to
the right) displayed on the Guidance screen to toggle the coverage history on or off.
AccuBoom™ Master Switch. If the orange/white wire on the optional AccuBoom node harness
has been connected, select the ‘AccuBoom master switch’ option to create the coverage map based upon
the section information reported by the AccuBoom node.
CAN Options
If CAN Sprayer/Spreader Control is selected as the product control option, the list of available boom master
options is replaced by the following CAN AccuBoom options.
AccuBoom Combo Node. Do not select the ‘AccuBoom Combo Node’ option if an optional AccuBoom
system has not been installed on the CANbus.
If an AccuBoom Combo node (P/N 063-0172-714) is present on the CANbus, select this option. The
following option will be available in the AccuBoom Options list.
Use as Boom/Speed AccuBoom Combo Node. This option will only appear if the ‘AccuBoom Combo Node’
option is selected. Select this option to use the AccuBoom combo node as the boom/speed node. If this
option is selected, a separate boom/speed node is not required for the CANbus system.
If ‘CAN AccuRow Only’ or ‘CAN Planter Control’ is selected, the boom master options displays the available
options for CAN planter control.
Reverse Sensing. The reverse sensing feature may be enabled or disabled from the Control Interface screen.
Refer to the Reverse Sensing section on page 121 for details about using this feature or to enable or
disable the feature from the GPS menu.
On-Screen Vehicle Arrow. This option allows the operator to touch the Vehicle Arrow (shown
to the right) displayed on the Guidance screen to toggle the coverage history on or off.
AccuRow Master Switch. If an optional AccuRow system has been installed with the field
computer, select the AccuRow master switch option to create the coverage map based
upon the section information reported by the AccuRow node.
If the ‘OmniSeed’ option is selected, the following option may be enabled.
Remote Master. Select this option if a remote master switch or proximity switch is connected to the “Remote
Switch” connector on the chassis cable.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
97
7
Boom Master and System Options
Chapter 7
Serial Port Configuration
To control an external serial device with the field computer:
1.
Select Control Interface from the System menu.
2.
On the Control Interface screen, touch the Serial Port icon in the upper right corner.
The following screen and options are displayed.
None. Select this option if no serial device is connected to the field computer.
Lightbar Interface. Select this option to allow the field computer to control an external light bar connected to
the connector labeled ‘COM3/Light Bar’ on the auxiliary interface cable (P/N 115-0171-745) or chassis
interface cable (P/N 115-0172-001).
Note:
Refer to the Display section on page 135 to adjust the brightness of the external light bar via the
field computer interface.
Weather Station. Select this option to connect an optional WatchDog Sprayer Station to the Envizio Pro field
computer. Depending upon the current system and connected controllers, the weather station may be
connected to either ‘COM2/Console’ or ‘COM3/Light Bar’ ports on the interface or chassis cabling. Refer to
Appendix D, Weather Station, for additional assistance with connecting and configuring the field computer
and WatchDog Sprayer Station.
CAN Diagnostics
The CAN Diagnostics screen displays the software version, software revision, and program number for each
node detected on the CANbus.
1.20 (143)
Software
Version
Software
Revision
Program
Number
Review the CAN Diagnostics section on page 30 for additional information on the CAN Diagnostics screen and
readdressing or restarting CANbus nodes.
98
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Tools Menu
The Product Control menu displays the current settings and calibration values for the selected product. If
additional product control nodes have been detected by the control system, touch the Select Product icon in
the upper, right corner of the screen to cycle through detected product nodes or control channels.
Select
Product
The Product Control Configuration screen contains several of the calibration numbers which the field computer
requires to provide product control.
Access the product control configuration to adjust the following settings for the product control system:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Application type
Speed sensor type and cal
Valve type and cal
Product control node cal values
Volume and area settings
Feature settings
Alarm settings
Section assignments
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
99
7
Product Control
Chapter 7
Application Type
Touch the Application button on the Product Control Configuration screen to access the Application Type
screen.
Select
Product
Note:
The Application button displays the current application type selected.
The application type selection configures how the field computer will interpret information from the control
nodes and must be set correctly to ensure that the field computer interfaces with the product control hardware
correctly. Select one of the following application types for the displayed control channel.
Note:
Some application types may require a specific node firmware version, optional CANbus control
hardware or an optional activation key. If an application type selection is not available, contact a
local Raven dealer for assistance.
Liquid. Application of a liquid product.
Gran (Granular) 1. Dry or granular product application using a single encoder to meter application equipment
with a single bed.
Gran (Granular) 2. Dry or granular product application using a single encoder to meter application from
equipment with a dual bed.
Gran (Granular) 3. Dry or granular product application using a dual encoder configuration to meter application
from equipment with a dual bed.
Gran (Granular) 4. An air seeder system on which a seed gate or segmented meter roller is used to control
seed for active sections before the seed has entered the air system. Most air seeder control systems will be
controlled using this application type selection.
Gran (Granular) 5. An air seeder system on which a manifold or distribution bin is used to control air flow to
active sections after the seed has entered the air system. This application type will control the RPM of the
meter roller based upon active drill sections.
Note:
An optional OmniSeed authorization key is required for Gran 4 and Gran 5 application types to
enable the field computer to control air seeder control systems. Contact a local Raven dealer for
purchasing information and refer to the Updates section on page 138 to enter the activation code
to unlock the Gran 4 and Gran 5 application type selections.
Spinner. Select this option for RPM control of spinner speed during field operations.
Injection. Select this option for Pump RPM control of an injection pump during field operations.
100
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Tools Menu
NH3 Pump. The anhydrous pump control selection will be available if the product node is capable of specific
control features for the AccuFlow HP boost pump. Select this option to allow the operator configure specific
boost pump control features for field operations.
AccuFlow HP+. Select the AccuFlow HP+ option if controlling a Raven AccuFlow HP™ Plus system with the
Vortex cooler for anhydrous ammonia applications.
Note:
Select the AccuFlow HP+ option only if an AccuFlow HP™ Plus system will be controlled by the
field computer. Contact a local Raven dealer for additional assistance.
Speed
The Speed button displays the current speed calibration value. Touch the Speed button to display the Speed
Cal screen.
Sensor Type
Select the type of speed sensor to be used with the Envizio Pro control system.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
101
7
NH3. An option for anhydrous ammonia rate control operations will be available if the product node is capable
of specific rate control features. It is recommended to ensure this option is available and selected when
controlling the application of anhydrous ammonia during field operations.
Chapter 7
Speed Cal
The current speed cal is displayed on the Speed Cal button. Touch the Speed Cal button and use the onscreen keypad to enter a speed cal value.
Raven Industries recommends the following speed calibration values for initial system setup.
Sensor Type
Setting
Radar/GPS
Wheel
Recommended Initial Speed Cal
Used with
External Raven GPS
Receiver
Internal DGPS Receiver
GPS Speed over CANbus
Raven Radar
Wheel Magnets
Speedometer Drive Speed
Sensor
English
Metric
785
199
812
1000
598
1000
206
1000
152
254
612
155
These values are good starting points and generally yield adequate results, however, the speed cal should be
refined for the specific vehicle and speed sense system. See Appendix A, Calculating the Calibration Values,
for instructions on refining the speed cal value.
Note:
The GPS speed over CANbus feature is only available with specific Raven speed sense nodes.
This feature utilizes NMEA speed over ground data transmitted over the CAN network which
eliminates the need for a separate, external speed sensor.
NOTICE
When using the GPS speed over CANbus
feature, no tuning or adjustment is necessary or
recommended to the speed cal value. Losing
GPS signal for more than a second will also
result in loss of the CAN speed signal which
may affect product application in progress.
Test Speed
The test speed may be used to simulate speed when testing or troubleshooting the product control system.
Enter a value approximately equal to normal application speeds to allow the field computer to control product
application functions while the vehicle remains stationary. The test speed is useful for troubleshooting the CAN
and product control systems.
Note:
A speed cal must be entered to allow the test speed feature to function.
The test speed area displays the current test speed. Touch this area to enter a test speed.
Note:
The test speed will clear if the field computer receives a pulse from the actual speed sensor. To
keep the test speed from disengaging, disconnect the speed sensor from the system.
Distance
The distance value can be used as an odometer of the distance traveled by a vehicle over a season, or the
distance traveled during one application. Touch the Reset Value button to clear the distance value, or allow the
field computer to keep a running tally of the total distance traveled.
102
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Tools Menu
Valve
Standard/Fast/Fast Close
7
Touch the Valve button to access the Valve Calibration screen.
PWM/PWM Close
Valve Type
Select the type of control valve used to control the selected product during a job.
Note:
If ‘PWM’ or ‘PWM Close’ is selected as the valve type, a button labeled ‘Modify PWM Settings’ will
be displayed on the calibration screen.
Valve Cal
Note:
If the dual loop control feature is enabled, the valve cal value will be replaced by the flow cal value.
The valve cal value helps the field computer adjust the valve control response for slight differences between
control valves and is required for product control. Raven Industries recommends the following calibration
values for initial system setup.
Control Valve Type
Standard (C-SD)
Fast (C-F) or Fast Close (C-FC)
PWM (C-P) or PWM Close (C-PC)
Valve Cal
2123
743
43
These values are good starting points and will generally yield adequate results, however, the valve cal should
be refined for the individual control valves installed on the specific machine. See Valve Cal section on
page 194, for information on the components of the valve cal setting or on tuning the valve cal value.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
103
Chapter 7
Flow Cal (Dual Loop Control Mode Only)
The flow cal value may be used when controlling a liquid application system using a PWM control valve. This
value sets how the system responds to rate control inputs while product is flowing through the flow meter. A
value between 11 and 999 may be entered for the flow cal value. The default value for the flow cal is 103.
Refer to the Flow Cal (Dual Loop Control Mode) section on page 195 for information on the components of the
flow cal setting or on refining the flow cal value.
Note:
Set the Sgain value prior to adjusting the flow cal value.
When adjusting the flow cal value, it is not recommended to adjust the last digit (i.e. ‘3’ in the
default value). Review the Flow Cal (Dual Loop Control Mode) section on page 195 for more
information.
Valve Cal 2
Note:
If the dual loop control feature is enabled the valve cal 2 value will be replaced by the Sgain value.
This value can fine tune control valve response and help control application rate oscillations when the console
is programmed in PWM mode.
When a fast close valve is selected, the valve cal 2 value is utilized to enable a high resolution rate control for
lower application rates. Enter a non-zero value for the time, in milliseconds, which the valve will be fully opened
before switching into high resolution control. For example, a value of 200 will give the valve a 200 millisecond
“burst” at a full 12 V to open the fast valve from the closed position before resuming product rate control. A zero
value will disable this feature.
Sgain (Pressure System Gain - Dual Loop Control Mode Only)
The Sgain value may be used when controlling a liquid application system using a PWM control valve. Use this
value to adjust how aggressively the application system responds to pressure changes in the application
system. The default setting for the Sgain value is 100. To adjust the system aggressiveness, enter a value
between 1 and 999 as necessary.
Note:
It is recommended to increase or decrease the current value in increments of 10 or less when
making adjustments to the Sgain setting. If the new value does not produce significant or notable
changes in the system response, increments of 20 may be used.
For example, increase the Sgain value if the observed product pressure increases too slowly or if the system
takes a long time to reach a set standby pressure or rate input change. If the system is consistently over
shooting a set standby pressure or oscillating around a target rate, decrease the Sgain value until the system
stabilizes.
Standby Pressure Sgain. The standby pressure feature may be enabled in either the standard or dual loop
control modes. When enabled in the standard control mode, the Sgain value is not displayed on the Valve
Calibration screen, but is still used to set the response of the system to the application system pressures.
Note:
104
Refer to the Feature Settings section on page 114 for information about enabling the standby
pressure feature on the Feature Settings screen.
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Tools Menu
1.
From the field computer Home screen, select the Tools Menu icon.
2.
Select the Product Control icon from the System menu.
3.
Touch the Feature Settings button.
4.
On the Feature Settings screen, touch the dual loop control option to enable the feature and select the
Accept icon to return to the Product Control Configuration screen.
Note:
Refer to the Feature Settings section on page 114 for additional information about the settings and
features available on this screen.
5.
Select the Valve button on the Product Control Configuration screen and touch the Sgain button.
6.
Use the on-screen keypad to enter the desired Sgain value and touch the Accept icon to save the new
value.
7.
7
To access and set the Sgain value while operating in the standard control mode:
a.
Increase the Sgain value if the product pressure takes too long or cannot reach the set standby
pressure.
b.
Decrease the Sgain value if the product pressure overshoots or oscillates around the set standby
pressure.
Return to the Feature Settings screen and disable the dual loop control feature before resuming product
application in the standard control mode.
Valve Advance (Standard or Fast Valve)
This feature allows the operator to set the amount of time (in seconds) which the control valve will remain open
after boom sections are toggled off while in automatic rate control mode. A value of 1-9 means an advance of
1-9 seconds respectively. A value of 0 means no advance. This setting may be used in conjunction with the
valve delay for low rate applications to build up pressure when the master switch is toggled on. For best
results, approach the headlands at consistent speeds while turning boom sections off.
Note:
This feature is useful when controlling flow back style boom on/off valves. The Advance button is
only displayed if a Standard, Fast, or Fast Close valve is selected and if the assigned product
control node has software version 1.50 or higher. When operating with a fast close valve, a value
of zero is recommended for the valve advance feature.
Reset Valve Cal
Touch the Reset Valve Cal button to replace the current valve cal with the recommended value from the table
shown above.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
105
Chapter 7
Modify PWM Settings (PWM or PWM Close Valve)
If either ‘PWM’ or ‘PWM Close’ is selected as the valve type, a Modify PWM Settings button will display.
Select one of the following methods to configure the PWM control valve associated with the selected node or
control channel.
Manual Calibration. The manual calibration mode allows the operator to manually enter the PWM minimum,
maximum and preset values to known values using an on-screen keypad.
Note:
The PWM valve is not operated in the manual calibration mode. It is recommended to verify that
any changes to these settings have the desired affect before controlling product application.
Refer to the PWM Calibration Screen section on page 107 for more information on the PWM
values configured using the manual calibration mode.
Calibration Assistant. The calibration assistant allows the operator to increase or decrease the PWM output
using on-screen controls and set the PWM minimum, maximum, frequency and preset values based upon
observed operation.
WARNING
The PWM valve output will increase and
decrease as the up and down arrows are
selected. Keep any bystanders away from
areas where product may be expelled and
moving components when performing the
calibration process.
To use the calibration assistant mode, toggle the vehicle master switch and at least one section to the on
position. To stop PWM output at any time during the calibration process, toggle the vehicle master switch to the
off position.
Note:
106
Refer to the PWM Calibration Screen section on page 107 for more information on the PWM
values configured using the calibration assistant.
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Tools Menu
Automatic Calibration. The automatic calibration mode will allow the field computer to automatically adjust
the PWM output and attempt to determine the minimum, maximum and preset values.
7
WARNING
The PWM valve output will increase and
decrease during the calibration procedure.
Keep away from areas where product may be
expelled and moving components and alert
anyone around the equipment when performing
the calibration process.
To use the automatic assistant mode, toggle the vehicle master switch and at least one section to the on
position. Touch the ‘Cancel’ button at any time during the calibration to stop PWM output.
The automatic calibration process may take up to two minutes to complete. Maintain sufficient engine RPM
and set the remote hydraulic flow to allow for at least 1 GPM [3.8 L/min] flow for each motor on the control
system. The field computer will display a prompt when the calibration process is complete. If the system fails to
calibrate properly, touch the ‘Re-calibrate’ button to restart the calibration process.
PWM Calibration Screen
In the manual calibration and calibration assistant modes, the PWM Calibration screen will display with the
following options or settings available.
Information
Accept
Information. Touch the blue Information icon to display a brief explanation of the settings and options
available on the PWM Calibration screen.
Max PWM. Enter a Max PWM value to set the maximum desired RPM or hydraulic output for a Pulse Width
Modulated (PWM) hydraulic control valve. This setting limits how far the PWM valve will open.
With the master switch in the on position, increase this value until one of the following conditions is met:
• The maximum desired flow is reached in a liquid system
• The maximum desired belt speed is achieved in a granular system
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
107
Chapter 7
Preset PWM. When operating with a PWM valve, the preset PWM value sets how far the valve will stay open
to maintain pressure in the system. When the master switch is off, the PWM pulse width will remain at the
existing value or go to the preset PWM value, whichever is lower.
When operating with a PWM close valve, the preset PWM setting is the initial target pulse width when the
master switch is turned on. If this value is set to zero, the pulse width will return to the last value when the
master switch is turned on.
Note:
If the Standby Pressure feature is enabled on the Feature Settings screen, the preset PWM value
will be replaced by the standby pressure value. Review the Feature Settings section on page 114
for more information on the Standby Pressure feature or see the Standby Pressure section on
page 108 for more information on setting the standby pressure value.
Standby Pressure. When controlling a liquid product with a PWM valve selected (not PWM close), the
standby pressure value sets the pressure which the system will maintain in the product lines when the master
or all boom sections are toggled off.
Note:
The standby pressure setting is only accessible when controlling products in liquid control modes
with a boom pressure transducer detected by the field computer. Refer to the Feature Settings
section on page 114 for details.
If the system pressure does not reach the set standby pressure, or if the observed pressure
oscillates, when the master switch is toggled off, the Sgain value will need to be adjusted. See the
Sgain (Pressure System Gain - Dual Loop Control Mode Only) section on page 104 to adjust the
Sgain value.
Min PWM. Enter a Min PWM value to set the minimum desired RPM or hydraulic output (zero point or shutoff
point) for a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) hydraulic control valve.
With the master switch in the on position, decrease this value until one of the following conditions is met:
• The minimum desired flow is reached in a liquid system
• The value when the belt stops moving in a granular system
PWM Frequency. This value sets the frequency of the pulses that are sent to the PWM valve. The default
value is 122 Hz for Raven valves, or a value specified by the valve manufacturer.
108
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Tools Menu
Calibration Settings
Liquid Control Mode
7
The Calibration Settings screen displays calibration values for the selected product and application type.
Granular Control Mode
Touch the corresponding button to enter or modify a calibration value for the selected product node.
Note:
For recommended methods of calculating various calibration values, refer to Appendix A,
Calculating the Calibration Values.
If the field computer is connected to the optional Raven OmniSeed system for seeder control
operations, refer to Appendix I, OmniSeed™ Calibration, for details on settings used with the
OmniSeed feature.
Meter Cal, Spinner Cal, or Product Density
• The flow meter calibration (meter cal) value can be found on the tag attached to the flow meter. Review the
Meter Cal section on page 191
Note:
Copy the information from the tag for future reference as tags may fade or be lost during
operation.
• If operating in a granular application mode, the Product Density button replaces the meter cal value. Touch
the Product Density button to enter the measured product density.
• When controlling the spinner RPM with granular product applications, the spinner calibration setting will
replace the meter cal setting on the Calibration Settings screen.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
109
Chapter 7
Rate Cal
Enter the target rate for the product controlled by the selected product node. Consult with a dealer to ensure
spray nozzles or gate height of the machine is capable of applying at the target application rate for the product
being applied. See Appendix A, Calculating the Calibration Values, for more information on calculating the rate
cal.
Verifying Flow Rate Limits. The target rate for an application must be within the range of that specified for the
Raven flow meter installed.
Flow Meter Model
RFM 5
RFM 15
RFM 60P
RFM 100
RFM 200/ 200 Poly
RFM 400
Flow Range
0.05 - 5 GPM [0.2 - 18.9 lit/min]
0.3 - 15 GPM [1.1 - 56.8 lit/min]
1 - 60 GPM [3.8 - 210 lit/min]
3 - 100 GPM [11.4 -380 lit/min]
15 - 200 GPM [56.8 - 760 lit/min]
25 - 400 GPM [94.6 - 1515 lit/min]
Average Meter
Cal Value
5500
1750
720
700
164
80
Valve Delay
Use the valve delay option to include a delay in seconds between turning on the control valve (turning on
sections) and when the product control nodes begin to control the flow rate.
Note:
A value of zero must be entered when using a close-type valve, such as a Fast Close or PWM
Close valve. A zero value must also be entered when programming a standard valve with an
injection system.
Pump or Fan Cal
The pump or fan cal is used to calibrate the field computer to the specific fan (granular) or pump (liquid) on the
machine. Enter the number of pulses sensed per one revolution of the fan or pump. These values are for
monitoring purposes only. The field computer will not control based upon these calibration values or the
monitored RPM of the pump or fan.
110
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Tools Menu
A tiered boom configuration has two or more booms stacked one directly in front of the other and may or may
not have different sets of nozzles capable of applying different rates.
Note:
Specialized pluming, cabling and a relay box are required to utilize a tiered boom configuration.
Generally, sprayers are not setup for this feature from the factory.
Refer to the Tiered Boom Settings section on page 197 for more information on calculating the tiered boom
settings.
Spreader Constant (Granular Systems)
The field computer uses the programmed spreader constant to accurately control granular products. To
maintain system accuracy, re-calibrate the spreader constant anytime the gate height of the machine is
adjusted. Refer to Appendix A, Calculating the Calibration Values, for assistance calculating the spreader
constant.
Rate Bump
The rate bump value sets the increment by which the target rate will increase or decrease when using the Rate
Bump buttons on the Guidance screen. Each product node or control channel must be programmed with the
desired rate bump value. If no value, or a value of zero, is entered the rate bump buttons will have no affect on
the selected product application rate on the Guidance screen.
Pressure 1 and 2 Cal
For each product node connected to the CANbus, the field monitor can monitor and display up to two pressure
readings.
Touch the Pressure 1 or Pressure 2 buttons to enter the pressure cal for each pressure transducer. With no
pressure in the machine product lines, enter a pressure cal of ‘0’ to calibrate the pressure display.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
111
7
Tiered Boom Settings
Chapter 7
Prescription (Rx) Settings
If an optional variable rate application (VRA) key has been activated, the Rx Settings button will be displayed
on the Calibration Settings screen.
Touch the Rx Settings button to display the Rx Settings screen.
Zero Rate Shut Off. Enable the Zero Rate Shut Off option to allow the field computer to close product control
valves based on zones with a target rate of zero on the prescription map. Refer to Chapter 8, Software
Updates and File Maintenance, for more information on transferring prescription maps.
Note:
Enabling the Zero Rate Shut Off feature will affect all control channels.
Prescription (Rx) Look Ahead Distance. Enable the ‘Use Look Ahead Distance’ option on the Rx Settings
screen to set look-ahead values in units of distance rather than time for changing the prescription map rate
control zones.
Note:
The vehicle must travel at a constant speed while using the look ahead distance.
Enabling the look ahead distance option will affect all control channels.
Prescription (Rx) Look Ahead. Set the Rx Look Ahead setting to the number of seconds (determined by
speed) the field computer is allowed to scan in front of the current vehicle position. This feature may help to
compensate for the time it takes a valve to adjust to a different rate or to fully open or close.
112
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Prescription (Rx) Default Rate. Set the Rx Default Rate at the Target rate for areas without Prescription
information. The field computer will apply the default rate within any areas of a prescription map without a rate.
Product control in Zero Rate zones will remain at zero. The Default Rate only affects areas where prescription
rate information has not been entered.
AccuBoom
If the optional AccuBoom, automatic boom section control, feature is detected by the field computer, the
AccuBoom button will be displayed on the Product Control Configuration screen.
Settings for the optional AccuBoom, automatic boom section control, feature are available for each product
controlled with the field computer. Refer to the AccuBoom™ Setup section on page 164 for more information
on configuring the AccuBoom feature for liquid or granular product application control.
Note:
Refer to the AccuRow or OmniRow Calibration and Operation Manual for additional information on
configuring the optional AccuRow, automatic planter section control, feature when controlling
planter systems.
Volume and Area Settings
The volume/area Settings screen allows the operator to program the tank or bin volume for the machine, the
field volume, total volume, field area and total area.
Tank Volume or Bin Level
The tank or bin indicator on the Guidance screen displays a tally of product remaining based upon this value.
The tank or bin volume is the volume of product in, not the capacity of, the tank or bin. Set this value to the
normal volume of product in a full tank or bin. This setting also determines the value of the ‘Reset Tank or Bin
Volume’ button.
Refer to the Entering Tank Volume or Bin Level section on page 202 for information on setting the tank volume
or bin level.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
113
7
Tools Menu
Chapter 7
Tank Fill Monitor
If an optional tank fill monitor system is installed with the field computer, the Tank Fill Monitor button will be
displayed on the Volume/Area Settings screen. Touch this button to access the tank fill system while refilling
the product tanks. Refer to Appendix G, Tank Fill Monitor Calibration for addition information on using the Tank
Fill Monitor.
Field Volume and Area
The field volume and field area displays on the Volume/Area screen can be reset independently of the total
volume and total area displays. Reset the field volume and field area to keep a record of the volume of product
applied to a field and the acres applied in that field.
Total Volume and Area
The total volume and total area displays on the Volume/Area screen can be reset independently of the field
volume and field area displays. For example, reset the total volume and total area to keep records of the total
volume of product applied and the total acreage covered.
Feature Settings
From the Home screen, touch the Tools Menu icon and select the Product Control icon from the System menu.
Touch the Feature Settings icon to configure additional features settings on the field computer. The Feature
Settings screen may display the following options:
Zero Speed
The zero speed feature will automatically turn off product application if the vehicle speed drops below 0.7 mph
[1.1 km/h] while in automatic mode. To restart the system, cycle the master switch ‘Off’ then back ‘On.’ A speed
of 0.7 mph [1.1 km/h] must be maintained for more than 10 seconds or the zero speed feature will reactivate.
114
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Tools Menu
Use the decimal shift feature to increase the system accuracy for low application rates. In the standard mode,
the field computer displays values to one decimal place. With decimal shift mode active, the field computer
displays values to two decimal places.
Note:
If the decimal shift feature is changed, be sure to verify all calibration settings to ensure accuracy
of the product control system. Change settings as necessary.
Display Smoothing
Toggle the display smoothing feature to allow the field computer to smooth the rate display on the Guidance
screen. With the feature selected, as long as the actual rate is within 10% of the actual application rate, the
target rate will display as the actual rate on the Guidance screen. The actual rate will be displayed if the actual
rate does not reach the target rate dead band (±10%) within 10 seconds.
Ratio Rate
The ratio rate feature configures the selected control channel to apply an injected chemical at a rate
proportional to the carrier product flow rate. The ratio rate application mode must be enabled via the control
console and a ratio rate cal value must be entered for each product controlled in ratio to the carrier.
Note:
The carrier product must be programmed on control channel 1. If a carrier product is not set as
product 1, the low pressure alarm will not function. If the off rate alarm is triggered frequently
during injection applications in ratio rate mode, access the volume per minute display on the
control console and verify that the target flow rate is within the application range for the pump.
The ratio rate calibration value is entered as the ratio of injected chemical to carrier in ounces per gallon
[deciliters per liter].
For Example:
If the desired ratio of injected chemical concentration is 2 ounces per gallon [0.59 deciliters per liter], enter
a value of 2 [0.59] for the ratio rate cal value. Once the operation conditions in the Normal Application Mode
section on page 29 are set, the system will automatically adjust the rate of injected product in proportion
with the carrier product flow rate.
Agitator
If equipped with an injection system featuring an agitator enabled output, this option enables or disables a
chemical agitator.
PWM Smart Control
The PWM smart control feature may be enabled to allow the control system to estimate the required PWM duty
cycle for changes in vehicle speed or target rate, or when the hydraulic valve is toggled on. When this feature
is enabled, control response will be much more aggressive.
Note:
Smart control will be tuned during the PWM calibration. Refer to the Modify PWM Settings (PWM
or PWM Close Valve) section on page 106 for additional information on performing calibration or
adjustments for PWM type control valves.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
115
7
Decimal Shift
Chapter 7
Dual Loop Control
The dual loop control feature is designed for use with low application rates and requires a pressure transducer
with a liquid application system controlled with a PWM valve. The dual loop feature uses both the flow meter to
monitor liquid product flow and a pressure transducer to monitor liquid product pressure controlling a pump to
enhance the control response during operation at low application rates. The default setting for this feature is
disabled.
If the dual loop control feature is enabled, the valve cal and valve cal 2 values programmed during the initial
field computer configuration will be replaced with the flow cal and Sgain values.
Standby Pressure (PWM Valves Only)
The standby pressure enable selection allows the operator to toggle the standby pressure feature on or off and
enter a minimum pressure to maintain when all section or the master switch is turned off. Refer to the Preset
PWM section on page 108 for information on the standby pressure value.
Note:
To enable the standby pressure feature, the product control system must have a PWM valve
controlling a liquid application system and a pressure transducer connected to the control node. If
these requirements are not met, the console will automatically disable the standby pressure
feature. When enabled, the standby pressure setting will replace the ‘Preset PWM’ setting on the
Valve Calibration screen. Review the Preset PWM section on page 108.
Alarm Settings
From the Home screen, touch the Tools Menu icon and select the Planter icon from the System menu. Touch
the Alarm Settings button from the Planter Control screen to display the Alarm Settings screen. The Alarm
Settings screen is used to set the values at which the field computer will display visual alarms on-screen. The
Alarm Settings screen also allows the operator to enable an audible alarm tone when the visual alarm notice
displays.
Note:
116
Some alarm settings or features may be available only in specific control modes or when the field
computer detects specific components or features on the CANbus.
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Tools Menu
In any of the granular modes, a bin alarm option is displayed on the Alarm Settings screen. Enable the Bin
Alarm if a bin level sensor is connected to the control system. When the sensor detects a low level in the bin,
the field computer displays the alarms window to alert the operator of the condition.
Vacuum Alarm
The vacuum alarm is available when a CAN motor control or injection node is detected on the CANbus. Enable
this alarm to display an alert if the injection system begins running in a vacuum state.
CAN Audible Alarm
Select the CAN Audible Alarm to enable the audible alarm tone for the configured settings on this screen. If
any of the following settings are encountered, the field computer plays an audible tone to warn the operator of
the condition.
Flow Error Cal (CAN Motor Control)
If a CAN motor control node for an injection pump is connected to the CANbus. the Alarm Settings screen will
display the Flow Cal alarm feature. This alarm may be used to indicate that the chemical tank is empty or the
pump is unable to prime or inject product.
Enter a value between 0 and 100 for the percentage of error allowed between the flow switch and pump
encoder before a flow alarm will be displayed. For example, set this value to 100 to disable the flow error cal
alarm or 0 to display an error any time the flow switch and pump encoder do not match. The default value for
the flow error cal alarm is 50.
Note:
The Flow Error Cal is replaced with the FER (Flow to Encoder Ratio) value when operating a
Raven Sidekick Pro™. Refer to the Sidekick Pro Installation and Operation Manual for more
information about operation with the Envizio Pro field computers.
NH3 Configuration
Note:
The NH3 configuration value will only be available when the field computer is configured for
interfacing with a Raven anhydrous ammonia control system such as AccuFlow™ or AccuFlow
HP™ Plus. Refer to Application Type section on page 100 for additional assistance with the
application type settings.
Enter the following values to set the system features available with the AccuFlow system:
Value
3
4
5
6 (Default)
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
Remote Proximity Sensor
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Section Feedback
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
117
7
Bin Alarm
Chapter 7
Dual Flow (%) Percent
When controlling a dual bed system in Gran 3 mode, the Dual Flow Percent feature may be set up on the
Alarm Settings screen. Set the dual flow percent alarm for the tolerance between belt encoder readings before
the field computer will display an alarm condition. This alarm may be used to indicate that the belts are
traveling at different rates or one belt is not moving. The out of tolerance condition must be met for at least 5
seconds before the alarm is displayed.
Enter a value of 100 to disable the dual flow percent alarm or 0 to display an error any time the belt encoders
do not match. The default value for the dual flow percent alarm is 50.
Low Pressure
The Low Pressure setting is only displayed on the Alarm Settings screen when a pressure transducer is
connected to the system and detected by the field computer.
Enter the minimum desired pressure in PSI [kPa] for product at the pressure transducer location. If the product
pressure falls below the programmed, the field computer will display an alert.
Note:
The product control valve will stop closing when the Low Pressure setting is reached.
Low Tank or Bin
Enter the tank or bin volume at which alarms area will activate indicating that a product is running low.
Low Limit
The Low Limit value sets the minimum volume per minute which a product will be applied. If the flow meter
drops below this setting, the field computer will display an alert.
Note:
The product control valve will stop closing when the Low Limit setting is reached.
Low Supply Alarm
Note:
The low supply alarm value will only be available if the control channel is configured for AccuFlow
HP+ system control. Refer to Application Type section on page 100 for additional assistance with
the application type settings.
The low supply alarm value configures the minimum acceptable pressure in PSI [kPa] of the anhydrous
ammonia within the cooler. If the pressure falls below the entered value, the system will display an alert. Set
the low supply pressure between 0 to 50 PSI [0 to 345 kPa]. Enter a value of zero to disable the low supply
alarm.
118
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Tools Menu
Note:
The low supply alarm value will only be available if the control channel is configured for AccuFlow
HP+ system control. Refer to Application Type section on page 100 for additional assistance with
the application type settings.
Enter the maximum pump pressure in PSI allowed for the AccuFlow HP™ Plus system. If the pressure
monitored on the pump outlet rises above the configured value, the field computer will trigger an alert for the
operator. The field computer will provide an operator alert if the system pressure reaches the configured value
during anhydrous ammonia applications. The pressure alarm may be set between 0 to 250 PSI [0 to 1724
kPa]. Enter a value of zero to disable the maximum pressure alarm condition.
Off Rate Percent
Enter the percentage at which the Off Rate alarm will activate. The Off Rate alarm activates when the actual
rate differs from the target rate by the programmed value for longer than five seconds.
The off rate alarm percent value will also determine the coverage mapping colors during an active job.
Current Alarms
Touch the Current Alarms button to display any current product alarms.
Section Assignments
The Section Assignment screen allows the operator to assign products to a section. Place a green check mark
below a section to assign the selected product to that section.
Note:
The vehicle or implement’s plumbing must accommodate the selected section assignments.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
119
7
Max Pressure Alarm
Chapter 7
AutoBoom®
Touch this icon to display the AutoBoom Setup screen. See Chapter 10, Using AutoBoom®, for a brief
overview of this feature on the Envizio Pro. Refer to the AutoBoom Calibration & Operation Manual for
calibration and detailed operation instructions.
Note:
If no AutoBoom node is detected by the CANbus, a Function Disabled screen will appear.
Troubleshoot the node and readdress the CANbus. See Chapter 4, CAN Networking and
Diagnostics, for CAN installation and troubleshooting information.
Steering
If an optional assisted steering system has been installed, the Steering icon will be displayed in the System
menu. Touch this icon to access the Steering Settings screen. For more detailed installation and calibration
Information, refer to the SmarTrax Calibration and Operation Manual.
GPS Menu
The GPS menu displays available options for the DGPS source. The GPS menu contains the DGPS Source
selection options as well as settings for Message Outputs, Differential Sources, and a DGPS Status, or Health,
screen.
Enable/Disable
Reverse Sensing
Feature
Note:
120
The Source and Output screens are only available on consoles featuring the built-in receiver.
These screens are only accessible if the built-in receiver is selected as the source of DGPS signal.
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Tools Menu
Select this option to allow the field computer to automatically detect when the vehicle is traveling in reverse.
When reverse speed is detected, the field computer will keep the previous orientation of vehicle indicator while
updating the vehicle position.
Note:
If this feature is disabled, the guidance display will assume all vehicle motion is in the forward
direction.
Touch the ‘Reverse Sensing’ option at the bottom of the GPS Menu screen to toggle the reverse sensing
feature. It is recommended to enable this feature if the field computer must accurately map application or field
coverage while the vehicle is reversing (i.e. backing into corners).
Note:
When the reverse sensing feature is enabled, the field computer may occasionally require the
operator to manually override the current direction of travel during field operations. Review the
GPS Health section on page 122 and the Direction of Travel Indicator section on page 124 before
starting a job to ensure that the operator can toggle the direction of travel if necessary.
The reverse sensing feature is not displayed if a SmarTrax terrain compensation node is
connected to the field computer.
The direction of travel icon (shown to the right) will be displayed on the Guidance screen any time
the field computer detects that the vehicle is traveling in reverse. Touch the reverse direction icon
to manually toggle the direction of travel displayed on the Guidance screen.
If the reverse direction icon is not displayed on the Guidance screen, touch the GPS Status
Indicator and touch the direction of travel icon along the right side of the screen to manually toggle the
displayed vehicle course.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
121
7
Reverse Sensing
Chapter 7
GPS Health
The GPS Health screen displays the status of GPS reception and can be used to troubleshoot the DGPS
receiver and signal.
Direction of
Travel Indicator
Receiver
Information
RTK Information
Note:
The GPS Health screen is quickly accessible from the Home screen or from the Guidance screens
by touching the GPS Status icon.
The RTK Information screen accessible by touching the Next on the GPS Health screen will only
be available if the field computer is configured for RTK corrections.
GPS Status Display Information
The upper portion of the GPS Health screen displays the following information:
Satellites. Number of satellites locked onto and used to determine correction. The field computer requires a
minimum of 5 satellites to provide differential correction.
DGPS. Displays the source of differential correction being used.
Note:
If using the e-Dif correction source with the Envizio Pro internal receiver, the DGPS field will
display AUTO.
Version. The firmware version of the DGPS receiver. This information may not be available in all
configurations or with some third party receivers.
Serial Number. The serial number of the DGPS receiver. This information may not be available in all
configurations or with some third party receivers.
HDOP. The Horizontal Dilution of Precision must be below 2.0 to maintain differential. If HDOP exceeds 2.0,
the GPS Status shield will change to yellow to alert the operator of the DGPS condition.
122
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Tools Menu
• ‘0’ or ‘1’ if no differential corrections are being received
• ‘2’ when the DGPS receiver is converging GS correction services, or the receiver has locked
onto a differential source when using SBAS
• ‘4’ for RTK fixed mode for fine GPS course correction mode
• ‘5’ for RTK float mode for coarse GPS correction mode, or a converged status when using
OmniSTAR XP/HP or GS correction services.
Note:
Refer to the RTK Fixed and Float Modes section on page 52 for more information on RTK fixed
and float modes.
AOD. The Age of Data corrections is shown in seconds. This is the time since the last GPS message update
has been received.
Note:
A Raven assisted steering system will disengage after a few seconds without a GPS message
update.
Elevation Mask. The elevation mask sets the minimum elevation of a satellite above the horizon which the
field computer may use for differential correction. This value is displayed in degrees above horizontal.
Refer to the Elevation Mask section on page 125 to modify the elevation mask setting.
The lower portion of the GPS Health screen displays the following satellite constellation information:
Satellite Constellation Map. The field computer displays the constellation of satellites currently locked and
used to determine differential. Touch a satellite displayed in the constellation to display information about
each satellite in the constellation.
Note:
To view the satellite constellation, be sure to set the GSA message to 1 Hz from an external DGPS
receiver.
If a Raven automatic steering system is connected, the satellite constellation and individual
satellite information may not be available on the GPS Health screen.
The satellites being tracked by the field computer will display green in the constellation map if the signal to
noise ration (SNR) value is 42 or higher. Satellites displayed as blue have an SNR value between 30 and
41 while satellites with an SNR below 30 will display as light blue.
PRN. Displays the PRN for the satellite currently selected in the constellation map area.
Status. The signal status of the selected satellite is displayed in this field. Satellites with a Signal to Noise
Ratio (SNR) at 40 or above will display a Healthy status and appear green in the satellite constellation map
while an SNR below 40 will show an Unhealthy status and appear blue in the map.
SNR. Displays the Signal to Noise Ratio of the selected satellite. To maintain differential signal, at least two
satellites in the constellation must have a Signal to Noise Ratio higher than 50.
Elevation. This value represents the elevation of the satellite and is displayed as degrees above the horizon.
Azimuth. The azimuth, or bearing, of the satellite is displayed as degrees from due North.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
123
7
Mode. Displays the current differential fix status. The mode value will display:
Chapter 7
Direction of Travel Indicator
This indicator displays the last direction of travel detected by the field computer. Touch the indicator to toggle
the direction of travel manually if the indicator or map display is incorrect.
Note:
When operating with an optional Raven SmarTrax™, assisted steering system, the direction of
travel icon may not be displayed in this location if the terrain compensation feature is enabled.
Review the SmarTrax Calibration and Operation Manual for details on using these systems with
the Envizio Pro field computers.
Receiver Information
Touch the this icon to access details about the GPS receiver such as serial number, firmware version, receiver
model, and the type of GPS receiver on-board the field computer.
This information will be required when unlocking additional features of the GPS receiver or when activating GS
Satellite corrections.
AutoDetect GPS
Touch the ‘AutoDetect GPS’ button on the GPS Health screen to allow the Envizio Pro to attempt to
automatically detect GPS information coming from an external device. The autodetect feature is normally only
required when interfacing with an external receiver or when receiving GPS information back from a SmarTrax
or TM-1 Tilt Module.
RTK Information Screen
When using the internal GPS receiver, or a compatible external GPS receiver such as the Raven Phoenix 300,
in RTK mode, touch the ‘Next’ icon on the GPS Health screen to view RTK base station information such as the
base station I.D. and baseline distance. This information may be used to help troubleshoot issues with the
system if necessary.
124
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Tools Menu
Important: If a SmarTrax assisted steering system is connected to the Envizio Pro field computer, set the correction
source to internal before making changes to the Envizio Pro internal receiver.
Note:
If the Envizio Pro is not able to detect the source or type of differential corrections received from
the an external GPS receiver, or if corrections are routed from the internal GPS receiver through a
Raven SmarTrax system or TM-1 Tilt Module, the Differential screen will be replaced by the
Default Differential screen. Refer to the Default Differential section on page 131 for more
information on using the differential settings displayed on this screen.
Select the Differential icon from the GPS menu to set up the internal receiver for the desired GPS correction
source. Generally, the SBAS (WAAS/EGNOS) option is selected by default.
Elevation Mask
Note:
Touch the ‘Auto Detect’ button on the GPS Health screen if a Raven receiver is connected directly
to the ‘GPS Receiver/DGPS’ port on the chassis interface or main interface cables. If the field
computer detects a Raven receiver, the field computer can be used to select the differential source
and PRN of the external receiver.
If GPS is routed through an assisted steering system such as the Raven SmarTrax, the receiver
cannot be configured with the field computer.
Elevation Mask
The elevation mask sets the minimum elevation of a satellite above the horizon which the field computer may
use for differential correction. This value is displayed in degrees above horizontal.
Touch the Elevation Mask icon in the upper, right corner of the Differential screen and use the on-screen
keypad to modify the elevation mask setting. The default value for the elevation mask is 4.0.
The current elevation mask value is displayed on the GPS Health screen.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
125
7
Differential
Chapter 7
SBAS (Satellite Based Augmentation System)
Note:
Some Envizio Pro field computers may have an internal receiver enabled for e-Dif and L-Dif only.
These receivers do not have an SBAS option and will not be able to utilize SBAS correction
signals.
Select the SBAS option to utilize the Wide Area Augmentation System (WAAS) or European Geostationary
Navigation Overlay Service (EGNOS) correction signals. For most internal GPS receivers, this is the default
option selected.
PRN (Pseudo-Random Number). The PRN scroll list allows the operator to manually set the PRN, or pseudorandom number, for the differential satellite which provides coverage for the operation area if desired.
Selecting a PRN from the list locks the correction signal to the selected satellite. If the ‘auto’ option is
selected, the field computer will scan and automatically set the PRN throughout an operation.
GL1DE Smoothing. Toggle the “GL1DE Enabled” option to enable the NovAtel GL1DE® algorithm while using
SBAS corrections. When enabled, the NovAtel GL1DE\ feature helps to smooth reported GPS positions
and reduce position jumps during operation and provides for a more stable position input for guidance
systems.
Note:
The NovAtel GL1DE feature is only available on Envizio Pro II field computers with the dual
frequency GPS receiver. Visit the NovAtel web site for a full description and additional information
on the NovAtel GL1DE feature.
www.novatel.com
GLONASS Authorization. An optional Global Navigation Satellite System (GLONASS) authorization key is
also available to enhance the standard GPS satellite constellation. This key allows the dual frequency
receiver to utilize the GLONASS satellite constellation which can increase the number of satellites visible at
any given time and help improve satellite coverage.
Note:
The GLONASS satellites will be utilized when the internal receiver is configured for the following
correction sources:
•
•
•
•
GL1DE Only
RTK using RTCM v 3.0
OmniSTAR G2
Satellite GS or Slingshot GS
e-Dif (Envizio Pro Only)
If an optional e-Dif key has been authorized, an option to enable e-Dif will be displayed on this screen. Select
the e-Dif option to display the timer for the last time the e-Dif was reset. Touch the Reset button to reset the
timer.
Note:
The Envizio Pro internal DGPS receiver is e-Dif capable. If connecting an external receiver to the
Envizio Pro console, make sure that it is capable of using e-Dif prior to purchasing or authorizing
an e-Dif code.
Contact a local Raven dealer for more information about the optional e-Dif correction source and
upgrades.
126
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Tools Menu
RTK (Envizio Pro II Only)
Note:
7
With an optional RTK authorization key, the Envizio Pro II dual frequency receiver may be used with a
Slingshot® Field Hub to receive RTK corrections via a wireless or cellular service provider or via a
Continuously Operating Reference Station (CORS) network.
The RTK option is only displayed after an RTK authorization key is entered using the procedure in
the Special Features Registration section on page 138. Contact a local Raven dealer to obtain the
authorization code or for more information on the Slingshot RTK services.
Check that the following settings are configured correctly to ensure that RTK corrections are used by the onboard receiver:
RTK Mode. Select the format of the correction messages sent from the RTK correction source. The default
setting is RTCM v3.0.
Baud Rate. Select the baud rate at which the correction messages are transmitted from the RTK correction
source. The default baud rate setting is 115200.
Network. Select the network from which the RTK corrections will be delivered. The default setting is ‘Disabled’
and is recommended when connected with a Slingshot Field Hub.
GL1DE® Only
For areas with limited SBAS coverage, the Envizio Pro II dual frequency receiver features the NovAtel GL1DE
as a GPS correction source option. In GL1DE only mode, the Envizio Pro II will use existing GPS or EGNOS
satellites to locate the vehicle position within 20 in [50 cm].
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
127
Chapter 7
OmniSTAR
Note:
Field computers with version 6.400 or newer GPS firmware are not compatible with OmniSTAR
correction services. See the GPS Status Display Information section on page 122 section for
assistance with verifying the firmware version installed on the receiver. Contact a local Raven
dealer for information on correction services available for field computers with newer firmware
versions or for additional assistance.
If the OmniSTAR correction service is selected for differential corrections, the Differential screen will display
subscription status information and region of operation.
Advanced
Advanced Menu
Touch the Advanced Menu icon in the upper, right corner of the screen access additional OmniSTAR correction
settings. The following options and information will be displayed on the OmniSTAR Advanced Menu screen:
Enable Custom Satellite. Enable custom satellite frequency and rate settings only when instructed by an
OmniSTAR technician.
Custom Frequency. The Custom Frequency button displays the current satellite frequency used with
OmniSTAR corrections.
Custom Rate. The Custom Rate button displays the current message rate for OmniSTAR corrections.
Signal Strength. Displays the signal strength of the selected satellite.
Subscription Status
The subscription status area displays the following subscription information when available:
Note:
If SmarTrax is connected to the Envizio Pro field computer, the operator must set the correction
source to “Internal” before the following information will be available. Be sure to move the vehicle
to a location with a clear view of the sky before contacting OmniSTAR for subscription information.
Expiration. The time until the current subscription will expire is displayed in weeks, days, and hours. Contact
OmniSTAR for subscription information.
Type. The type of subscription will be displayed in this area. OmniSTAR corrections are available in HP, XP,
and G2 modes.
ID. The OmniSTAR ID is required for registration with the OmniSTAR correction service.
128
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Tools Menu
Use the scroll list to select the region in which the field computer will be operating. This is necessary to ensure
that the receiver utilizes corrections appropriate for the area in which the receiver is operating. A satellite
selection guide is available on the OmniSTAR web site:
www.omnistar.com
Satellite GS
If the Satellite GS correction service is selected for differential corrections, the Differential screen will display
subscription status information and the regional satellite currently selected for corrections.
Accuracy
Warning
Subscription Status
The subscription status area displays the following subscription information when available:
Note:
If SmarTrax is connected to the Envizio Pro field computer, the operator must set the correction
source to “Internal” before the following information will be available. Be sure to move the vehicle
to a location with a clear view of the sky before contacting a local Raven dealer for subscription
assistance.
Expiration. The time until the current subscription will expire is displayed in days and hours. Contact a local
Raven dealer for subscription information.
Mode. This field will display whether the GS subscription is enabled or disabled. The mode must display
Enabled to allow Satellite GS corrections during field operations.
PAC Code. The PAC Code is required for registration with the Satellite GS correction service.
Select Satellite
Use the scroll list to select the region in which the field computer will be operating. This is necessary to ensure
that the receiver utilizes corrections appropriate for the area in which the receiver is operating. A satellite
selection guide is available at the Raven web site:
www.ravenhelp.com
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
129
7
Select Satellite
Chapter 7
Accuracy Warning
Touch the Accuracy Warning button along the right side of the screen and use the on-screen keypad to set the
allowable horizontal accuracy, in inches [centimeters], which will be allowed before the field computer will
provide a GPS accuracy warning or the GPS status shield will turn yellow during operations.
Note:
Higher values will allow the receiver to converge faster, but will allow more horizontal position
error. Smaller values will provide more accurate position, but will take longer to converge and are
more likely to lose a converged status during field operations.
Slingshot® GS
If the Slingshot GS correction service is selected for differential corrections through the Slingshot wireless
network, the Differential screen will display the following options.
Accuracy Warning. The accuracy warning value sets the allowable horizontal accuracy for field operation.
When the field computer determines the position solution meets the set value, the solution will be
considered converged and the appropriate status will be displayed.
Note:
Higher values will allow the receiver to converge faster, but will allow more horizontal position
error. Smaller values will provide more accurate position, but will take longer to converge and are
more likely to lose a converged status during field operations.
Baud Rate. Select the baud rate at which the correction messages are transmitted from the correction source.
The default baud rate setting is 115200.
130
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Tools Menu
Default Differential
7
The Default Differential screen replaces the Differential
screen if:
• any non-Raven external GPS receiver connected to
the field computer for position corrections.
• the field computer is not able to determine the type of
differential corrections provided for position
corrections.
• GPS messages are passed through a Raven TM-1
Tilt Module or SmarTrax steering system.
In any of the conditions outlined above, the Default
Differential screen allows the operator to manually set
the type of corrections being used for position
information and corrections.
Selecting the appropriate source of differential corrections allows the Envizio Pro to display the GPS Status
Icon as outlined in the GPS Status section on page 52. The Default Differential selection also allows the field
computer to identify and display potential GPS error conditions during field operations.
Important: Potential error conditions must be verified and addressed on the external receiver or the source setting
must be set to Internal to access the internal GPS receiver settings.
Output
Important: If a SmarTrax assisted steering system is connected to the Envizio Pro field computer, set the correction
source to internal before making changes to the Envizio Pro internal receiver.
To setup the type, frequency, and baud rate of message outputs from the built-in receiver, touch the Output
icon.
Radar Output
Information Screen
Note:
The GPS Output screen is only available when using the internal GPS receiver. Message outputs
from an external GPS receiver must be setup through the external hardware.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
131
Chapter 7
Message Types and Frequency
Use the sliding bar next to the desired message type to set the frequency of the output message. Messages
may be sent out at 0.2, 1, 5 or 10 Hz, depending upon the message. Set the slider to 0 Hz to turn the message
off.
Messages sent out of the built-in receiver are sent out of the connector labeled ‘GPS Out’ on the auxiliary
interface cable or chassis interface cable. Contact a local Raven dealer for more information.
Baud
Select the Baud Rate of the message strings sent from the built-in receiver.
Note:
Some GPS or Assisted Steering components may require specific Baud Rate settings.
Simulated Radar Output
Touch the ‘Next’ icon displayed on the GPS Output screen to view the simulated radar output from the field
computer. These settings may be used to help set up an external device to receive GPS speed signal output
from the internal GPS receiver.
External Light Bar, TM-1 Tilt Module and SmarTrax™
If an optional SmarTrax system, external light bar or TM-1 Tilt Module is connected to the field computer, the
GPS Output Baud setting must be set to 19,200 before changing the Source selection. For more information
on the GPS Source settings, see the Source section on page 133.
132
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Tools Menu
Important: If a SmarTrax assisted steering system is connected to the Envizio Pro field computer, set the correction
source to internal before making changes to the Envizio Pro internal receiver.
The GPS Source screen allows the operator to select
between the internal GPS receiver or an optional
external receiver such as a Raven Phoenix 200/300.
Note:The GPS Source screen is only available on
field computers with the internal DGPS receiver.
The GPS Source screen also displays an option to
automatically setup the output messages from the
built-in receiver to route through an optional TM-1 Tilt
Module or SmarTrax system.
Internal GPS Receiver
To use the internal receiver, select the ‘Internal GPS
Receiver’ option. Verify settings on the GPS Output
screen to ensure that any required messages are properly configured.
Via TM-1 or SmarTrax™
Important: If a SmarTrax assisted steering system is connected to the Envizio Pro field computer, set the correction
source to internal before making changes to the Envizio Pro internal receiver.
To output DGPS signal from the built-in receiver to an optional TM-1 Tilt Sensor or SmarTrax controller, select
the Internal GPS Receiver (Via Tilt or SmarTrax) option.
Note:
The GPS Output Baud must be set to 19,200 before selecting the Via TM-1 or SmarTrax option
(see the External Light Bar, TM-1 Tilt Module and SmarTrax™ section on page 132). Do not select
the this option if the optional hardware components are not connected. The field computer may
take several minutes to properly setup these components or may lock up if the
TM-1 or SmarTrax controller are not connected.
This option requires additional cables to route DGPS signal from the internal receiver out to the
TM-1 or SmarTrax controller and then back into the field computer. Review the installation sections
for these optional system components or contact a local Raven dealer for more information.
External GPS Receiver
If an optional external GPS receiver is connected to the field computer via the connector labeled ‘DGPS’ on the
main interface cable (P/N 115-0171-746) or chassis interface cable (P/N 115-0172-001) select the External
Receiver option. Selecting this option overrides the internal DGPS receiver.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
133
7
Source
Chapter 7
Tilt Sensor
If the TM-1 Tilt Sensor is connected directly to the DGPS connector on the main interface cable (P/N 115-0171746) or chassis interface cable (P/N 115-0172-001), the Envizio Pro may be used to configure the TM-1. Touch
the Tilt icon to access the Tilt Configuration screen.
Note:
When routing tilt corrected signal through a SmarTrax controller and back into the field computer,
the TM-1 must be calibrated through the SmarTrax controller rather than the Envizio Pro. See the
SmarTrax Quick Start Guide or Operator’s Manual for more information.
Information
Touch the blue Information icon to display a brief explanation of the settings and options available on the Tilt
Configuration screen.
Note:
Refer to the TM-1 Tilt Module Installation and Operation Manual for detailed installation and
calibration information.
Drift Shift
The drift shift feature allows the operator to manually adjust, or nudge, the reported GPS position of all features
(e.g. boundaries, coverage and zone maps, field markers, and guidance lines, etc.) within the job
simultaneously. This feature allows the operator to manually correct for GPS drift over the course of a field
operation or to “recalibrate” the position of field features if the job is resumed at a later date or time.
Note:
It is necessary to stop the vehicle while nudging job features. When enabled, the drift shift feature
will automatically pan and zoom onto the current vehicle location to allow the operator to adjust the
position of job features based upon the current vehicle location.
Drift Shift Enable. Touch this option to toggle the drift shift feature on or off. Ensure this option is selected to
allow the drift shift features to be used during field operations.
Set Drift Correction Now. With the vehicle positioned at the actual reference point, touch the “Set Now”
button to shift the displayed reference point and all field features according to the current vehicle position.
Set Reference Point Here. Touch the “Set Here” button to reset the reference point to the current vehicle
location. The previous reference position will be lost.
Shift Increment 1 and 2. Enter increments for manually adjusting field features with drift shift. These values
allow a coarse and fine adjustment to allow the operator to shift the coverage map as necessary during the
field operation.
Reset Shift Increments. Reset the default 6 in [15 cm] and 36 in [91 cm] drift shift values for increments 1 and
2.
134
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Tools Menu
The Computer menu contains settings and preferences for the Envizio Pro field computer and display. Settings
such as the display mode, brightness, language, light bar and display units are modified through the Computer
menu. Features available with a USB flash drive, such as software updates and file maintenance are also
accessed via the Computer menu.
Display
The Display settings screen allows the user to change settings for the field computer screen display and the
on-screen light bar.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
135
7
Computer Menu
Chapter 7
Display Mode
Select Day or Night to adjust the guidance screen for day or night operations.
Day Mode
Night Mode
Screen Brightness
The Screen slider adjusts the brightness of the field computer display.
On-Screen Light Bar
Offset Scale Sensitivity. The light bar sensitivity can be adjusted to match the type of application with which
the field computer will provide guidance. Select between the coarse, normal, and fine adjustments. The
example light bar displays the units and measurements used for each setting.
External Light Bar
The brightness of an external light bar, controlled by the field computer, may be adjusted using the External
Light Bar slider on the Display screen.
Note:
136
The External Light Bar adjustment will only display if the field computer is configured to control an
external light bar. See the Serial Port Configuration section on page 98 to setup the external light
bar interface.
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Tools Menu
Region
7
Select the Region icon to modify display settings for
the region in which the field computer will be used. The
Region screen displays settings for the following:
• Language
• Display Units
• Pressure Units
Language
The available languages are displayed in the scroll list.
Select the desired language displayed on the field
computer from the list.
Unit System
Select the desired system (English or Metric) used with the control system.
Unit System
Metric
English
Turf Units
Units
centimeters (cm), liters (L), hectares (ha),
kilometers per hour (km/h)
inches (in), gallons (gal), acres (ac), miles
per hour (mph)
inches (in), gallons per 1000 square feet
(gal/1000 ft2), miles per hour (mph)
All measurements will be displayed by the field computer in the selected system. All user inputs must be
entered using the selected system.
AutoBoom® Pressure
The units used to display pressure of an optional AutoBoom system are also selected on this screen. Select
between pounds per square inch (PSI) or kilo pascals (kPa).
Time Zone Settings
Touch the Time Zone icon in the upper right corner to view and modify time zone settings. The default
selections will allow the field computer to automatically configure the time zone and daylight savings for the
region. To manually change the time zone, select the ‘Manual Time Zone’ option and enter the UTC
(Coordinated Universal Time) offset hours for the local time zone.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
137
Chapter 7
Updates
Access the Updates screen to update the field computer software or to register a special feature, such as VRA
or planter population control. The Updates screen also provides access to the demonstration, or demo, mode.
Software Updates
Software updates for the field computer will be available periodically from the Raven web site:
www.ravenhelp.com
Refer to the Updates section on page 160 for detailed instructions on downloading and applying software
updates to the Raven Envizio Pro field computer.
Special Features Registration
The Updates screen also offers the ability to activate
special features using activation keys for the field
computer as well as some Raven control nodes. While on
the Updates screen, touch the ‘Special Features
Registration’ button to begin activation of available
features.
Note:
Contact a local Raven dealer for a complete
list of features or activation codes. Consoles
with software version 3.0 or higher will
require an activation key to allow operation.
If ‘CE 6.0’ is not listed in the enabled features
list, contact a local Raven dealer or the
Raven Technical Support Center for
assistance.
The Raven dealer will require the Machine ID and Validation Code information displayed at the bottom of the
Special Features Registration screen to generate the authorization code.
To Activate a Special Feature.
1.
Obtain a registration code from a local Raven dealer.
2.
Visit the Raven web site below and fill out the Activation Key Request form with the registration code
received from the Raven dealer.
www.ravenhelp.com
3.
Submit the request form to receive the activation key used to unlock the special feature on the Envizio Pro
field computer.
Note:
Refer to the To Authorize Raven Control Node Features section on page 139 or the To Authorize
Internal DGPS Receiver Features section on page 139 for special instructions on entering
activation codes for these components.
4.
On the Envizio Pro, touch the Tools Menu icon on the Home screen.
5.
Select the Updates icon from the Computer menu.
6.
Touch the Special Features Registration button to access the Special Registration Features screen.
7.
Touch the Enter Activation Key button and use the on-screen keyboard to enter the activation key received
from the Raven web site.
138
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Tools Menu
8.
Touch the Accept icon in the lower, right corner of the on-screen keyboard to confirm the activation key.
9.
Touch the ‘Next’ icon on the right side of the screen to activate the special feature.
7
If the key has been entered correctly, the activated feature will be displayed on-screen.
If the activation key does not activate the feature, verify that the key has been entered correctly.
To Authorize Raven Control Node Features.
Note:
A Raven node with optional features must be connected to the field computer to enable additional
features.
1.
Obtain an registration code from a local Raven dealer.
2.
Visit the Raven web site below and fill out the Activation Key Request form with the registration code
received from the Raven dealer.
3.
Submit the request form to receive the activation key used to unlock the special feature on the Envizio Pro
field computer.
4.
On the Envizio Pro, touch the Tools Menu icon on the Home screen.
5.
Select the Updates icon from the Computer menu.
6.
Touch the Special Features Registration button to access the Special Registration Features screen.
7.
Touch the Enter Activation Key button and use the on-screen keyboard to enter the activation key from the
Raven web site.
8.
Touch the Accept icon in the lower, right corner of the on-screen keyboard to confirm the authorization
code. If the key has been entered correctly, the field computer will display a prompt confirming the code has
been accepted. The node activation key will not be displayed on the Special Features Registration screen.
Check the CAN Diagnostics screen or test the control system to verify that the special feature(s) purchased
are accessible.
www.ravenhelp.com
To Authorize Internal DGPS Receiver Features.
1.
From the Envizio Pro II home screen, touch the Tools Menu (blue) button and select the Source icon from
the GPS menu.
2.
On the GPS Source screen, write down the current source setting before selecting the Internal GPS
Receiver option.
3.
Touch the Accept icon to return to the main Tools Menu display.
4.
Select the Output icon from the GPS menu.
5.
On the GPS Output screen, write down the current NMEA message rates before setting all NMEA
messages to zero.
6.
Touch the Accept icon to return to the main Tools Menu display.
7.
Select the Updates icon from the Computer menu.
8.
Touch the Special Features Registration button to access the Special Registration Features screen.
9.
Touch the Enter Activation Key button and use the on-screen keyboard to enter the activation key from the
Raven web site.
10.
Touch the Accept icon in the lower, right corner of the on-screen keyboard to confirm the authorization
code.
11.
Touch the Next icon. If the key has been entered correctly, the field computer will display a prompt
confirming the code has been accepted. Verify that the feature is available in the differential screens. New
GPS correction features may take a couple minutes to display properly. If the feature is still not available
after 5 minutes, restart the field computer and reattempt to access the new feature. Contact a local Raven
dealer if additional assistance is still required.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
139
Chapter 7
Demo Mode
Touch the Demo icon in the upper-right corner of the Updates screen to toggle the demonstration mode. This
mode enables a GPS simulation. The field computer will create a coverage map based on the simulated GPS
position.
To start the demonstration mode:
Touch the Start Demo icon to toggle the demo mode on. The field computer must be restarted
before the demonstration mode will be activated.
Shutdown and power off the console. Wait a few seconds and turn the console power back on.
To end demo mode, return to the Updates screen and select the Stop Demo icon to toggle demo
mode off.
Be sure to restart the field computer to restore the Envizio Pro to normal operation.
File Maintenance
To transfer files to or from the field computer, select the File Maintenance icon in the Computer menu. The
following File Maintenance may be conducted directly from the field computer:
•
•
•
•
Setup required file structure for use with the field computer on the USB drive
Copy files to USB drive
Copy files from USB drive
Delete files from internal memory
Raven recommends performing File Maintenance at least once a week and storing or backing up these files on
a home or office PC. See Chapter 8, Software Updates and File Maintenance for details on using the File
Maintenance feature.
Note:
Depending upon the size of the completed job(s), file maintenance may take several minutes to
complete.
When interfacing with a planter control or yield monitor system, a typical job of 200 acres should
take less than 5 minutes. Larger fields and coverage maps with several sections (e.g. MultiRow or
Individual Row Control) could take significantly longer. Check the File Maintenance screen
available memory display periodically and perform file maintenance as necessary. Refer to
Chapter 8, Software Updates and File Maintenance, for more information.
Wireless File Transfer
If a Slingshot® Field Hub is connected to the field computer, job files may be transferred to a home or office
computer automatically at the end of each job. Refer to Appendix C, Wireless Communications & Remote
Service, for more information on setting up and using Slingshot and the wireless file manager to manage job
file transfers.
Web
If the required components are connected to the ethernet port on the back of the field computer, pressing the
Web button will allow the operator to access the world wide web via the field computer touch screen. Refer to
the Field Hub Quick Start Guide for set up and wireless navigation instructions.
140
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Tools Menu
Use the Vehicle menu to configure the field computer for the machine or implement configuration. The field
computer requires calibration for the GPS antenna location on each vehicle as well as the swath width
(guidance width) and the section configuration for the machine or implement. Once configured, vehicle profiles
can be saved for later use, transferred to a USB drive, or loaded onto another Envizio Pro field computer.
Low Speed Mode
A filter is normally applied to the course over ground or heading information displayed by the Envizio Pro at
speeds under 1.5 mph [2.4 km/h]. The low speed mode reduces the minimum speed to 0.7 mph [1.1 km/h] for
operations and equipment that require normal operation speeds near this range. It is recommended to disable
the low speed mode if the normal operation speeds for field operations will be above 1.5 mph [2.4 km/h]
consistently.
Guidance Width
Use the on-screen keypad to enter the guidance width
in inches [centimeters] for the boom, implement, or
header.
The guidance width should be entered as the width of
the boom, implement or header which actually
completes an operation while the vehicle drives a
swath. A few examples of the guidance widths for
various implements would include the following:
• Enter the guidance width for a sprayer boom as the
number of spray tips multiplied by the tip spacing.
The entered guidance width should not include
fence row nozzles or foam markers.
• The guidance width of a combine header should be
the cutting surface, not the overall header width.
• The guidance width for row crop planters is equal to the row spacing multiplied by the number of row units.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
141
7
Vehicle Menu
Chapter 7
Offsets and Implement Type Selection
To properly display the vehicle location within a field and create accurate coverage information, the field
computer must be calibrated for the location of the center of the boom or implement and the relative location of
the GPS antenna. This information is used by the field computer to provide accurate swath guidance and to
create coverage maps based on the location of the implement.
Select one of the following implement types with which the field computer will interface during field operations:
Important: It is highly recommended to create and save profiles for each specific vehicle, tractor and implement
configuration on which the field computer will be used for field operations.
Important: Anytime the implement configuration or the antenna location is changed, be sure to verify that the section
and implement offsets are set up correctly.
Self Propelled or Mounted Implement. This option is best suited for fixed implements such as self-propelled
sprayer, a harvester or combine, or an implement mounted to a tractor 3-point hitch. See the Self Propelled or
Mounted Implement section on page 142 for details on configuring implements using this implement type.
Trailed Implement. Select this option to configure implements such as anhydrous tool bars, pull-type
sprayers, planters, or air seeders with the air cart towed behind the seed drill. Refer to the Trailed Implement
Tractor Setup section on page 144 to begin configuring the trailed implement.
Trailed Implement with Tow Between. This option has been designed for seeder implement configurations
with the air cart towed between the tractor and seed drill. Refer to the Trailed Implement Tractor Setup section
on page 144 to begin configuring the trailed implement.
Self Propelled or Mounted Implement
If the Self Propelled or Mounted Implement option is
selected on the Implement Type selection screen, touch
the Next
icon to display the Raven Offsets Setup
screen. The antenna position settings shown on this
screen are used to calibrate the field computer for the
relative location of the center of the boom or implement
with respect to the DGPS antenna.
Note:
142
Be sure to enter positive values for each
offset setting. All negative values entered will
be reset to zero.
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Tools Menu
Fore or Aft Offset. The fore/aft offset is the distance of the boom or implement in front or behind the GPS
antenna.The fore/aft offset must be measured perpendicular to the boom or implement width. See Figure 1
below.
FIGURE 1.
Example of the Fore/Aft Measurement
DGPS Antenna
Center of Boom/
Implement
Fore/Aft
Measurement
To set the fore/aft value:
1.
Touch the current fore/aft value displayed on the Raven Offsets Setup screen.
2.
Use the keypad to enter the measured fore/aft value in inches [centimeters].If the boom or implement is in
front of the GPS antenna, select the ‘Implement in Front’ option.
Left or Right Offset. The left/right offset is the distance from the GPS antenna to the center line of the boom
or implement.
Note:
FIGURE 2.
The left/right offset must be measured parallel to the boom or implement width. See Figure 2
below.
Example of Left/Right Measurement
DGPS Antenna
Left/Right
Measurement
Center of Boom/
Implement
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
143
7
The Raven Offsets Setup screen displays the currently calibrated values for the following antenna offsets:
Chapter 7
To set the left/right value:
1.
Touch the current left/right value displayed on the Raven Offsets Setup screen.Use the keypad to enter the
measured left/right value in inches [centimeters]. If the center line of the boom or implement is to the left of
the GPS antenna, select the ‘Left of Center’ option.
Antenna Height. The height value is the measurement from the ground to the bottom of the GPS antenna.
Note:
This value is only required if a tilt corrected DGPS signal is sent to the field computer.
To set the Height value:
1.
Touch the current height value displayed on the Raven Offsets Setup screen.
2.
Use the keypad to enter the measured height of the antenna in inches [centimeters].
Trailed Implement Tractor Setup
Tractor Type
Selector
Antenna
Position Offsets
If either of the trailed implement options are selected on
the Implement Type screen, touch the Next
icon to
display the Tractor Offset Setup screen. The antenna
position settings are used to calibrate the field computer
for the relative location of the tractor pivot point with
respect to the GPS antenna position.
Important: The pivot point for a conventional tractor is the
center of the rear axle. The pivot point for a
tracked tractor is the center of the track length
between the tracks. The pivot point for an
articulated tractor is the point of articulation.
1.
Touch the drop down selection in the upper, left corner
of the screen and select the tractor type which will be
used with the control system.
2.
Review the following definitions of the offsets necessary to complete the tractor setup process. These
values are critical for performance of the field computer and product or implement control system. Measure
carefully and enter the offset values as accurately as possible to help ensure the best results.
Fore/Aft Offset. The fore/aft offset is the distance of the GPS antenna in front or behind the pivot point. The
fore/aft offset must be measured parallel to the direction of travel.
Note:
If the GPS antenna is in front of the pivot point, select the ‘Antenna in Front’ option at the bottom of
the screen. See Figure 1 on page 143.
Left/Right Offset. The left/right offset is the distance of the GPS antenna to the left or right of the pivot point.
The left/right offset must be measured perpendicular to the direction of travel.
Note:
If the GPS antenna is to the right of the pivot point, select the ‘Right of Center’ option at the bottom
of the screen. See Figure 2 on page 143.
Antenna Height. The antenna height value is the measurement from the ground to the bottom of the GPS
antenna.
Pivot to Hitch. The pivot to hitch value is the distance from the pivot point to the vehicle hitch. This value must
be measured parallel to the direction of travel.
Important: The field computer assumes that the vehicle hitch is located directly behind the vehicle pivot point.
144
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Tools Menu
Pivot to Front Axle. (Articulated Vehicles Only) The pivot to front axle value is the distance from the pivot
point to the front axle. This value must be measured parallel to the direction of travel.
3.
To enter or edit the antenna offset values on the Tractor Offset Setup screen:
a.
Touch the desired offset or value to edit.
b.
Use the on-screen keypad to enter the measured offset value in inches [centimeters].
Note:
4.
The field computer will not recognize a negative value for any of the offset values. Be sure to enter
sure to enter positive values for each offset. All negative values entered will be reset to ‘0.’
Touch the Next
icon to proceed with the trailed implement configuration.
To configure standard pull-type implements (e.g. towed sprayers, anhydrous tool bars, planters, etc.), refer
to the Trailed Implement Setup section on page 145. Refer to the Trailed Implement with Tow Between
Setup section on page 146 to set up an implement like an air seeder where the air cart is towed between
the tractor and seed drill.
Note:
Use the standard trailed implement type to configure an air seeder system where the air cart is
towed behind the seed drill. Use the Previous
icon to return to the Implement Type screen if
necessary.
Trailed Implement Setup
Note:
The following instructions apply to a
implement pulled directly behind a tractor
such as a pull-type sprayer, anhydrous tool
bar or planter. Refer to the Trailed Implement
with Tow Between Setup section on
page 146 to configure an implement such as
an air seeder with the air cart towed between
the seed drill and the tractor.
1.
If the standard Trailed Implement option is selected as
the implement type, the Offsets will display after the
Tractor Offsets Setup screen.
2.
Review the following definitions of the offsets for the
trailed implement setup. These values are critical for performance of the field computer and product or
implement control system. Measure carefully and enter the offset values as accurately as possible to help
ensure the best results.
Pivot to Hitch. The pivot to hitch value is the distance from the hitch point to the implement pivot point. The
pivot point on an implement is usually either the center of the wheel base which the implement turns around
or the point where the implement makes contact with the ground during field operations. This value must be
measured parallel to the direction of travel.
Product Fore/Aft. Enter the distance between the implement pivot point and the product sections on the
implement. The product sections are the point which completes the desired task during field operations
such as the center of the boom on a pull-type sprayer, seed tubes on a planter, knives on an anhydrous tool
bar, or the center of the working width of a disc. This value must be measured parallel to the direction of
travel.
Important: If an implement configuration or modification changes the product fore/aft setting, verify that the section
configuration will need to be reconfigured. Refer to the Sections section on page 147 for information on
setting up the sections and section offsets.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
145
7
Pivot to Rear Axle. (Articulated Vehicles Only) The pivot to rear axle value is the distance from the pivot point
to the center of the rear axle. This value must be measured parallel to the direction of travel.
Chapter 7
Product in Front Option. Select the option at the bottom of the screen if the product sections are in front of
the implement pivot point.
3.
To enter or edit the implement offset values on the Offset screen:
a.
Touch the desired offset or value to edit.
b.
Use the on-screen keypad to enter the measured offset value in inches [centimeters].
Note:
4.
The field computer will not recognize a negative value for any of the offset values. Be sure to enter
sure to enter positive values for each offset. All negative values entered will be reset to ‘0.’
Touch the Next
icon to complete the trailed implement configuration.
Trailed Implement with Tow Between Setup
Note:
The following instructions apply to
implement configurations such as air
seeders with the air cart towed in between
the seed drill and the tractor. Refer to the
Trailed Implement Setup section on
page 145 to configure an implement pulled
directly behind the tractor such as a pull-type
sprayer, anhydrous tool bar, or planter.
1.
If the Tow Between option is selected as the
implement type, the Cart Dimensions screen will
display after the Tractor Offsets Setup screen.
2.
Review the following definitions of the offsets for the
trailed implement setup. These values are critical for
performance of the field computer and product or implement control system. Measure carefully and enter
the offset values as accurately as possible to help ensure the best results.
Hitch to Axle. The first value on the Cart Dimensions screen should be measured from the tractor hitch pin to
the air cart pivot point, usually the center of the air cart axle.
Note:
If used with a four wheel air cart, the hitch to axle measurement may need to be adjusted to
provide accurate trailed implement mapping.
Measure the value parallel to the direction of travel.
Axle to Hitch. The second value on the Cart Dimensions screen is the measurement from the pivot point to
the hitch at the back of the air cart. When the two measurements on the Cart Dimensions screen are added
together, the value should equal the overall length of the air cart from the tractor hitch pin to the rear hitch.
Measure the value parallel to the direction of travel.
3.
To enter or edit the implement offset values on the Cart Dimensions screen:
a.
Touch the desired offset or value to edit.
b.
Use the on-screen keypad to enter the measured offset value in inches [centimeters].
Note:
146
The field computer will not recognize a negative value for any of the offset values. Be sure to enter
sure to enter positive values for each offset. All negative values entered will be reset to ‘0.’
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Tools Menu
Touch the Next
Setup screen.
icon to proceed to the Drill
5.
The final value required for the tow between
implement type is the distance between the drill
hitch pin to the pivot point of the seed drill.
Generally, the pivot point for a seed drill is the center
of the rear frame axle.
6.
Touch the Next
icon to complete the trailed
implement with tow between cart configuration.
7
4.
Sections
Touch the Sections icon to display the Section Configuration screen.
The Section Configuration screen shows an overview of the current section configuration including section
widths, left or right offsets and fore or aft offsets. This screen is used only to review the current section
configuration.
Note:
The reference point for measuring the section left/right and fore/aft offsets depends upon the
implement type selected prior to configuring the section configuration.
• Self-propelled or mounted Implement - The reference point is the antenna position. Offsets
must be measured from the antenna to the midpoint of each section.
• Trailed Implement - The reference point is the implement pivot point, usually the center of the
implement wheel base. Offsets must be measured from the implement pivot point to the
midpoint of each section.
• Trailed Implement with Tow Between - The reference point is the rear hitch of the tow
between implement. Offsets must be measured from the rear hitch to the midpoint of each
section.
Review the Offsets and Implement Type Selection section on page 142 for details on measuring
section offsets.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
147
Chapter 7
Section Setup
1.
On the Section Configuration screen, touch the Next
icon to begin configuring sections.
The Number of Sections screen is displayed.
2.
Use the Up and Down arrow buttons to setup the number of sections for the vehicle or implement. Touch
the Next
Note:
148
icon to proceed to the Section Width screen.
To utilize AccuBoom, automatic boom section control, plumbing on the vehicle or implement must
allow for individual section control. If the equipment is not capable of controlling individual
sections, set the number of sections to 1 and enter the overall boom or implement width on the
Section Width screen.
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Tools Menu
Configure the width of each section starting with the far left section. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the
section width.
7
3.
Touch the Next
icon to accept the entered value and advance to the next section to the right. To skip a
section, enter a value of zero as the section width.
4.
Repeat step 3 until widths have been entered for all sections. Touch the Next
Width screen to advance to the Configure Sections screen.
icon on the last Section
This screen allows the operator to configure the section labels, set the switch assignments for each section,
and to configure the location for each section on the machine or implement.
5.
Touch the Configure Section Labels button to edit the section labels displayed on the field computer if
desired.
6.
Select the Section Mapping button to reconfigure sections to section switches for customized switch box
functionality during field operations.
7.
The Manual and Auto Configure buttons on the Configure Sections screen allow the operator to select the
preferred method for configuring boom or implement sections.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
149
Chapter 7
Configuring Section Labels
To customize the section labels displayed on the field computer, touch the ‘Configure Section Labels’ button.
The Section Labeling screen will display.
The currently configured section labels are displayed in boxes along the top of the screen. To begin configuring
section labels:
1.
Touch the box of the first section to relabel. A red box will appear around the selected section.
2.
Use the displayed keypad to enter the new section label. The asterisk (*) label can be used for “skipped”
sections or sections with a zero width value.
3.
Repeat step 1 and step 2 until all sections have been configured with the desired label.
4.
Touch the Accept
to return to the Configure Sections screen.
Section Mapping
The Envizio Pro field computer allows the operator to customize the section to switch mapping to the operator
to quickly control multiple sections using a single switch. This feature also allows the operator to use a
standard 10 section switch box to control an implement with more than 10 sections.
Note:
Version 1.30 is required on the Raven CAN switch box to manually map sections.
Verify section mapping is configured correctly before starting a job.
Automatically Configure Sections
If sections of the boom or implement are aligned end-to-end along the swath midpoint, select ‘Auto Configure.’
The field computer will automatically configure section locations.
After the field computer has configured sections, section locations can be modified by touching the Manually
Configure button.
150
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Tools Menu
If the boom or implement is not aligned end-to-end on the swath midpoint, the boom or implement sections will
need to be manually configured.
1.
Select Manually Configure to begin locating boom or implement sections. The Section Location screen will
be displayed. The currently entered offsets for the first section (if any) are displayed in the Left/Right and
Fore/Aft buttons.
Note:
The reference point for measuring the section left/right and fore/aft offsets depends upon the
implement type selected prior to configuring the section configuration.
• Self-propelled or mounted Implement - The reference point is the antenna position. Offsets
must be measured from the antenna to the midpoint of each section.
• Trailed Implement - The reference point is the implement pivot point, usually the center of the
implement wheel base. Offsets must be measured from the implement pivot point to the
midpoint of each section.
• Trailed Implement with Tow Between - The reference point is the rear hitch of the tow
between implement. Offsets must be measured from the rear hitch to the midpoint of each
section.
Review the Offsets and Implement Type Selection section on page 142 for details on measuring
section offsets.
2.
Touch the left/right button to enter a left or right offset for the first section. Enter a negative value if the
center of the section is located to the left of the of the DGPS antenna.
3.
Touch the fore/aft button to enter a fore or aft offset for the first section. Enter a negative value if the center
of the section is located behind the DGPS antenna.
4.
Touch the Next
icon and repeat steps 2 and 3 to continue programming individual section locations.
When finished, touch the Next icon to return to the Configure Sections screen.
5.
Touch the Accept
icon to return to the Section Configuration screen.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
151
7
Manually Configure Sections
Chapter 7
Profiles
Select the Profiles icon within the Vehicle submenu to select a previously created profile, or to save the current
settings as a new profile.
Profiles save the following settings:
• GPS Antenna Height and Offsets
• Swath Width
• Section Widths and Configuration
Show All
The Show All icon in the upper, right corner of the screen displays the Tools Menu overview screen. Touch this
icon to display the System, Vehicle, Computer, and GPS menus and the individual pages accessible in each
menu on one screen. Touch the Show All icon to display the Tools Menu overview.
152
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
CHAPTER
8
Software Updates and
File Maintenance
Chapter8
Overview
The Envizio Pro File Maintenance feature allows the operator to manage job related files right in the cab.
Raven recommends performing File Maintenance at least once a week and storing job related files on a home
or office PC. Printable job reports may be created from files stored on a home or office PC.
Note:
The File Maintenance feature requires a specific file structure on the USB drive which the field
computer uses to automatically transfer job files. The field computer will not be able to locate files
if the file structure is modified. Make sure to save the files to the correct folder on the USB drive
before attempting to load files back onto the Envizio Pro field computer.
Depending upon the size of the completed job(s), file maintenance may take several minutes to
complete. A typical job of 200 acres should take approximately 5 minutes. Larger fields and
coverage maps with multiple sections or rate change zones could take significantly longer. Check
the File Maintenance screen available memory display periodically and perform file maintenance
as necessary.
Job related information transferred to a USB drive or stored on a PC may also be transferred back to the field
computer as necessary for new job applications.
This chapter also contains detailed instructions for downloading and applying software updates for the Envizio
Pro field computers.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
153
Chapter 8
File Maintenance
Coverage maps and field boundaries, saved A-B Lines, as well as zone maps can be transferred to a USB
drive or deleted from memory using the File Maintenance feature.
File Outputs
When performing file maintenance, the field computer transfers job and file information in the following formats:
• Job data package, or .jdp files, for use with the Slingshot web service.
• Bitmap, or .bmp files, can be opened on nearly any computer operating system without special software.
• The shapefile format requires specialized software to view the shapefiles on a home or office PC.
Shapefiles consist of four separate files, each with the same file name. A file with the .shp, .shx, .prj, and
.dbf file extensions are all essential for the shapefile format to function correctly.
To save memory on the field computer, the Envizio Pro only generates (if selected) the printable bitmap and
shapefile reports when file maintenance is performed. For this reason, actual memory requirements for the
USB drive will be greater than the disk space used on the field computer internal memory.
Available memory resources of the field computer and the connected USB drive are displayed at the bottom of
the File Maintenance screen. It is recommended to use a USB flash drive with at least 512 MB.
154
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Software Updates and File Maintenance
Performing File Maintenance
Open the Tools menu and select the File Maintenance icon in the Computer Menu.
2.
If the connected drive has not previously been used to transfer job files from the Envizio Pro, touch the icon
along the right side of the screen to setup the required file structure.
8
1.
For more information regarding the file structure on the USB drive, refer to the File Structure section on
page 158.
3.
Select the type of file on which the file maintenance operation will be performed.
4.
Press the Configure File Output
5.
Check the configuration setup.
icon.
• Report: A report file includes rate, area covered, and other basic operation information.
• Shapefile: records the geographic features (field boundaries, spray zones, etc).
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
155
Chapter 8
• Slingshot: Selecting Slingshot creates a JDP report that will be uploaded to the Slingshot report
website.
File Types
Transfer from
Field Computer
Transfer to
Field Computer
6.
To begin working with the selected file type, touch the transfer to or transfer from field computer icon below
the list of file types. For example, if the operator selects “Job Files” and the “from Field Computer,” the Job
Files screen will display similar to the following:
Scroll List of
Available Files
File
Maintenance
Actions
7.
Use the following icons to perform the desired file maintenance actions:
156
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Software Updates and File Maintenance
Transfer From Field Computer
Configuration settings allows the user to select the file types that are exported from the field
computer to the USB drive.
Select left icon to transfer a selected file to the connected USB flash drive or the right
icon to transfer all files of the selected type currently saved on the field computer.
Note:
8
Select the left icon to export the Slingshot® data package for a selected job file to the
connected USB flash drive or the right icon to export data packages for all job files
currently stored on the field computer
Jobs exported to a USB flash drive using the SlingShot File type may be uploaded to the Slingshot
web site using a home or office computer. Jobs exported using only the slingshot file type are not
transferable to other Envizio Pro field computers.
www.ravenslingshot.com
Select the left icon to delete a selected file from the field computer or the right icon to
delete all files of the selected type currently saved on the field computer.
Note:
The Delete button will not affect any files on the flash drive. To remove files from the flash drive,
use the PC’s file browser (i.e. Windows Explorer) to remove, delete or copy files from the flash
drive.
Touch this icon to manually initiate upload of a selected file currently stored on the field computer
via a Slingshot® Field Hub and available wireless connection.
Note:
Refer to Appendix C, Wireless Communications & Remote Service, for more information on
transferring files using the Slingshot service.
Transfer To Field Computer
Select the left icon to transfer a selected file to the field computer or the right icon to
transfer all files of the selected type currently stored on the USB flash drive.
8.
A confirmation screen will appear. Touch the Accept icon to proceed with the selected action or the Cancel
icon to return to the File Maintenance screen without moving or deleting the selected files.
9.
Once the action has been completed, touch the Accept icon again to return to the previous file type screen.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
157
Chapter 8
File Structure
When the File Structure is properly setup on the USB drive, the following directories
and files are created and can be found on the flash drive when the flash drive is
inserted into a home or office PC. Below is a list of files and folders that the field
computer automatically creates on the USB drive:
ePro Directory
The main directory containing all of the information transferred from the field
computer. The ePro directory keeps all Envizio Pro files separated from other files
which may be stored on the flash drive.
ePro
The ePro sub-folder contains files used by the field computer.
Global Data
Information not specific to individual job files is stored in the Global Data folder.
Profiles. The .pfl files contained within the Profiles folder contain configuration information for each profile. The
field computer creates one .pfl file for each saved profile.
Profile files are used by the field computer OS and are not viewable.
Work Orders
Job information for each job transferred to the USB flash drive is stored in sub-folders contained within the
folder labeled Work Orders.
Field Boundaries Folder. All shapefile boundaries (consisting of .shp, shx, .dbf files) saved to the field
computer for use as boundary shapes will be stored in this folder.
Note:
158
The shapefile format consists of three separate files, each with the same file name. A file with the
.shp, .shx, and a .dbf file extensions are all essential for the shapefile format to function correctly.
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Software Updates and File Maintenance
Guidance Lines Folder. All transferred guidance paths are saved in the Guidance Lines folder. Line or path
files have the .ab file extension. Guidance Line files are used by the field computer OS and are not viewable.
Jobs Folders. Each job transferred to the USB drive is stored in a separate folder within the jobs directory.
Each job folder contains the Coverage, Shapefiles, and Reports sub-folders. A Slingshot folder may also
display in the job folder if a Slingshot job data package is exported to the USB flash drive. To save memory on
the field computer, the Envizio Pro only generates (if selected) the printable bitmap and shapefile reports when
file maintenance is performed.
• The Coverage folder contains product coverage map files that have a .cov, .ini or .jdf extension. The field
• The Shapefiles folder contains reports which the field computer generates during file maintenance. Each
product applied during each job will have four separate files with .shp, .shx., .prj, and .dbf file extensions.
Specialized software may be required to view the shapefile reports and each file is essential for the
shapefile format to function correctly.
• The Reports folder contains bitmap reports which the field computer generates during file maintenance.
Each product applied during each job will have a .bmp file. Bitmap reports are viewable on any computer.
• A Slingshot folder will be created for any job for which a job data package (*.jdp.zip) is exported to the USB
flash drive. The Slingshot folder contains the files required to upload to a Slingshot viewer or user account
to create reports or archive job information. Review the Performing File Maintenance section on page 155
for more information on exporting a job data package to a connected USB flash drive.
Reference (Ref) Maps Folder. Reference maps may be transferred to the field computer for use during
harvest operations using the Raven SmartYield system. Reference maps are generally the coverage or asplanted maps with population, crop variety, or other information that may be used to compare crop inputs with
the harvest yields for the same field.
To transfer a reference map onto the field computer:
1.
A previous planting operation must be completed and completed job data package (.jdp) files transferred to
the Slingshot web site.
Review the Performing File Maintenance section on page 155 for more information on exporting a job data
package to a connected USB flash drive if a Slingshot Field Hub wireless subscription is not available.
2.
Export the shapefiles from the completed job data package and copy these files into the “RefMaps” folder
on the USB flash drive used with the Envizio Pro field computer.
3.
When setting up a new job for the harvesting operation using SmartYield, select the appropriate reference
map. Refer to the SmartYield Installation and Operation Manual for details on setting up a SmartYield job
and loading the reference map files.
Rx Maps Folder. Prescription maps saved on the USB drive are located in the rxMaps folder. Each map must
have the .shp, .shx. and .dbf files associated with the prescription map saved in this folder. Each file must have
the same file name and each file extension is essential for the shapefile format to function correctly.
Special software may be required to view the rxMaps files.
Spray Zones Folder. Any zone maps transferred to the USB drive are stored in the spray zones folder. Files
saved in this folder will have the .zone extension. Each zone map creates one .zone file.
Zone files are used by the field computer OS and are not viewable.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
159
8
computer saves one coverage file for each product and each job. Coverage files are used by the field
computer OS and are not viewable.
Chapter 8
Updates
Software updates for the field computer will be available periodically from the Raven web site:
www.ravenhelp.com
Note:
1.
Screens and prompts may display differently depending upon the version of operating system and
the PC or laptop on which the field computer update is downloaded. For additional assistance,
refer to the user help information for your specific browser or operating system.
Locate the latest Envizio Pro update.
Note:
Verify that the correct product and software version is displayed at the top of the release notes
before proceeding.
2.
Select “View” to review the software release notes for the new software version. The release notes page
may have important information about the software update and how updating the field computer may affect
operation. Please read this page and be sure to follow any special instructions.
3.
Select the “Download” link to begin downloading the software update.
160
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Software Updates and File Maintenance
8
If the following dialog displays, select the ‘Save’ option to save the files to a home or office computer.
Download the update file to the desktop. The software must be “extracted” to the USB flash drive before
loading onto the Envizio Pro field computer.
4.
Insert the USB flash drive used with the field computer into an available USB port.
5.
Double click on the .exe file and, if prompted, select “Run” to display self-extractor prompt.
6.
Select the “Browse...” button and then locate the flash drive in the Browse For Folder prompt.
7.
Select the primary directory, or “root,” disk to extract the software update file.
To successfully update the Envizio Pro, the update files cannot be placed in any sub-folders or directories.
The “Unzip to folder” field in the self-extractor prompt should display similar to the example above where
“F:\” may be replaced by the drive letter assigned to the flash drive connected to your PC.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
161
Chapter 8
Applying Software Updates
Use the following procedure to apply software updates to the field computer.
1.
Before inserting the flash drive into the Envizio Pro, switch the power on and wait for the field computer to
power up.
2.
From the Home screen, select the Tools menu icon and touch the Updates icon located in the Computer
Menu.
3.
Insert the USB flash drive with the extracted software update into and available USB port on the field
computer. A list of the available updates will appear on the screen.
Important:The ‘EnvizioPro_NoCanDemo’ update is for demonstration purposes only. Do not select this option for
normal operation applications.
4.
Select the software update and touch the Next icon to begin updating the field computer.
5.
Once the software update is finished, restart the field computer.
162
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
CHAPTER
9
Using AccuBoom™
Chapter9
Introduction
AccuBoom is an automatic boom or implement section control feature that can be used in conjunction with the
Envizio Pro field computers. The AccuBoom feature allows the field computer to automatically control boom or
implement sections by referencing the as-applied or coverage map for each control channel. When AccuBoom
detects a section entering an area where a product has previously been applied, AccuBoom will automatically
turn that section off. When the section leaves the previously applied area, AccuBoom automatically turns the
section back on.
Note:
Prior to using the AccuBoom feature with the Envizio Pro, the supporting hardware components
must be purchased and installed for the specific machine. Contact a local Raven dealer for more
information.
CAN Switch Box
If a Raven CAN Switch Box, or the Raven Switch Pro™ switch box, is installed with the field computer, the
section switches must be in the ‘Accu’ position to allow AccuBoom control for the assigned sections. If the
section switches are in the ‘On’ or ‘Off’ position, the AccuBoom system will treat the section as manually
overridden and will not automatically turn the section on or off based on previous application areas or field
boundaries.
Note:
The CAN Switch Box must be used as the primary control interface for section, master or product
control status. Refer to the Switch Pro Installation and Reference Guide for additional assistance
with using the Switch Pro with the control system.
Make sure to toggle the master switch to the off position when closing or exiting a job to avoid
unintentional product application once the field computer or control console closes application
management functions. It is also good practice to shut off product and section switches when the
application system is not being used.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
163
Chapter 9
AccuBoom™ Setup
Prior to using the AccuBoom feature of the field computer, the AccuBoom node must be programmed for each
product. To configure the AccuBoom feature from the Home screen:
1.
Touch the Tools Menu icon.
2.
Select the Product Control icon from the System menu.
3.
Touch the AccuBoom button to display the AccuBoom Configuration screen.
Note:
If the Function Disabled screen appears when the AccuBoom icon is selected, troubleshoot the
AccuBoom node. See the CAN Troubleshooting section in Chapter 4, CAN Networking and
Diagnostics or Chapter 11, Troubleshooting, for help troubleshooting the AccuBoom node.
The following options are available on the AccuBoom Configuration screen for each available control channel
on the CANbus system. Touch the cycle product icon in the upper, right corner of the screen to cycle to the next
available control channel and configure the AccuBoom control feature for the next product controlled with the
field computer.
On Override
Touch the On-Override button and use the up or down arrows to increase or decrease the override time for the
AccuBoom feature.
Note:
The Override Sec value is not used if a SwitchPro or CAN switch box is installed on the CANbus.
The On Override feature is useful when backing into corners during boundary spraying, to begin
applying product from a complete stop, or to apply additional product to specific area of a field.
To enable the override during an AccuBoom enabled job:
1.
Toggle the ‘Master’ on the Raven CAN Switch Box to the Override position.
2.
The override timer will display a countdown for the override time in the switch box icon location. When the
override time expires, the switch box icon will return.
164
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Using AccuBoom™
If a CAN switch box or Switch Pro is not installed with the control system, the on-screen switch box may be
used to enable the override feature. To enable the override during an AccuBoom enabled job using the onscreen switch box:
1.
Touch the on-screen switch box icon displayed in the lower, left corner of the Guidance screen.
The in job AccuBoom screen will be displayed.
2.
Touch the Override button. AccuBoom section control will toggle all sections on for the number of seconds
configured for the override feature.
Aggressiveness
The aggressiveness setting adjusts the AccuBoom feature response for large implements or aggressive
driving styles.
The look-ahead values set the amount of time ahead of
the vehicle (based on vehicle speed) which the field
computer will scan for zone boundaries or unapplied
areas when turning sections on or off. By default,
AccuBoom overrides any additional zone boundaries
detected until the look-ahead time has passed. For
example, if the turn-on look-ahead value is set to 5
seconds and AccuBoom detects an unapplied area 5
seconds ahead of a boom section, AccuBoom toggles
that section on and will ignore subsequent commands to
turn that section off until the section has entered the
unapplied area.
For sections at the end of larger booms, or where sharp
turns or aggressive maneuvering is necessary, this
override may cause unexpected skips in coverage. The aggressiveness factor uses the user defined lookahead values to adjust AccuBoom response for these driving styles and/or field areas requiring aggressive
maneuvering when crossing zones. Higher aggressiveness settings will increase the override time for
subsequent AccuBoom section control commands. To set the AccuBoom aggressiveness from the main
screen:
1.
Touch the Tools Menu and select the AccuBoom icon located within the System menu.
2.
Touch the Aggressiveness button.
3.
Select the desired aggressiveness setting to match the operator driving style or requirements.
4.
Touch the Accept icon to save the aggressiveness factor setting and return to the AccuBoom Configuration
screen.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
165
9
Override
Chapter 9
Master Pressure
If the product control node is capable of controlling the AccuBoom feature based upon boom pressure, the
Master Pressure button will be displayed on the AccuBoom Configuration screen.
Touch the master pressure button to display the AccuBoom Master Pressure screen and configure the master
pressure feature. This feature allows the field computer to enable or disable AccuBoom control based upon the
liquid pressure at the booms.
Note:
The master pressure feature requires a pressure transducer to monitor the pressure in the main
product line. Contact a local Raven dealer for details or to purchase an optional pressure
transducer. Disable the master pressure feature if a pressure transducer is not installed with the
CANbus system.
On Pressure
Set the pressure at which the field computer will allow the AccuBoom feature to automatically control boom
sections.
Since boom pressure may fluctuate slightly when sections activate, it is recommended to set this value above
the minimum desired boom pressure to ensure adequate pressure to maintain the spray pattern.
Off Pressure
Set the pressure at which the field computer will shut off all AccuBoom controlled sections and disable
automatic section control. All AccuBoom controlled sections will be overridden off until the boom pressure rises
above the set ‘On Pressure’ value. If the boom pressure falls below the off pressure as sections are enabled
when the on pressure setting is reached, reduce the off pressure value to allow the system to being
application.
Note:
The ‘On Override’ feature will not override boom sections on if the boom pressure is below the ‘Off
Pressure’ setting.
Turn Off Percent
This value controls the percentage of a section that must cross a field or zone boundary, or enter a previously
applied area, before AccuBoom will control that section. The default value is 100%.
Using the default setting, when 100% of a section crosses into a no-spray zone or previously applied area,
AccuBoom will toggle the section off.
Note:
166
If the turn off percent value is set to 0%, sections will not turn off automatically.
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Using AccuBoom™
Look Ahead
Set the AccuBoom Look Ahead setting to the number of seconds (determined by speed) the field computer is
allowed to scan in front of the current vehicle position for zone map features. The On and Off Look Ahead
settings may help to compensate for the time required to open or close control valves based upon the zone
map.
A non-zero “On” Look Ahead value allows AccuBoom to begin opening control valves while a non-zero “Off”
Look Ahead will allow AccuBoom to begin closing valves.
Note:
Setting the Look Ahead values too high may cause the control valves to begin opening or closing
too early. This may cause overlaps, skips, or undesirable product application in some areas.
Generally, these settings should not exceed 5 seconds and a value between 1 to 2 seconds will
yield the best results.
Use Look Ahead Distance
Enable the Use Look Ahead Distance option on the AccuBoom Configuration screen to set look-ahead values
in units of distance rather than time.
The vehicle must travel at a constant speed while using the look ahead distance.
9
Note:
Enable Zero Speed Override Popup
Check the Enable Zero Speed Override Popup option to display the AccuBoom Popup screen during
AccuBoom enabled jobs.
Enabling AccuBoom™
To use the AccuBoom feature with the product control system, AccuBoom must be enabled. AccuBoom cannot
be enabled while a job is in progress. To Start or Resume a job with the AccuBoom feature enabled:
1.
Select the Start Job icon on the Home screen.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
167
Chapter 9
2.
Touch the AccuControl button on the Verify Settings screen (See Chapter 6, Basic Operation, for details on
other settings and features enable on the Verify Settings screen).
3.
Select the Enable AccuBoom option to allow the AccuBoom feature to automatically control boom or
implement sections. Leaving this option blank will disable AccuBoom. Once the Enable AccuBoom option is
selected, the AccuBoom screen will appear similar to the following:
4.
Leave the ‘Enable Zone Map’ option deselected to use Standard AccuBoom section control only. See the
AccuBoom™ Modes section on page 169 for more information on the AccuBoom modes.
Touch the Accept icon and skip to step 7 if Standard AccuBoom is the desired mode of operation for this
job. Proceed to step 6 to select a zone map for this job.
5.
Select the ‘Enable Zone Map’ option to enable the zone mapping mode.
168
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Using AccuBoom™
a.
Select the name of a previously saved zone map to use with this job and touch the Accept icon to
return to the Start Job - Verify Settings screen.
b.
To create a new map, touch the Create New icon and enter a name for the zone map that will be
created within the job.
Note:
9
The Start Job - Select Zone Map screen is displayed when the ‘Enable Zone Map’ option is enabled.
Zone maps and map file names cannot begin with a space.
6.
Touch the Accept icon to save the entered name and return to the Verify Settings screen.
7.
Verify the other available settings or features are setup correctly before beginning the job.
AccuBoom™ Modes
The available modes for operating AccuBoom are:
Standard AccuBoom™ Mode
In jobs using Standard AccuBoom mode, zone maps cannot be created or loaded. Automatic section control is
based upon the coverage map only. As sections enter previously applied areas, AccuBoom will automatically
turn that section Off. When the section leaves the previously applied area, AccuBoom automatically turns the
section back On.
The standard field boundary tools are used while operating in Standard AccuBoom mode. Refer to the Field
Boundary section on page 80 for information on the standard field boundary tools.
Zone maps cannot be loaded or created in the Standard AccuBoom mode. To use or create a spray zone map,
be sure to select the ‘Enable Zone Map’ option during the Start Job - Verify Settings procedure. See the
Enabling AccuBoom™ section on page 167 for help enabling zone maps.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
169
Chapter 9
Zone Mapping Mode
Zone maps create features within a field which allow AccuBoom and the field computer to automatically shut
off or turn on product application as the machine travels through the field. The field computer may be used to
create and save AccuBoom zone maps fore each field in which automatic section control is desired.
Spray Zones. In areas where product application is desired, a spray zone allows AccuBoom to turn on boom
sections and the field computer to control application rates as normal.
No-Spray Zones. No-spray zones may be created and saved around any areas in which product application
should be avoided, such as waterways, or around well heads. AccuBoom uses the spray zone map to control
boom sections as the machine travels through the field.
For example, as the implement crosses into a no-spray zone, AccuBoom will automatically shut off any
sections that enter the no-spray zone while other sections remain enabled. As the sections re-enter unapplied
spray zones, AccuBoom will automatically toggle sections back on.
Field Boundaries. Field boundaries within an AccuBoom enabled job automatically create a zone map based
upon the completed boundary. A field boundary recorded without the AccuBoom feature enabled can be
converted to an AccuBoom field boundary later. See the Loading a Field Boundary section on page 172 for
details.
Note:
A job file can be saved with any number of spray or no-spray zones, but a job file may only contain
a single field boundary.
Within the completed boundary, AccuBoom assigns the area as a normal spray zone. No-spray zone’s can be
recorded later to edit the area within the field boundary. AccuBoom assigns a minimum of three boom or
implement widths outside of the completed field boundary as a no-spray zone. The Envizio Pro will also disable
section control features when the vehicle is outside of the recorded field boundary.
Note:
Even though the field computer automatically controls sections when the vehicle is outside of the
field boundary, it is not recommended to approach nurse trucks or refilling stations while automatic
section control is enabled. Toggle the vehicle master switch to keep AccuBoom from turning on
sections unexpectedly.
If the ‘Enable Zone Map’ option is not selected during the Start Job - Verify Settings process,
AccuBoom will not assign spray/no-spray zones to completed field boundaries.
170
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Using AccuBoom™
On-Screen Switch Box
If an optional automatic section control feature is enabled for the current job, the on-screen switch box icon will
be displayed in the lower, left corner of the Guidance screen.
Note:
The on-screen switch box is not available if a Raven CAN switch box or Switch Pro switch box is
connected to the CANbus.
Touch this icon to access the section control feature screen to control individual sections or activate the feature
override.
9
Master
Switch
AccuBoom
Override
Section
Switches
The AccuBoom screen displays the following icons to control sections:
Master Switch Control. Touch the master off, automatic or on icons to toggle all sections currently set to
automatic control. Tapping the master switch indicator will toggle any sections currently in the automatic mode
to the selected status. Tap the automatic mode will toggle those sections back to automatic while leaving any
manually controlled sections to the assigned mode.
Double tap the master switch icon to toggle all section switches to the selected status.
Section Control Switches. Touch the individual section control switches to toggle individual sections or rows
between the automatic, off or on.
AccuBoom Timed Override. Touch the timed override icon to override the AccuBoom feature on for the set
override time. Refer to the AccuBoom™ Setup section on page 164 for more information on calibrating the
AccuBoom feature and using the override.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
171
Chapter 9
Using Zone Maps
An AccuBoom zone map may contain numerous spray and no-spray zones for each field. Zone maps may be
modified at any time using the available tools and features of the zone mapping mode. The following sections
will cover various methods of using zone maps and field boundaries stored on the field computer.
Loading a Field Boundary
A field boundary recorded without the AccuBoom feature enabled may be loaded as an AccuBoom field
boundary within a zone mapping enabled job. To load a standard field boundary into an AccuBoom enabled
job:
1.
Touch the Menu icon in the lower, right corner of the Guidance screen.
2.
Select the Zone Mapping Tools icon.
3.
Select the Load Field Boundary icon.A list of available field boundaries currently saved on the
field computer will display.
4.
Select the name of the desired field boundary and touch the Accept icon. The selected field
boundary is displayed on the Guidance screen.
Note:
172
Field boundaries created or exported by the Envizio Pro will be named using the job name or zone
map name provided when the job was started. Shapefile boundaries may be renamed on a PC or
laptop before importing the boundary onto the field computer.
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Using AccuBoom™
AccuBoom™ Mapping Tools
The following tools are available via the Menu on the Guidance screen during an AccuBoom enabled job with
zone mapping.
Select the zone mapping tools to display AccuBoom and zone map tools available for the current
job. Tools displayed in this menu may only appear if certain map features are present within the
current job. Read the descriptions of the following tools for more information regarding when the
tool or feature is available.
While editing zone maps, the Home button is replaced with the Accept button. To save the
currently displayed map and restore normal Menu tools, select the Accept button.
Touch the Record No-Spray Zone icon to begin recording points along a no-spray zone boundary.
The area inside of the completed boundary will become a no-spray zone.
Touch the Record Field Boundary icon to create a new AccuBoom field boundary. With the zone
mapping mode enabled, AccuBoom will assign a minimum of three implement widths outside of
the completed boundary as a no-spray zone.
On-Screen Tools
While recording a zone map feature, the following icons will be displayed on the Guidance screen.
Pause
Select the Pause button displayed on the Guidance screen to temporarily interrupt recording the current zone
map feature.This feature is useful if the vehicle course will move away from the desired boundary to refill a
tank, etc.
Pause No-Spray
Zone
Pause
Spray Zone
Pause Field
Boundary
Resume
While Paused, a Resume button will replace the Pause and End buttons on the Guidance screen. Touch this
button to resume recording the paused zone feature.
Resume
No-Spray Zone
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
Resume
Spray Zone
Resume Field
Boundary
173
9
Touch the Record Spray Zone icon to begin recording points along a spray zone boundary. The
area inside of the completed boundary will become a spray zone.
Chapter 9
Stop
When finished recording a Zone or Boundary, touch the Stop button to close Zone or Boundary.
Stop No-Spray
Zone
Note:
Stop Spray
Zone
Stop Field
Boundary
The field computer will draw a straight line from the starting point of the feature to the current
vehicle location when closing the zone map feature.
Creating an AccuBoom™ Zone Map
The following is an example of recording an AccuBoom field boundary in the zone mapping mode. Other zone
features may be recorded using the same procedure by using the buttons and tools as described in the
AccuBoom™ Mapping Tools section on page 173.
1.
On the Guidance screen, access the Menu and select the AccuBoom Boundary Tools icon.
2.
Select the Record Field Boundary button to begin recording a new AccuBoom field boundary.
Record AccuBoom
Field Boundary
174
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Using AccuBoom™
The Select Reference Point will display.
The Reference Point is the point on the vehicle where the field computer will record the selected feature
boundary.
• Left and Right End of Section options set the Reference Point at the left or right end of the
• Center of Section sets the Reference Point at the center of the configured guidance width.
• Antenna Position uses the left/right and fore/aft offset values to determine the DGPS antenna
location.
3.
To set the Reference Point, select the option that corresponds to the orientation of the vehicle with respect
to the feature being recorded and then touch the Accept icon.
4.
The Guidance screen will re-appear and the field computer will begin recording the feature at the selected
Reference Point. On the Guidance screen, a Pause and End icon appear for the feature currently being
recorded.
Recorded Path
5.
Begin driving along the boundary while keeping the Reference Point aligned with the field boundary. A
yellow path will be created on screen to display the path recorded.
6.
Touch the Stop button to finish recording the current feature on the AccuBoom map.
Note:
The field computer will close the feature by drawing a straight line from the current vehicle location
to the point were recording of the feature was started. Areas inside and outside of the feature will
be treated accordingly.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
175
9
guidance width.
Chapter 9
7.
Repeat step 2 through step 6 for any additional features.
8.
When finished recording features for the AccuBoom map, select the Menu icon and then touch the Accept
button to save the currently displayed AccuBoom map and close the AccuBoom tools menu.
Note:
Zone features created while recording a field boundary will not appear until the Save and Close
icon is selected from the AccuBoom Tools Menu.
AccuBoom™ Zone Map Examples
The following screens are examples of AccuBoom maps displayed on the field computer.
FIGURE 1.
Field Review Mode While Recording a Boundary
Spray Zone
No-Spray Zone
FIGURE 2.
Field Review Mode with Completed AccuBoom™ Field Boundary and No-Spray Zone
Field Boundary
176
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Using AccuBoom™
FIGURE 3.
Guidance screen in Down Field View with Completed Field Boundary
No-Spray Zone
Spray Zone
Field Boundary
FIGURE 4.
Field Review Mode with Completed AccuBoom™ Field Boundary and No-Spray Zone
9
Field
Boundary
No-Spray Zones
Spray Zone
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
177
Chapter 9
178
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
CHAPTER
10
Chapter10
Using AutoBoom®
Introduction
The AutoBoom feature, used in conjunction with an Envizio Pro, adjusts the height of the booms automatically.
Using the machine’s boom hydraulics, the AutoBoom parallel hydraulic system always keeps the hydraulic
valves open, gently balancing the hydraulic cylinders and allowing the booms to raise or lower effortlessly.
The field computer and AutoBoom system must be calibrated and properly setup prior to using the AutoBoom
feature with the Envizio Pro. See the calibration instructions specific to the Glide Series AutoBoom system for
details on setting up the AutoBoom system.
NOTICE
Read all safety requirements and precautions in
the machine specific installation manual prior to
operating a machine equipped with the
AutoBoom feature. Failure to follow safety
precautions may lead to damage to equipment,
injury or death.
Note:
If the Function Disabled screen appears when the AutoBoom icon is selected, troubleshoot the
AutoBoom node. See Chapter 11, Troubleshooting or the CAN Troubleshooting section in Chapter
4, CAN Networking and Diagnostics, for help troubleshooting the node.
There are two AutoBoom systems that can be controlled by the Envizio Pro:
PowerGlide Plus
PowerGlide Plus AutoBoom utilizes gauge wheels to maintain optimum boom height while state-of-the-art
hydraulics are used to maintain constant hydraulic pressure in the lift cylinders. PowerGlide Plus systems are
typically used in pre-emergent applications.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
179
Chapter 10
UltraGlide
UltraGlide AutoBoom replaces the gauge wheels with state-of-the-art ultrasonic sensors to measure the boom
height above the ground. Since no part of the machine must come into contact with the ground or crop,
UltraGlide systems are ideal for use in post-emergent as well as pre-emergent applications.
Note:
Terrain conditions as well as the machine’s hydraulic system will dictate the actual speeds which
may be achieved while applying with an Engaged AutoBoom system. Typically, rougher and more
varied field terrain will require slower AutoBoom application speeds.
AutoBoom® Operation
Once properly calibrated, operation of the AutoBoom feature with the Envizio Pro is as easy as toggling the
feature on and enabling height control for each boom. AutoBoom must be both On and Enabled for each boom
before the system will manage boom height. The field computer does not require an active job to enable the
AutoBoom feature.
Status Display
During a job, the status of the AutoBoom system is displayed on the Guidance screen.
Touch the AutoBoom Status Display to view the main AutoBoom Settings screen.
Note:
180
If operating with an UltraGlide AutoBoom system, the set Sensor Height is displayed in the Status
Display. If an optional center rack sensor is installed, the actual height of the center rack will be
displayed in this area.
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Using AutoBoom®
AutoBoom® Indicators
The following sections offer examples of the AutoBoom status indicators which may be displayed on the
Guidance screen during a job. The AutoBoom status display will appear differently depending on the
capabilities of the AutoBoom system installed and connected to the field computer.
Standard AutoBoom
The following indicators may be displayed on the Guidance screen for a standard AutoBoom system:
The AutoBoom Off indicator displays when the AutoBoom feature is turned off. Boom height
management is not enabled.
The AutoBoom On/Disabled indicator displays when the AutoBoom feature is On but boom height
management is not enabled.
The AutoBoom On/Left Enabled indicator displays when AutoBoom is On and boom height
management is only Enabled for the left boom. AutoBoom will not adjust the height of the right
boom.
The AutoBoom On/Right Enabled indicator displays when AutoBoom is On and boom height
management is only Enabled for the right boom. AutoBoom will not adjust the height of the left
boom.
10
The AutoBoom On/Enabled indicator displays when AutoBoom is On and boom height
management is Enabled for both booms.
AutoBoom Center Rack Control
For AutoBoom systems with the center rack control feature installed, the Guidance screen will also display the
current status of the center rack.
For Example:
AutoBoom is on and the system will automatically control the height of the center rack. AutoBoom
height control of the left and right booms is not enabled.
AutoBoom is on and the system will automatically control the height of the center rack and right
boom. AutoBoom height control of the left boom is not enabled.
AutoBoom is on and the system will automatically control the height of the center rack and booms.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
181
Chapter 10
182
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
CHAPTER
Chapter1
11
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Information
This chapter contains information on troubleshooting possible issues with the Envizio Pro control system.
Please read through this chapter before contacting technical support, as many common issues and solutions
are covered here.
General Issues
Issue
Field computer does
not power up.
Possible Cause
Solution
• No power to unit
• Check for +12V DC on pin 16 of the power cable.
• Blown fuse
• Check for continuity in 10 amp fuse in power cable.
• Poor ground
• Make sure that pin 1 is connected to the battery ground.
• Unit is locked up
• Disconnect power for approximately 3 seconds and reconnect.
• No power to CAN node(s)
• Verify that there is 12 volt power and ground to the CAN
node's logic power
• Weak or dirty power to the • Verify that the 12 volt power to the CAN node is coming from
CAN node(s)
the switch relay that is connected to the battery
CAN node(s) not
detected.
Touch screen does
not respond to touch
• Water in CAN node(s)
• Do not direct any pressure or wash stream directly at the CAN
node(s) to prevent water and moisture from building up in the
nodes.
• Corrosion in CAN
connections
• Disconnect and clean the CAN connections.
• Broken cable to node
• Repair or replace cable.
• Low power voltage
• Verify at least +10V DC at node.
• Area touched does not
include a selectable
function
• Touch an area of the screen that contains a selectable
function.
• System is busy processing
• Wait for system to finish processing previous requests.
a previous request
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
183
Chapter 11
Issue
Possible Cause
• GPS cable is not
connected
• No power to the GPS
Red DGPS Status
receiver
indicator on the Home
screen
• Incorrect port setting
Product node(s) not
detected.
Solution
• Check the cable between the GPS receiver and the field
computer.
• Check power to the GPS receiver.
• Make sure that the port settings on the field computer and the
GPS receiver are the same.
• Incorrect GPS source
selected
• Verify that the correct GPS Source is selected. (Tools
Menu>GPS menu>Source)
• Wrong control type
selected on the control
interface screen.
• Verify the control type setting is correct for the control system.
(Tools Menu>System menu>Control Interface).
• Node connection issue in
CAN system
• See the CAN Troubleshooting section on page 34 for CAN
troubleshooting information.
Field computer does • The orange wire is
not completely power connected directly to a 12V • Do not connect the orange wire to a source of +12VDC.
power source
down
Vehicle battery
discharges overnight
• CAN nodes are wired
directly to the battery
• Wire the CAN nodes through a relay or switched power
source.
Setup Issues
Issue
Previous settings
have been lost
Possible Cause
Solution
• Settings data deleted from • Review Chapter 7, Tools Menu or Chapter 8, Software
memory
Updates and File Maintenance, for data information.
• Poor CAN connections
• See the CAN Troubleshooting section on page 34 for more
information.
Job Issues
Issue
Possible Cause
Solution
• Boom switches are turned
• Turn section and master switches on.
off
Section numbers do
not turn green
(remain white)
• AccuBoom enabled but
machine not spraying
• Move the machine out of the applied zone.
• CAN is disconnected
• See the CAN Troubleshooting section on page 34 for more
information.
• The section is not set up
properly
• Check the section setup in the Boom Sections screen of the
Vehicle menu.
• Wrong boom master
option selected
• Verify the boom master option setting is correct for the control
system. (Tools Menu>System menu>Control Interface)
• Nodes not completely
programmed
• Check node calibration and ensure all settings have been
completed.
• The section is
disconnected
• Check the connection and wiring to the boom or implement.
AccuBoom with
Raven serial console, • Console section switches
are in the 'On' position
sections will not turn
off
184
• Section switches on Raven serial console must be in the 'Off'
position.
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Troubleshooting
Issue
Possible Cause
Solution
CAN AccuBoom will
not turn on
• Section switches are in the • Section switches for CAN AccuBoom must be in the 'On'
'Off' position
position.
Date and time are
incorrect (Default job
name on the Verify
Settings screen
shows incorrect date
and time)
• No GPS
• Make sure that the GPS receiver is operating properly and
that the DGPS Status indicator displays as a green icon in the
upper left corner of the Home screen.
• No GPS RMC or ZDA
• Check the GPS receiver to make sure the RMC or ZDA string
is selected.
• Incorrect time zone
selected
• Verify the settings on the Time Zone Settings screen are
correct (Tools Menu>Computer menu>Time Zone).
Coverage Map Issues
Issue
Gaps displayed in
coverage map
Possible Cause
Solution
• Section widths not set
correctly
• Check sections widths and section center values.
• Guidance and section
width not the same
• Set guidance width and section width to the same value.
• Driving too fast for vehicle
• Speed may exceed capabilities of the vehicle to deliver
product. Slow down or configure the vehicle to supply a higher
amount of product.
Cannot achieve target
• Calibration numbers
rate
incorrect
• Check and adjust the calibration settings and values.
• Speed calibration incorrect • Check and adjust the speed calibration setting.
Error Messages
This section contains information regarding possible error messages displayed on the field computer and
troubleshooting procedures.
Issue
Possible Cause
Solution
AutoBoom node has
gone off line
Refer to CAN Troubleshooting
AccuBoom node
has gone off line
Refer to CAN Troubleshooting
Boom sense node
has gone off line
Refer to CAN Troubleshooting
No CAN nodes have
been found
Refer to CAN Troubleshooting
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
11
Job Error Messages
185
Chapter 11
GPS Error Messages
Issue
Possible Cause
Guidance Not
Available
• Displays when starting a
job without a GPS signal
No Differential
• Differential GPS has not
been detected by the
field computer
Solution
• Make sure a GPS receiver is connected to the field
computer and that the receiver is powered up, then select
Auto-Detect.
• Make sure the correct GPS Source is selected (Tools
Menu>GPS menu>Source)
• Check the GPS receiver to make sure that it has the
differential correction function. Contact the manufacturer for
additional information.
• Make sure that the GPS receiver is turned on and receiving
a signal.
No GPS
• Field computer does not
detect a GPS signal
• Make sure that the port setting for the field computer and
the GPS receiver match.
• Make sure that the required NMEA messages are turned on
in the GPS receiver.
High HDOP
• Satellite constellation
issue
• There is no issue with the DGPS system or cabling. Wait for
the constellation issue to resolve before continuing job.
CAN Troubleshooting
Although the control algorithm is located within the CAN node, all of the same troubleshooting techniques used
in a traditional hard-wired system still apply to a CAN system. CAN allows for modularization of the control
system, but the behavior of the system remains the same. Flow and speed sensors, as well as the control
valve and boom valves, are used in the same fashion.
Refer to the Raven CANbus Network Installation Manual for detailed troubleshooting procedures and
information.
186
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
APPENDIX
A
Calculating the
Calibration Values
Ap endixA
Speed Cal
Raven industries recommends the following values for the initial speed cal:
Sensor Type
Setting
Radar/GPS
Wheel
Recommended Speed Cal Values
Used with
External Raven GPS
Receiver
Internal DGPS Receiver
GPS Speed over CANbus
Raven Radar
Wheel Magnets
Speedometer Drive Speed
Sensor
English
Metric
785
199
812
1000
598
1000
206
1000
152
254
612
155
These values are usually a good starting point and will generally yield adequate results; however, the speed cal
should still be refined for each vehicle.
Note:
The GPS speed over CANbus feature is only available with specific Raven speed sense nodes.
This feature utilizes NMEA speed over ground data transmitted over the CAN network which
eliminates the need for a separate, external speed sensor.
NOTICE
When using the GPS speed over CANbus
feature, no tuning or adjustment is necessary or
recommended to the speed cal value. Losing
GPS signal for more than a second will also
result in loss of the CAN speed signal which
may affect product application in progress.
1.
Make sure any section switches are turned OFF before powering the console ON.
2.
In the System menu, touch the Product Control icon and touch the Speed button.
3.
Touch the Distance button and then reset the odometer display to “0” using the keypad.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
187
Appendix A
4.
Drive 1 mile [1 kilometer]. The field computer will measure the distance driven using the original (or last
programmed) speed cal.
Note:
5.
Accelerate and decelerate slowly. To achieve the most accurate calibration, do not use the
vehicle odometer or the field computer distance display to measure the actual distance driven. Use
section lines or highway markers to determine the actual distance.
At the end of the driven distance, view the distance display again and record the value.
a.
The field computer distance should read a value of approximately 5280 [1000]. If the display reads
between 5260-5300 [990-1010], the default value of 598 [152] is accurate for the speed cal value.
b.
If the distance displayed is not between 5260-5300 calculate the speed cal with the formula:
OSC × 5280
CSC = -----------------------------D
where CSC = Corrected Speed Cal, OSC = Old Speed Cal (speed cal number used to drive the test
distance) and D = the field computer Distance reading. Round to the nearest whole number.
For Example:
Assume that the field computer odometer reads 5000 [980] after a known 1 mile distance has been driven
using an initial speed cal value of 598 [152].
598 × 5280
CSC = --------------------------- = 631.48
5000
or
[ 152 ] × [ 1000 ]
CSC = ------------------------------------- = [ 155 ]
[ 980 ]
The Corrected Speed Cal value is 631 [155].
6.
Touch the Speed button and use the keypad to enter the new value as the speed cal.
7.
Verify the new speed cal derived in step 5 by repeating step 2 through step 4.
Wheel Drive Speed Sensor
1.
Mark the tire on which the speed sensor is installed using chalk or a piece of tape as shown below.
2.
Mark the corresponding spot on the ground.
3.
Count 10 full revolutions of the wheel while traveling in a straight path. The mark must stop with the chalk or
tape in the same orientation that it began at the starting point.
FIGURE 1.
188
Calculating the Speed Cal with a Wheel Magnet Speed Sensor System
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Calculating the Calibration Values
4.
Mark the stopping point and measure the distance between the starting and stopping marks on the ground
in inches [dm]. Round to the nearest whole number.
Note:
5.
This measurement is critical to the performance of the console. Measure Carefully. Be sure tire is
properly inflated before measuring. If possible, measurements should be made in the type of soil
in which the vehicle will be operating. Tire circumference will vary when measured in soft or hard
packed soil. For best results, measure several times and average the results.
Enter this measurement is the new speed cal.
Adjusting for Additional Magnets
Typically, four magnets are used with the wheel drive speed sensor. However, to ensure accurate speed
readings for large tires and very low speed applications, additional wheel magnets may be necessary. Any
even number of magnets may be used as long as they are of alternating color and equally spaced. After
calculating the speed cal, this number must be adjusted according to the number of magnets installed using
the following formula:
4-------× D = ADJ
NM
where ADJ = Adjusted Speed Cal, NM = Number of Magnets used and D = the Distance Measured.
For Example:
The distance measured between starting and stopping marks is 1200 and six magnets are installed.
4
--- × 1200 = 800
6
The Adjusted Speed Cal is 800.
Speedometer Drive Speed Sensor
1.
In the System menu, touch the Product Control icon and then select Speed. Touch the Distance button and
use the keypad to enter “0” as the distance displayed on the field computer.
2.
Touch the Speed Cal button and use the keypad to enter a speed cal value of 612 [155].
3.
Drive 1 mile [1 km]. The field computer will measure the distance driven using the speed cal value of 612.
Note:
4.
Accelerate and decelerate slowly. To achieve the most accurate calibration, do not use the
vehicle odometer or the field computer distance display to measure the actual distance driven.
Use section lines or highway markers to determine the actual distance.
Touch the Distance button.
a.
The field computer odometer should display a value of approximately 5280 [1000]. If it reads between
5200-5350 [990-1010], the speed cal for the vehicle is 612 [155].
b.
If the field computer odometer displays any other value, perform the following calculation:
OSC × D A
------------------------- = CSC
Do
where OSC = Old Speed Cal, DA = Actual Distance traveled, Do = the field computer odometer
Distance, and CSC = the Corrected Speed Cal. Round to the nearest whole number.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
189
Appendix A
For Example:
Speed Cal = 612 [155]
Actual Distance = 5280 [1000]
Field computer odometer reading = 5000 [980]
English Units:
612 × 5280
--------------------------- = 646.3
5000
Metric Units:
[ 155 ] × [ 1000 ]
------------------------------------- = [ 158.1 ]
[ 980 ]
The Corrected Speed Cal value is 646 [158].
5.
Touch the Speed button and use the keypad to enter the Corrected Speed Cal. To verify the corrected
speed cal calculated above:
a.
Re-zero the distance display as in step 1.
b.
Repeat step 3 and step 4. If the field computer odometer reading still does not match the distance
driven, use the new values and redo the calculation and repeat step 5.
Liquid Applications
Use the following formulas to help calculate the boom or implement section widths for either broadcast or band
applications.
Boom Cal
For liquid sprayers, the boom cal value is the width of the individual boom sections
Calculate the width of each section by measuring the spacing between spray tips in inches [cm] and then
multiplying by the number of tips in each boom section
For Example:
20 tips in a section with spacing of 40 inches would yield:
20 × 40 = 800 = SW
or a Section Width of 800 inches (approximately 67 feet). Enter 800 as the width for this section.
190
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Calculating the Calibration Values
Band Spraying Adjustment
To calculate the adjusted applied rate for band spraying applications, use the following formula:
BR × BW
----------------------- = AR
S
Where BR = the Broadcast Rate, BW = the band width, S = the spacing between the tips and
AR = the Adjusted Rate for band spraying.
For Example:
If the Broadcast Rate is 20 GPA [200 L/ha], the band width is 14 inches [40 cm] and the tip spacing is
40 inches [100 cm]:
20
× 14----------------= 7
40
or
[-----------------------------200 ] × [ 40 ]= [ 80 ]
[ 100 ]
Therefore, the adjusted rate is 7 gallons per acre or 80 liters per hectare.
Meter Cal
The flow meter calibration number can be found on the tag attached to each flow meter. Copy the information
from the tag for future reference as the tags may fade or be lost during equipment operation.
Note:
Refer to the Verifying Flow Rate Limits section on page 196 to verify that the desired flow rate is
within the range specified for the installed flow meter.
Flow Meter Service and Maintenance
Periodic maintenance of the flow meter may help to extend the effective service life of the flow meter or internal
components. If the flow meter does not register the applied product volume properly, the following steps will be
necessary to service the flow meter:
WARNING
Exposure to agricultural chemicals may be
harmful or fatal. Thoroughly bleed and flush the
application system lines prior to disassembling
fittings, hoses and the flow meter.
If the flow meter is used for applying anhydrous
ammonia, bleed the nurse tank hose and flush
the system with water before maintaining the
flow meter.
The following procedure should be performed more frequently if the flow meter is used with harsh chemicals or
in anhydrous ammonia.
1.
Remove the flow meter from the application system and flush with clean water.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
191
Appendix A
2.
If necessary, dismantle the flow meter housing.
3.
Remove the turbine hub and turbine from the flow meter.
4.
Clean the turbine hub and turbine and remove any metal filings or other foreign materials such as wettable
powders.
5.
Check the turbine blades for wear or damage. Refer to the flow meter replacement parts sheet provided
with the flow meter and replace the turbine as necessary.
6.
While holding the turbine hub, spin the turbine. The turbine should spin freely with very little drag within the
turbine hub. Refer to the flow meter replacement parts sheet provided with the flow meter and replace the
turbine hub/turbine assembly as necessary.
7.
Reassemble the flow meter.
8.
Using a low pressure jet of air (5 PSI [34 kPa]), verify that the turbine still spins freely after reassembly. If the
turbine drags or does not move, loosen the hex stud on the bottom of the turbine hub 1/16 turn until the
turbine spins freely.
9.
If the flow meter continues to provide inaccurate product volumes, refer to the Flow Meter/Encoder
Extension Cable section on page 204.
Flow Meter Recalibration
The calibration value for the specific flow meter is printed on the tag attached to the flow meter and will typically
provide accurate metering of product application. The following procedure may be used to check the meter
calibration or recalibrate the flow meter.
Note:
Performing routine maintenance is recommended to help extend the service life and accuracy of
the flow meter. Review the Flow Meter Service and Maintenance section on page 191 to service
the flow meter as necessary.
Before calibrating the flow meter:
1.
It is recommended to perform the flow meter calibration with clean water only. Clean out the supply tank and
flush the product lines with clean water. Refill the tank with clean water.
2.
On the field computer, verify any active jobs are closed.
3.
Toggle all boom section switches and the master section switch to the off position.
4.
Disconnect one of the section product lines near the spray tips.
5.
Set up a calibrated catch container (i.e. 5 gallon [19 L] bucket and place the disconnected end of the
product line in the container.
To recalibrate the flow meter:
1.
On the field computer Home screen, touch the Tools Menu icon.
2.
Select the Product Control icon from the System menu.
3.
On the Product Control Configuration screen, touch the Calibration Settings button.
4.
Select the Meter Cal value and use the on-screen keypad to enter a value of 10 [38].
5.
Touch the Accept icon until the Product Control Configuration screen is displayed.
6.
Touch the Volume/Area Settings button.
7.
Touch the Total Volume button and use the on-screen keypad to enter a value of 0.
8.
Touch the Accept icon to return to the Volume/Area Settings screen.
9.
While monitoring the Total Volume on the screen and the container, toggle the master switch and the
appropriate section switch to the on position.
10.
Dispense exactly 10 gallons [38 L] through the flow meter as measured by the calibrated catch container.
Important:Do not rely on graduation markings/numbers molded into the applicator tank.
192
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Calculating the Calibration Values
11.
Toggle the section or master switch off.
12.
Read the value displayed on the field computer Total Volume button. This value should be within ± 3% of
the meter cal value printed on the flow meter tag.
13.
To confirm accuracy, reset the Total Volume to 0 and repeat the above process several times. Always ‘zero
out’ the Total Volume display before toggling the section switch on.
Note:
The above process is usually sufficient to check the flow meter calibration. For best results, set the
Meter Cal value to 100 [378] and repeat the above procedure to dispense exactly 100 gallons [378
L] through the flow meter.
To verify the flow meter calibration:
1.
Fill the applicator tank with a predetermined volume of liquid (i.e. 250 gallons [946 L]).
Important:Do not rely on graduation markings/numbers molded into the applicator tank.
2.
On the field computer Home screen, touch the Tools Menu icon.
3.
Select the Product Control icon from the System menu.
4.
On the Product Control Configuration screen, touch the Volume/Area Settings button.
5.
Use the on-screen keypad to enter a value of 0 and touch the Accept icon.
6.
Empty the applicator tank under normal operating conditions.
7.
Return to the Total Volume displayed on the field computer and read the new value. The total volume value
should match the known volume (± 3%) used to fill the applicator tank.
8.
If the total volume value displayed differs from the known volume by greater than 3%, use the following
formula
MC
× Vm----------------------= CMC
Vk
Where MC = the Meter Cal value used during the test, Vm = the Volume measured by the field computer,
Vk = the known Volume in the applicator tank and CMC = the Corrected Meter Cal.
For Example:
A set meter cal of 720 [190] is used to dispense 250 gallons [946 L] through the flow meter. At the end of
the test, the field computer reads a measured volume of 260 gallons [984 L]:
720
× 260----------------------= 749
250
or
[ 190 ] × [ 984 ]
---------------------------------- = [ 198 ]
[ 946 ]
Therefore, the corrected meter cal is 749 [198].
9.
Enter the corrected meter cal value before resuming application.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
193
Appendix A
Valve Cal
Note:
If the dual loop control feature is enabled, the valve cal value will be replaced by the flow cal value.
To ensure that the proper amount of product is being applied, the valve cal must be programmed for the type of
control valve(s) connected to the control system. The field computer uses the calibration number to adjust the
response time of the control valve motor to changes in the vehicle speed.
The following control valve calibration numbers are recommended for the valves listed:
Control Valve Type
Standard (C-SD)
Fast (C-F) or Fast Close (C-FC)
PWM (C-P) or PWM Close (C-PC)
Valve Cal
2123
743
43
Each digit in the calibration number corresponds to a specific function of the valve. The following functions
apply to the digits in the valve calibration number:
Valve Speed Digit
Valve Backlash Digit
Break Point Digit
Dead Band Digit
Valve Backlash Digit
This value controls the time of the first correction pulse after detecting a change in correction direction. The
values range from 1 to 9, where 1 is for a short pulse and 9 is for a long pulse.
Note:
The backlash digit is not used with a fast, fast close, PWM, PWM close or standard motor control
valve.
Valve Speed Digit
This value controls the response time of the control valve motor. If the valve speed setting is too fast, the valve
will over correct and the system can start to oscillate. The following valves have specific values:
• Standard Control Valve: This valve has a range of values from 1 to 9, with 1 being slow and 9 being fast.
• Fast and Fast Close Control Valve: These valves have a range of values from 0 to 9, with 0 for fast and 9 for
slow.
Note:
The speed digit is not used with a PWM or PWM close valve.
Brake Point Digit
The brake point digit sets the percent away from the target rate at which the control valve starts to turn at a
slower rate so that it does not overshoot the target rate. The values range from 0 to 9, where 0 is a 5% rate, 1
is a 10% rate and 90 is a 90% rate.
Dead Band Digit
The dead band digit is the allowable difference between the target rate and the actual application rate. The
values range from 1 to 9, where 1 equals 1% difference and 9 equals 9% of the difference.
194
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Calculating the Calibration Values
Valve Cal 2
Note:
If the dual loop control feature is enabled, the valve cal 2 value will be replaced by the Sgain
(pressure system gain) value.
When a fast close valve is selected, the valve cal 2 value is utilized to enable a high resolution rate control for
lower application rates.
Enter a non-zero value for the time, in milliseconds, which the valve will be fully opened before switching into
high resolution control. For example, a value of 200 will give the valve a 200 millisecond “burst” at a full 12V to
open the fast valve from the closed position before resuming product rate control. A zero value will disable this
feature.
Flow Cal (Dual Loop Control Mode)
The flow cal value has two components which may be used to adjust the response of the application system.
103
Flow System Gain
Note:
Dead Band
Percentage
It is recommended to set the Sgain value prior to making any adjustments to the flow cal value.
Flow System Gain. The first digit(s) of the flow cal correspond to a flow system gain between 1 and 99. The
higher the flow system gain, the more aggressive the system will respond to changes in flow rate.
Note:
When entering a flow gain value from 1 to 9, it is not necessary to enter a zero in front of the value.
If the system adjusts to rate control changes too slowly, increase the flow gain digit(s) to increase the system
response rate. If the system overshoots or oscillates around the desired flow rate, decrease the flow gain
digit(s) to help stabilize the system.
Dead Band Digit. The last, or right most, digit in the flow cal value is the dead band digit. The dead band digit
is the allowable difference between the target rate and the actual application rate. The values range from 1 to
9, where 1 equals 1% difference and 9 equals 9% of the difference.
Sgain (Pressure System Gain - Dual Loop Control Mode)
The default setting for the Sgain value is 100. To adjust the system aggressiveness, enter a value between 1
and 999 as necessary.
Note:
It is recommended to increase or decrease the current value in increments of 10 or less when
making adjustments to the Sgain setting. If the new value does not produce significant or notable
changes in the system response, increments of 20 may be used.
Increase the Sgain value if the observed product pressure increases too slowly or if the system takes a long
time to reach a set standby pressure or rate input change. If the system is consistently over shooting a set
standby pressure or oscillating around a target rate, decrease the Sgain value until the system stabilizes.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
195
Appendix A
Rate Cal
The following information must be known in order to determine which spray nozzles to use with the sprayer.
•
•
•
•
Nominal Application Pressure_________ PSI [kpa]
Target Application Rate_________ GPA [lit/ha]
Target Speed_________ MPH [km/h]
Nozzle Spacing_________ inches [cm]
From this information, calculate the volume per minute per nozzle as follows:
Rate × Speed × NS
NVPM = ----------------------------------------------5, 940 [ 60, 000 ]
where NVPM = Nozzle Volume per Minute (Gallons/Acre or [lit/ha]), Rate = Target Application Rate, Speed =
Target Speed of Application and NS = Nozzle Spacing.
For Example:
Application Pressure = 30 PSI, Target Application Rate = 20 GPA, Target Speed = 5.2 MPH and Nozzle
Spacing = 20 inches
20 × 5.2 × 20
NVPM = -------------------------------- = 0.35
5, 940
Using the calculated Nozzle Volume per Minute of 0.35 at an Application Pressure of 30, select a tip that is
capable of these application specifications. Contact a local sprayer supply dealer for available nozzles or
spray tips.
Verifying Flow Rate Limits
The target rate for a field application also must be within the specified range of the flow meter measuring flow
rate for the control channel.
Flow Meter Model
196
Flow Range
RFM 5
0.1 - 5 GPM [0.2 - 18.9 L/min]
RFM 15
0.3 - 15 GPM [1.1 - 56.8 L/min]
RFM 60P
1 - 60 GPM [3.8 - 210 L/min]
RFM 100
5 - 100 GPM [11.4 -380 L/min]
RFM 200/ 200 Poly
15 - 200 GPM [56.8 - 760 L/min]
RFM 400
25 - 400 GPM [94.6 - 1515 L/min]
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Calculating the Calibration Values
Tiered Boom Settings
A tiered boom configuration has two or more booms stacked one directly in front of the other and may or may
not have different sets of nozzles capable of applying different rates.
Note:
Specialized pluming, cabling and a relay box or product controller node are required to utilize a
tiered boom configuration. Generally, sprayers are not setup for this feature from the factory.
The boom tiers are connected to shut-off valves, which are controlled by a CANbus product control node. This
configuration allows the machine to control a much wider range of application rates than a standard, single
boom configuration.
For example, a low application rate may be applied by turning on the first tier sections only. Higher application
rates may be applied by switching to the second tier booms with larger nozzles. A third and an even higher rate
can be achieved by using both boom tiers in tandem.
Note:
The spray tips used on a tiered boom system must be extended range tips. In addition, the volume
per minute of the second tier tips should not exceed 1.5 times the volume of the first tier’s tips. The
tier switching points should be set to 80% of the full flow volume for the boom tier tips.
To access the Tiered Boom Settings screen:
1.
Touch the Tools Menu icon from the Home screen.
2.
Select the Product Control icon from the System submenu.
3.
Touch the Calibration Settings button and select the Tiered Boom Settings button on the screen.
Note:
The tiered boom feature is not available in a granular control mode. Be sure that the configuration
screen is set to a control channel set to control a liquid product application.
The following settings may be configured on the Tiered Boom Settings screen:
Tier 1 Max. Set the desired maximum rate applied through the first tier boom sections.
Tier 2 Max. Set the desired maximum rate applied through the second tier boom sections.
Percent Tier Disable. The Percent Tier Disable is used to determine the percentage of the maximum tier rate
at which tiers are disabled as the required volume per minute decreases. Using a Percent Tier Disable value
allows the control valves to adjust to the target rate more quickly as the required rate decreases.
For Example:
A machine has a tiered boom configuration with the following capacities:
• Tier 1 Capacity up to 25 GPM [94.6 L/min]
• Tier 2 Capacity up to 38 GPM [143.8 L/min]
Using the given capacities, the following values should be entered as the Tiered Boom Settings:
• Tier 1 Max. = 25 GPM [94.6 L/min] x 0.8 = 20 GPM [94.6 L/min]
• Tier 2 Max. = 38 GPM [143.8 L/min] x 0.8 = 30 GPM [143.8 L/min]
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
197
Appendix A
Thus, as the volume per minute increases, the following tier switching should occur:
• 10 GPM [37.8 L/min] increasing to 20 GPM [75.7 L/min] = only tier 1 enabled
• 20 GPM [75.7 L/min] increasing to 30 GPM [113.6 L/min] = only tier 2 enabled
• 30 GPM [113.6 L/min] increasing to maximum flow rate = tier 1 and tier 2 enabled
10 - 20 GPM
37.8 - 75.7 L/min
1
Note:
2
20 - 30 GPM
75.7 - 113.6 L/min
1
30 GPM- Max. Flow
113.6 L/min - Max. Flow
2
1
2
Percent Tier Disable only affects tier switching when the required volume per minute is
decreasing.
As rates begin to decrease from maximum, the Percent Tier Disable value is figured in. Thus, using the Tier 2
Max of 30 GPM [113.6 L/min] previously calculated and with the Percent Tier Disable set to 10%, tier 1 and 2
will switch to only tier 2 when the target rate decreases to 27 GPM [102.2 L/min].
So, for rates in gallons per minute:
30 GPM – (10% of 30 GPM) = 30 GPM – 3 GPM = 27 GPM
or, for rates in liters per minute:
113.6 L/min – (10% of 113.6 L/min) = 113.6 L/min – 11.3 L/min = 102.3 L/min
In operation, as the volume per minute decreases, the following boom tier switching should occur.
• Maximum flow rate decreasing to 27 GPM [102.2 L/min] = tier 1 and tier 2 enabled
• 27 GPM [102.2 L/min] decreasing to 18 GPM [68.1 L/min] = only tier 2 enabled
• 18 GPM [68.1 L/min] decreasing to 10 GPM [37.8 L/min] = only tier 1 enabled
Max. Flow - 27 GPM
Max. Flow - 102.2 L/min
1
198
2
27 - 18 GPM
102.2 - 68.1 L/min
1
2
18 - 10 GPM
68.1 - 37.8 L/min
1
2
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Calculating the Calibration Values
Granular Applications
Boom Cal
To calibrate section widths in inches [cm] for the granular application types:
• For single section control systems, enter the total spread width as the boom 1 cal.
• For dual section control systems, enter the left side spread pattern as boom 1 cal and the right side spread
pattern as boom 2 cal.
Spreader Constant
Note:
The spreader constant should be verified by performing the procedure in Verification of Spreader
Constant section on page 200.
For Gran 2 or Gran 3 applications, gate width is the total of both openings.
Standard Rate display
For Rates displayed in 1 pound increments, the formula to calculate the spreader constant is:
311, 040
SC = ---------------------------------L × GH × GW
Where SC = the Spreader Constant, L = Length of belt travel in inches per 1 revolution of the encoder, GH =
Gate Height in inches, GW = Gate Width in inches.
For Example:
Given a Length of belt travel of 13 inches, a Gate Height of 7 inches and a Gate Width of 15 inches:
311, 040
--------------------------- = 228
13 × 7 × 15
Enter 228 as the Spreader Constant if the field computer is set to display English units.
Metric Rate Display
For Rates displayed in 1 kg increments, the formula to calculate the spreader constant is:
18, 000, 000
SC = ---------------------------------L × GH × GW
Where SC = the Spreader Constant, L = Length of belt travel in centimeters per 1 revolution of the encoder, GH
= Gate Height in centimeters and GW = Gate Width in centimeters.
For Example:
Given a Length of belt travel of 33 cm, a Gate Height of 18 cm and a Gate Width of 38 cm:
18, 000, 000
------------------------------ = 797
33 × 18 × 38
Enter 797 as the Spreader Constant if the field computer is set to display Metric units.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
199
Appendix A
Verification of Spreader Constant
To verify and refine the spreader constant, perform the following procedure:
1.
Weigh loaded truck and record the initial weight.
2.
Enter the product density in lbs/cu. ft. [grams/liter] under the Density button in the Calibration Settings
screen.
3.
Set the total volume to zero for the product node being tested.
4.
With the product node in the Manual mode, unload a portion of the load by toggling the boom switch on.
5.
Determine the actual weight unloaded by re-weighing the truck.
6.
Compare this weight to the total volume displayed on the field computer display. Perform the following
calculation to refine the spreader constant, if desired:
OSC × TV
------------------------- = CSC
AW
Where OSC = the Old Spreader Constant, TV = the Total Volume and AW = the Actual Weight unloaded
and CSC = the Corrected Spreader Constant.
For Example:
Using an Old Spreader Constant = 228 [797], Total Volume = 2000 lbs [4400 kg] and an Actual Weight
Unloaded = 1950 lbs [4290 kg]:
English:
228 × 2000
--------------------------- = 234
1950
The new Spreader Constant is 234.
Metric:
797 × 4400
--------------------------- = 817
4290
Repeat this procedure until the weight of the metered materials equals the total volume value.
Product Density
The density of the current product being applied must be entered in lbs/cu. ft. [grams/liter] when controlling a
granular application.
Note:
To increase the system accuracy when applying at low rates, use the decimal shift feature as
explained in the Decimal Shift section on page 115.
Rate Cal
The target application rate must be entered in lbs/acre [kg/ha] as the rate cal value. Consult the equipment
manual to ensure that the selected gate opening is capable of applying at this application rate.
Note:
200
The spreader constant must be recalculated anytime the gate opening is changed.
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Calculating the Calibration Values
Spinner RPM
For spinner box machines, use a product control node capable of controlling spinner speed.
Valve Type
Select the valve type currently used on the machine in which the field computer is installed.
Application
Select ‘Spinner’ as the application type. If spinner does not show up on the application rate, check that a CAN
control node capable of controlling spinner applications is connected to the CANbus. Check the CAN control
node and install a node that is capable of spinner control.
Meter Cal
The machine should be configured with a magnetic pickup coil mounted near the bolt heads on the spinner.
Calculate the meter cal by multiplying the number of pulses (bolt heads) per revolution by 10.
MeterCal = N × 10
For Example:
If the number of pulses per revolution is 4:
4 × 10 = 40
then the value for the meter cal would be 40.
Spreader Constant
The spreader constant should be set to 0.
Rate Cal
The rate cal should be set to the desired RPM of the spinner.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
201
Appendix A
Additional Calibration Data
Although not required operation, the following values may be programmed to enhance feedback for the
operator during field application.
Entering Tank Volume or Bin Level
The tank volume or bin level displayed on the field computer is the calculated estimate of the amount of
product remaining in the tank or bin (not the capacity of the tank or bin). The volume or level must be reset
when refilling product to allow the field computer to calculate the remaining volume during product application.
To reset the tank volume or bin level:
1.
Touch the Tank Volume or Bin Level button to display the tank or bin configuration prompt.
2.
Touch the Tank or Bin Size button to access the Total Tank Size prompt.
3.
Use the on-screen keypad to enter the volume or level of product normally used to fill the tank or bin.
4.
Touch the Accept icon to save the entered volume. The entered value will be displayed in the Reset Tank or
Reset Bin button.
5.
When refilling the tank or bin, touch the reset button to reset the tank or bin level quickly.
Low Tank Alarm
The field computer may be set to display or sound or an alarm when the calculated volume of product
remaining in the in the tank falls to a user defined level. To setup the Low Tank Alarm, refer to the Alarm
Settings section on page 116.
Reset Volume/Area Display Information
The current total area, total volume, field area and field volume information is displayed as applied information
that can be reset at any time. Refer to the Volume and Area Settings section on page 113 to reset these display
values.
Reset Display Distance
The current display distance, or odometer, registered by the field computer may be reset at any time. Refer to
the Speed section on page 101 for more information.
202
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
APPENDIX
B
Testing Cables
Ap endixB
Speed Sensor Extension Cable
Disconnect the extension cable from the speed sensor assembly cable. Hold the extension cable connector so
that the keyway is pointing in the 12 o’clock position as shown below.
FIGURE 1.
Speed Sensor Extension Cable Pin Diagram
Keyway
2 o’clock
Power
10 o’clock
Ground
5 VDC
5 VDC
6 o’clock
Signal
Note:
If a radar type speed sensor is used, the voltage between the 10 o’clock and 2 o’clock positions
may read 12V DC.
If a +5V DC voltage reading is not present, disconnect the flow meter cable and re-test the speed
sensor cable. If the voltage reads +5V DC when the flow meter cable is disconnected, test the flow
meter cable per Testing the Flow Meter/Encoder Cable section on page 204.
Testing the Speed Sensor Extension Cable
1.
Enter a speed cal of 9999 by touching the Speed button on the Product Control screen.
2.
Zero the odometer by entering a zero value in the Distance button.
3.
With a small jumper wire (or paper clip), short between the 10 o’clock and 6 o’clock sockets with a ‘short-noshort’ motion. Each time contact is made, the distance total should increase by increments of 1 or more.
4.
If the distance total does not increase, remove the section of cable and repeat the test at the connector that
is the next closest to the node. If the distance total now increases with the short-no-short test, replace the
defective cable as required.
5.
If no pulses are registered, perform the above voltage checks.
6.
If all of the cables test ‘good,’ replace the speed sensor.
Note:
After testing is complete, re-enter the correct speed cal before starting an application.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
203
Appendix B
Flow Meter/Encoder Extension Cable
Before starting this test, disconnect the flow meter cable from the flow meter. Hold the flow meter cable so that
the keyway is pointing in the 12 o’clock position as shown below.
FIGURE 2.
Flow Meter Extension Cable Pin Diagram
Keyway
2 o’clock
Ground
10 o’clock
Power
5 VDC
5 VDC
6 o’clock
Signal
Testing the Flow Meter/Encoder Cable
1.
Enter a meter cal of 1 in liquid or direct injection modes, or density of 1 and spreader constant of 0 in
granular mode, on the Calibration Settings screen in the Product Control menu.
2.
Touch the Volume/Area Settings button and note the total volume for each product node connected to the
CANbus.
3.
Turn the boom and master switch On.
4.
With a small jumper wire (or paper clip), short between the 2 o’clock and 6 o’clock sockets with a ‘short-noshort’ motion. Each time contact is made, the total volume number should increase by increments of 1 or
more.
5.
If the total volume value does not increase, remove the section of cable and repeat the test at the connector
that is the next closest to the node. Replace the defective cable as required.
6.
Verify the pin connection and voltage from the previous chart.
7.
If all of the cables test ‘good,’ replace the rate sensor.
Note:
204
After testing is complete, re-enter the correct cal values before starting an application.
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
APPENDIX
C
Wireless
Communications &
Remote Service
Ap endixC
The Envizio Pro, with a Slingshot® Field Hub, allows the operator to wirelessly transfer application data back to
the home or office and transfer prescription data from the office to the field. This feature also adds the ability to
allow service technicians and support specialists to remotely control the field computer. With a Slingshot Field
Hub, help is just a touch away.
Via the Field Hub, the field computer can also be used to keep up-to-date with the latest weather forecasts or
crop prices from Internet web sites while still managing product application.
Note:
For instructions on installing and setting up the Slingshot Field Hub, refer to the Field Hub
Installation Guide provided with the wireless device.
Wireless Communication Status
The status of wireless communications is displayed along the top of the Home screen.
Wireless
Communication
Status Icon
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
205
Appendix C
The following icons may be displayed in the wireless status area:
No Device Connected - No supported wireless device is connected to the ethernet port on
the field computer. This icon is also displayed if wireless communication is unavailable or has
been lost.
Communication OK - The status of wireless communication is good and no errors or alarms
are present.
Communication Error - An error has occurred with wireless communication or during a file
transfer.
Communication Lost or Unavailable - This icon will be displayed if the registration process
has not been successfully completed.
The wireless status symbols also display the file transfer status for any files to or from the field computer.
Sync In Progress - The arrow symbol is displayed on the wireless status icon while the field
computer and the Slingshot® site are synchronizing.
Files Received - The envelope symbol is displayed on the wireless status icon when files
have been received by the field computer. When this symbol is displayed, touch the icon to
display the File Manager tab.
Wireless Status Screen
Touch the wireless status symbol displayed on the Home screen to display the Wireless Status screen.
Site Information
Touch the Site information button to view information from the Slingshot® site.
206
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Wireless Communications & Remote Service
Remote Service
The Remote Service feature allows a service technician to view and control a field computer in the field from
his or her service location and assist the machine operator diagnose or troubleshoot the system.
Note:
The service technician will be able to determine whether a remote service session is necessary to
assist with any issues encountered with the field computer. Contact a local Raven dealer or
technical service provider before starting the remote service feature.
To begin a remote service session:
1.
Touch the Wireless Status icon on the Home screen and touch the Remote Service button.
2.
Touch the “Enable Remote Service” button. Have the code displayed on the screen available when
contacting a local Raven dealer for support.
3.
Read the code to the technician to allow them to view and control the field computer and product control
system.
Note:
If an error code is displayed in place of the remote service code, wait a few seconds for the Field
Hub to receive correct data and the error should be cleared automatically. Do not initiate remote
service while an error code is displayed. If the error message does not clear after several seconds,
contact a local Slingshot or Raven dealer for support.
Connection Status
The connection status screen displays the following
information:
• Signal Strength - Displays bars to
represent the current strength of wireless
signal. Four bars represent a strong
signal.
• Ethernet Status - Displays the status of
the connection via the ethernet port on
the back of the field computer.
• Internet Status - View the status of
communication with the world wide web
in this area.
• Suggested Solutions - If any issues or
errors are detected, possible solutions
will be displayed in the solutions area.
Note:
If any error conditions are encountered, the Communication Status screen will display possible
solutions.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
207
Appendix C
File Manager
Access the Wireless File Manager to view a history of files recently transferred to or from the field computer.
Use the up or down arrows to scroll through the history of files sent from, or received by, the field computer.
Touch a file from one of the lists to view file information such as the file type and size as well as the date and
time the file was sent or received.
Note:
Completed job data may be exported to a connected USB flash drive if desired or if a wireless
connection is unavailable. Refer to the Performing File Maintenance section on page 155 to export
a Slingshot® data package using the File Maintenance feature. Jobs exported to a USB flash drive
may then be uploaded to the Slingshot web site using a home or office computer.
Registration
The Registration tab is used to register the Field Hub with the Slingshot® web site and activate the various
features of wireless communication on the field computer.
Note:
208
If the Field Hub has been registered previously, the Registration button will display as reregistration. Touching the “Re-Register” button will display the Re-Registration Warning prompt
below. To re-register the Field Hub, touch the green check mark and proceed with the registration
instructions to re-register the Field Hub.
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Wireless Communications & Remote Service
To register:
1.
2.
Touch the Wireless Status icon on the Home screen and select the Registration button.
Wait while the field computer registers with the Slingshot® web site and receives the registration code. It
may take up to 15 minutes after the registration code is received for features to become fully enabled.
Note:
Be sure to enable the Remote Service and Web Access features if desired (recommended). These
features may be enabled later by accessing the Slingshot® site.
To test wireless access:
1.
Wait for the field computer to automatically search for available files for transfer. This process may take up
to five minutes.
2.
If the Remote Service feature was enabled during registration, select the Remote Service tab and touch the
“Enable Remote Service” button.
3.
If a remote service session is enabled successfully, touch the button now labeled “Disable Remote Service.”
4.
Exit the Wireless Status screen by pressing the “OK” button in the lower, right corner of the screen.
5.
If the Web Access feature was enabled during registration, touch the Tools Menu icon and select the Web
icon within the Computer sub-menu to open the field computer Internet browser and test the web access
feature.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
209
Appendix C
File Transfer Settings
The File Transfer Settings options allow the operator to configure automatic file upload features with the
Slingshot Field Hub. Touch the File Transfer Settings button and select one of the following options:
Automatically Upload. With the automatic upload option selected, the field computer will automatically upload
the completed job file to the Slingshot server when the operator stops the job operation. If the job is
resumed at a later date, a separate copy of the job will be available on the Slingshot server for review.
Prompt. With this option selected, the field computer will prompt the operator to upload job files each time a
job is closed. When the operator stops a job operation, the field computer will provide a prompt and allow
the operator to upload the latest job file or to wait. This option may be preferable if jobs are frequently
stopped and resumed to minimize data usage and ensure that only the completed job file is uploaded to the
Slingshot server.
Disable. Select this option to disable all automated wireless file transfer options. To upload files to the
Slingshot server, the operator must manually initiate wireless file transfer using the File Maintenance
features or use a USB flash drive to transfer completed job information from the field computer to a home or
office PC.
Refer to Chapter 8, Software Updates and File Maintenance, for additional assistance with the File
Maintenance features of the Envizio Pro field computers.
210
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
APPENDIX
D
Weather Station
Ap endixD
Weather Station Overview
Envizio Pro field computers with software version 3.6 or newer are capable of reading information from an
external weather station and recording this information into job report files. The information being recorded to
the report includes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Temperature
Relative Humidity
Dew Point
Barometric Pressure
Wind Speed
Wind Direction
Wind Gust
The Envizio Pro may only read information from one specific model of weather station. This unit is the
WatchDog Sprayer Station Model 3349SS (P/N 117-0171-138) manufactured by Spectrum Technologies, Inc.
This system may be ordered through any Raven dealer. For more information on this system contact Spectrum
Technologies at (800) 248-8873.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
211
Appendix D
Connecting the Weather Station
The weather station may connect to the field computer via either of the following connectors:
• “COM2” or “Console” connector on the main interface or chassis cabling.
• “COM3” or “Light Bar” connector on the auxiliary interface or chassis cabling.
Note:
If the field computer is connected to an external Raven serial controller, the weather station must
be connected to ‘COM 3/Light bar’ on the auxiliary interface or chassis cabling.
Weather Station Activation Key
In order to use the weather station with the Envizio Pro, the weather module authorization code
(P/N 077-0180-030) must be purchased from a Raven dealer. Once the code has been purchased and
registered on-line, the activation key must be entered into the Envizio Pro.
Note:
Refer to the Special Features Registration section on page 138 for additional assistance with
obtaining the activation key and entering the authorization code.
Weather Station Configuration
To view weather information collected by the weather station:
1.
Touch the Tools Menu icon on the Home screen.
2.
Select the Weather Station icon from the Computer menu to display the Weather Station screen.
Note:
The upper portion of the Weather Station screen displays the current weather conditions collected
by the weather station. The snapshot button will only display during an active job.
3.
The default baud rate for communication with the weather station is 4800 and should generally not need to
be changed.
4.
Ensure that the Enable Logging option is enabled to record weather information during an active job and
provide this information on the completed application report file. If weather data is not needed, leave this
option un-checked to help conserve memory on the field computer.
212
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
5.
Select the communication port to which the weather station is connected. Select the:
• COM2 option if the weather station is connected to the COM2 or Console port on the main
interface or chassis cables.
• COM3 option if the weather station is connected to the COM3 or Auxiliary port on the auxiliary
interface or chassis cables.
6.
Touch the Reinitialize Port to restart the weather station comm port if necessary. This feature may be used
if the weather information does not display current conditions as anticipated.
Using the Weather Station
If weather station logging is enabled during an active job, the Envizio Pro will periodically record current
weather conditions for the application report.
To view current conditions or other weather station
information during an active job:
1.
Touch the Menu icon in the lower, right corner to
access the in-job menu.
2.
Select the Weather Station icon to display the
Weather Station screen.
3.
Touch the snapshot button to manually record the
current conditions to an active job for the application
report.
Note:
4.
The snapshot button will only display during
an active job.
Touch the Reinitialize Port to restart the weather
station comm port if the current conditions reported by
the station do not reflect conditions as expected.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
213
Appendix D
214
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
APPENDIX
E
Updating CAN Nodes
via the Envizio Pro
Ap endixE
Envizio Pro field computers with software version 2.2 or higher and CAN firmware version 10 or higher are
capable of programming nodes on the CANbus directly through the field computer and connected cabling
using a USB flash drive with the CAN Update program.
Note:
Before trying to update a CAN node, make sure the node is communicating properly over the
CANbus. If the node is not communicating properly, the field computer will be unable to update the
node.
NOTICE
Updating a CAN node erases the current
settings in the node. To retain settings and
calibration data, be sure to write down all
settings stored by the node(s) being updated.
CAN node updates will be made available periodically on the Raven Applied Technology web site:
www.ravenhelp.com
Note:
The .hex update file must be located in a folder labeled “CANupload” on the root of the USB flash
drive (e.g. “G:\canupload”) used with the field computer. If the update files are downloaded from
the Raven web site, the required file structure will be created when the files are extracted.
To Update CAN Nodes
Important: Do not remove power or unplug any cabling connections during the node update process. It is
recommended to start the machine and keep the engine running during the update process to maintain
constant power over the CANbus system. If the update process fails to complete the update successfully,
the node may become unresponsive. Unresponsive nodes will need to be returned to Raven for repairs.
1.
Start the field computer and touch the Information icon in the upper, right corner of the Home screen.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
215
Appendix E
2.
Touch the
Note:
icon on the About Envizio Pro screen to display the CAN Diagnostics screen.
The current CAN Firmware version is displayed on the CAN Diagnostics screen.
3.
Insert the USB flash drive with the required .hex files into an available USB port on the field computer.
4.
On the CAN Diagnostics screen, select a node to update and then select the
to begin the CAN Update
Program.
5.
The Updates screen displays a list of available node updates.This screen also displays the firmware version
to which each node will be updated if the update is applied.
Available Node
Updates
Firmware Version
6.
Touch the Accept
Note:
7.
If the field computer cannot communicate with the selected node, the CAN Update Program will
display an error. Troubleshoot the node and retry the update.
The field computer begins communicating with the selected node to update. If communication is successful,
the field computer will begin the update by erasing the node’s memory.
Note:
8.
icon to start the update.
The field computer may take several minutes to prepare and apply the software update to the
node. If errors are encountered during the process, re-apply the node update.
To update other nodes via the CANbus repeat step 6 through 7.
216
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
APPENDIX
F
Updating the
On-board DGPS
Receiver
Ap endixF
Occasionally, updates for some Envizio Pro II on-board DGPS receivers may be made available for download
from the Applied Technology web site:
www.ravenhelp.com
Note:
The receiver update may be located under the additional software versions available on the
Envizio Pro II field computer software updates web page.
These updates are made available for field computers with the on-board receiver serial numbers starting with
“BZZ” or “BFN” and are not required unless a specific issue encountered during operation has been addressed
with the update. Please review the required components and read the firmware update procedure before
starting the process. Contact a local Raven dealer for more information or additional assistance with any part of
the firmware update.
CAUTION
Updating GPS firmware may result in the loss
of OmniSTAR correction services. Internal
receivers with a serial number beginning with
“BFN13” or lower are capable of OmniSTAR
correction services with NovAtel firmware
“OEM060220SN0009” or lower. Updating the
GPS engine firmware will result in the loss of
OmniSTAR subscription services.
Required Components
•
•
•
•
•
•
Envizio Pro field computer with an on-board receiver serial number starting with “BZZ” or “BFN.”
Home or office PC or laptop with Microsoft Windows® operating system and the WinLoad utility.
“Straight through” serial cable (optional)
USB to Serial adapter (optional)
Envizio Pro cable with ‘GPS Out’ connector
WinLoad and firmware update .hex file
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
217
Appendix F
Receiver Information
Perform the following steps to access the information from the GPS receiver required for unlocking additional
features of the on-board GPS receiver:
1.
Touch the GPS Status icon in the upper, left corner of the Home screen.
2.
Touch the Receiver Information icon along the right side of the GPS Health screen.
3.
Copy the displayed receiver information and provide this information to a local Raven dealer when acquiring
the unlock code for additional GPS services or features.
GS Satellite Subscription
Note:
For best service, verify that the Envizio Pro software is 3.7.1 or newer and the GPS firmware
version is 6.04 or newer before purchasing a GS Satellite subscription. Ensure the GS activation
code is entered before attempting to purchase the GS Satellite subscription. Refer to the Special
Features Registration section on page 138 for assistance with entering an activation code.
1.
Touch the Tools Menu icon on the Home screen and select the GPS menu.
2.
Touch the Differential icon and select GS Satellite to display the GS Satellite information.
3.
Copy the PAC Code displayed.
4.
Visit the Slingshot Store at the web address below and purchase the desired GS Satellite subscription.
https://ravenslingshot.com/store/
Updating the On-Board DGPS Receiver
1.
Power up the Envizio Pro II field computer.
2.
Check the cable connections on the back of the field computer and trace the cable connected to the
auxiliary interface connector.
FIGURE 1.
Envizio Pro II Rear Panel Features and Connectors
USB Port
Ethernet Port
Antenna Port
Auxiliary Interface
Connector
Main Interface
Connector
Note:
3.
If there is no cable connected to the auxiliary interface connector, contact a local Raven dealer for
more information and assistance.
Locate the connector labeled “GPS Out” on the cable connected to the auxiliary interface connector.
218
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Updating the On-board DGPS Receiver
4.
Disconnect any serial cables currently connected to the GPS out port and route the port to a serial port on a
home or office PC or laptop.
Note:
If the PC or laptop does not have a serial port, a USB to serial port adapter will be required to
proceed with the firmware update procedure.
If the GPS out port will not reach the PC or laptop serial port directly, use a straight through serial
cable to extend the port connector.
5.
From the Envizio Pro II home screen, touch the Tools Menu (blue) button and select the Source icon from
the GPS menu.
6.
On the GPS Source screen, write down the current source setting before selecting the Internal GPS
Receiver option.
7.
Touch the Accept icon to return to the main Tools Menu display.
8.
Select the Output icon from the GPS menu.
9.
On the GPS Output screen, write down the current NMEA message rates before setting all NMEA
messages to zero.
10.
Touch the Accept icon to return to the main Tools Menu display and then touch the Home icon to display the
field computer Home screen.
11.
Touch the Shutdown (red) button on the Home screen. Do not press and hold the power button to shutdown
the field computer at this time.
12.
On the PC or laptop, open the downloaded firmware update folder and locate the WinLoad application.
13.
Click on the Settings option in the upper, left corner of the WinLoad window and select the COM Settings...
option.
14.
In the Com Port Setup prompt, select the com port on the PC or laptop connected to the GPS out
connector. Refer to the operating system help for assistance determining which com port is connected to
the field computer cable.
15.
Set the Download Baudrate to 57600.
16.
Set the Connect Baudrate to 9600 and click OK.
17.
Click on the File option in the upper, left corner of the WinLoad window and select the File Open... option.
Use the file browser to locate and select the update .hex file (e.g. “3902. hex”).
18.
The file information should now be displayed in the main WinLoad panel.
19.
Click the Write Flash button to the right side of the main WinLoad panel. Immediately start the next step
when the timer displays.
20.
Press and hold the Envizio Pro II power button until the unit shuts down. Press the power button to turn the
field computer back on.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
219
Appendix F
21.
The WinLoad program should display information in the main panel to indicate that the update is in
progress.
22.
Wait for the WinLoad update to complete.
23.
Once the update has finished, close the WinLoad application and restart the field computer.
24.
Verify that the firmware update was applied successfully:
a.
Touch the Tools Menu (blue) button from the field computer Home screen
b.
Select the Health icon from the GPS menu. Check that the version displayed on the GPS Health
screen is the new firmware version.
25.
Touch the Accept icon to return to the main Tools Menu display.
26.
Reset the NMEA and Source settings as appropriate before beginning any field operations.
220
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
APPENDIX
G
Tank Fill Monitor
Calibration
Ap endixG
Overview
An optional tank fill monitoring system is available to monitor the volume of product transferred from the nurse
truck to refill the product tank.
CAUTION
The tank fill monitoring system does not control
or automatically shut off the tank refilling
equipment. Do not leave the machine or refilling
system unattended while operating.
Tank Fill Calibration
To access the pressure cal, fan cal and metered weight settings from the Home screen:
1.
Touch the Tools Menu icon and select the Product Control icon from the System menu.
2.
Touch the Volume/Area Settings button.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
221
Appendix G
3.
Touch the Tank Fill button and then touch the
Configuration button to display the Tank Fill Config
screen.
4.
Touch the Tank Capacity button and enter the
maximum volume for a full tank. It is recommended
to enter the maximum desired capacity, not the
actual tank capacity to help avoid overfilling the tank.
5.
Touch the High Alarm % and enter the percentage of
the entered tank capacity at which the system will
provide an alert for the operator.
6.
If there is currently product in the tank, touch the
Current Tank Volume button and use the on-screen
keypad to enter the volume in the tank.
7.
Touch the Low Alarm button and enter the low tank
volume at which the system will provide an alert for
the operator.
8.
Select the Fill Meter Cal button and enter the calibration value for the flow meter used to measure the
volume of product transferred to fill the tank.
Tank Fill Operation
During an active field operation, the tank fill system allows the operator to access the fill system, measure and
monitor the actual volume of product transferred to the tank, and automatically update the tank volume
available for application.
To use the tank fill system during a field operation:
Note:
1.
If the system has not been calibrated already, touch the Configure button and refer to the Tank Fill
Calibration section on page 221 to set up the fill system.
Use the product rate display area in the upper, right corner of the guidance display to select the desired
product to be monitored during the tank fill process.
Tank Volume
Indicator
Product Rate
Display Area
2.
Touch the tank volume indicator displayed in the upper, left corner of the guidance display. The Tank Fill
screen will be displayed.
3.
Touch the Start Fill button to begin monitoring the fill process. The tank fill monitoring system will display
information such as the current tank volume and the configured tank fill capacity.
4.
Begin refilling the product tank.
5.
When the field computer provides an alert, stop the nurse tank system to stop filling the product tank.
6.
On the Envizio Pro, touch the Stop Fill button to stop monitoring the product fill system. The Envizio Pro will
adjust the Tank Volume Indicator for the selected product when the operator returns to the guidance screen.
222
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
APPENDIX
H
Blockage Monitoring
Sensors
Ap endixH
System Overview
With the optional blockage sensor system, the field computer is capable of monitoring seed or product flow
during field operations. If an obstruction is detected, the field computer will display information from the
sensors to help the operator quickly locate the obstruction.
During a field operation, the status of the blockage sensor system is displayed at the bottom of the Guidance
screen.
The field computer may be connected to two separate sensor loops with up to 120 sensors per loop to monitor
seed or product flow at various locations on the implement depending upon the level of system monitoring
desired.
Blockage Node Detection
If the blockage system is installed and correctly connected to the field computer, the blockage node should
display on the CAN Diagnostics screen. Refer to the CAN Diagnostics section on page 30 for details on using
CAN Diagnostics.
If the blockage node is not displayed on this screen, check the node connections and restart CANbus
communication. If the node is still not detected, contact a local dealer for assistance.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
223
Appendix H
Configuring Blockage Sensor Loops
Each sensor loop may be configured individually to allow the system to accurately monitor the status of
separate delivery systems (e.g. seed or product tubes) and alert the operator to obstructions in either delivery
system. To properly monitor the seed or product delivery system, the field computer must be configured for the
number of blockage sensors installed in each section of the implement.
1.
Review the Offsets and Implement Type Selection section on page 142 to configure the implement.
2.
After the implement is correctly configured, select the Blockage
icon from the System menu. The
Blockage Monitor Setup screen will be displayed on the field computer.
The following information is displayed at the bottom of the Blockage Monitor Setup screen:
• Currently configured sensor counts for each configured sensor loop. The field computer must be
programmed for the number of sensors in each loop. This value does not change when sensors are added
or removed from the blockage monitoring system.
• Enable options for sensor loop 1 and 2.
• Enable option for the audible alarm feature for the blockage monitor.
Section Assignments. The Section Assignments button allows the operator to configure the sensor loops
connected to the control for each implement section. Refer to the Configure Sensor Loops section on
page 225 information on the sensor section setup procedure.
Alarm Delay. The alarm delay setting allows the operator to set a delay between when the system detects a
blockage and when the alarm features are activated on the field computer. Use this setting to avoid
displaying errors during field operations if the control system intermittently encounters momentary
stoppages in product or seed flow.
Loop Sensitivity. Use the sensitivity value to set the approximate number of seeds per second which each
sensor in the loop should detect when the system is operating normally. If a sensor does not detect the set
value for seeding rates, the system will display a blockage or obstruction and indicate which sensor is
detecting the error. The default sensitivity value is 15.
Refer to the Setting the Sensitivity section on page 227 for more information on setting and adjusting the
sensitivity value for each sensor loop.
224
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Blockage Monitoring Sensors
Configure Sensor Loops
To setup the blockage monitoring sensor loops:
1.
Touch the Section Assignments button. The Sensor Section Setup screen for the first implement section will
be displayed.
2.
Touch the Edit button corresponding to loop 1 and loop 2 and use the on-screen keypad to configure the
number of sensors associated with the first implement section. Touch the Next icon to advance to the next
implement section.
Note:
Only enter values for the number of configured sections on the drill. Leave the value at zero for
any unused sections.
Do not count any sensor more than once. If a sensor is used for multiple sections, count the
sensor for the section most frequently used and do not count the sensor for the remaining
section(s).
3.
After the sensor loops are configured for each implement section, touch the Next icon to display the Sensor
Summary screen. Review the configured sensors per section in each loop and touch the Accept icon to
store the displayed settings. To reconfigure any of the sections, touch the Previous icon to return to the
section setup screens.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
225
Appendix H
Blockage Monitor Status
During field operations, the field computer displays the status of each sensor loop at the bottom of the
Guidance screen.
The left half of the icon displays the status of sensor loop 1 while the right half of the icon displays the status of
sensor loop 2. The blockage status will display:
Green when the system is operating normally.
Yellow when a product blockage or dirty sensor is detected in the system. Check the indicated sensor
locations in the Blocked display and clear any obstructions as necessary during operation.
Red if a communication issue is detected with the blockage sensors. Check sensor assemblies and
cables for disconnected or damaged parts and replace parts as necessary.
Touch the blockage status icon to access the Blockage Monitor Status screen.
Section Blockage
Status Display
Blockage Monitor
Setup
Section Selection
Pause Blockage Status
Screen Updates
Communication Error
Information
At the top of the status screen, the sensor status for each implement section is displayed to assist the machine
operator locate and address equipment blockages. Touch the section selection drop down to display detailed
information for each sensor loop for the selected section.
Blocked. When a blockage is detected in loop 1 or loop 2, the sensor number(s) which detect an obstruction or
blockage will be displayed in this area. Check these sensor locations for obstructions in the line to clear the
blockage condition.
Note:
To help locate blockages during operation more quickly, it is recommended to number the sensors.
Refer to the seed blockage sensor installation instructions for details on numbering the sensors.
Dirty. Sensors may need to be cleaned periodically during seeding operations to ensure that the system is
accurately detecting the flow of seed or product through seed tubes. Check and clean the indicated
sensor(s) to ensure optimal system performance.
When monitoring particularly dirty seed types or products, it may be necessary to clean each sensor in the
loop when a the system indicates a sensor or sensors in the loop are dirty.
226
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Blockage Monitoring Sensors
Communication Error Information. If a communication issue is encountered on either sensor loop, the
status screen will display the value of the of the last sensor which the system is currently able to detect on
the sensor loop. For example, “Loop 2 Sensor 8” means that sensor 8 on loop 2 is currently communicating
correctly. This information may be useful to address communication problems.
Blockage Monitor Setup Icon. Touch the setup icon to go to the Blockage Monitor Setup screen if necessary
during a field operation to adjust loop sensitivity or alarm settings. Refer to the Configuring Blockage
Sensor Loops section on page 224 for details on using the Blockage Monitor Setup screen.
Pause Status Updates Icon. The blockage system updates the status screen continuously during field
operations. Use the pause screen updates icon to ignore status screen updates and to allow the operator to
address multiple blockage conditions or to review blockage information for momentary blockages detected
during field operations.
Note:
The pause icon only pauses updates to the blockage monitor screen. Additional blockage alerts
will still be received by the field computer and product control features will be unaffected.
Setting the Sensitivity
Refer to the following table to set and adjust the sensitivity setting for each loop for a specific seeding
operation.
Sensitivity Seeds per Second
0a
Loop off
1b
10b
1 seed every
30 seconds
1 seed every
20 seconds
1 seed every
10 seconds
15
20
30
40
50
60
1
7
17
27
44
80
5b
Sensitivity Seeds per Second
(cont.)
(cont.)
70
148
80
281
90
539
100
1043
110
120
121
122
123
124
125
2019
4400
4800
5300
5800
6400
7000
a. A sensitivity setting of zero will disable the sensor loop and blockage
alarms.
b. A sensitivity value less than 15 will allow the sensor loop to scan for
periods longer than 1 second to count seeds down to one seed per
30 seconds.
The best obstruction and blockage detection is achieved when the sensitivity is set as high as possible without
encountering a constant alert condition. To set the sensitivity for a specific field operation:
1.
Ensure that the system is clear of obstructions.
2.
Select and enter a sensitivity value from the table above and begin operation. Ensure that the system
continues to display a normal operating condition at the initial setting.
Note:
If the seed blockage sensors consistently display a blockage alert, select a lower initial sensitivity
value before proceeding.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
227
Appendix H
3.
Increase the sensitivity until the system indicates a blockage.
4.
Decrease the sensitivity by 3 to 5 units at a time until the field computer no longer indicates blockage
conditions.
Note:
228
Do not decrease the sensitivity value below the initial value. Check the indicated sensor locations
and clear any obstructions and repeat the above procedure if the sensitivity value is decreased
below the initial setting.
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
APPENDIX
I
OmniSeed™
Calibration
Ap endixI
OmniSeed Calibration Overview
The field computer will display the following settings on the Calibration Settings screen when interfacing with
an optional Raven OmniSeed system for automatic seed rate control:
• Pressure Calibration
• Fan Calibration
• Metered Weight
The above settings are used to calibrate the field computer for the seeder air cart.
Remote Tank Console
The OmniSeed system also features a remote tank console that may be used while performing catch tests
during meter priming and calibration. Refer to the Remote Calibration Console section on page 238 for
additional information on using the tank console with the Envizio Pro field computer.
Optional Ultrasonic Bin Level Sensors
The OmniSeed system is capable of utilizing optional ultrasonic bin level sensors to monitor the seed bin level
during seeding operations. When ultrasonic sensors are connected, the field computer will display a
percentage of product remaining in the air cart bin during seeding operations.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
229
Appendix I
OmniSeed Calibration Procedures
To access the pressure cal, fan cal and metered weight settings from the Home screen:
1.
Touch the Tools Menu icon and select the Product Control icon from the System menu.
2.
Next, touch the Calibration Settings button to display the Calibration Settings screen.
230
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Optional Bin Pressure Sensor Calibration
Touch the Pressure Calibration button to access the Pressure Cal screen.
Pressure 1 and 2 Cal. The Pressure Cal screen displays the current calibration setting for each pressure
transducer connected to the product. Touch the Pressure Cal button and use the on-screen keypad to enter a
different target pressure for the bin.
Threshold. The threshold setting is the lowest acceptable pressure detected in the air seeder system before
the field computer displays an alert.
Pressure 1 and 2 Display. The current pressures detected by the pressure transducers on each product are
displayed in the bottom half of the Pressure Cal screen.
Enable Bin Pressure Alarm. Select the bin pressure alarm option to allow the field computer to sound an
audible alarm if any of the bin pressures fall below the set threshold value.
Fan Calibration
Touch the “Fan Cal” button to access the Fan Calibration Settings screen.
Fan Cal. Touch the Fan Cal button and use the on-screen keypad to enter the number of pulses detected by
the fan speed sensor per revolution of the fan.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
231
Appendix I
Low RPM. Enter the lowest acceptable fan speed before the field computer will display an alert.
High RPM. Enter the highest acceptable fan speed before the field computer will display an alert.
Enable Fan Alarm. Select the fan alarm option to sound an audible alarm if the fan speed falls below the low
RPM setting or rises above the high RPM setting.
Metered Weight
Touch the Metered Weight button to start the meter roller calibration process.
To perform a catch test:
Note:
A catch test may be performed using the remote tank console. Refer to the Remote Calibration
Console section on page 238 for details on using the remote tank console with the OmniSeed
system.
1.
Be sure the master switch and all section switches are in the off position.
2.
Place the weight box below the appropriate bin to avoid dumping product on the ground.
3.
Touch the Start button on the Metered Weight screen and toggle the master switch and at least one section
switch to the on position.
WARNING
The metering rollers will begin turning during
the calibration procedure. Keep away from
moving components and alert anyone around
the air cart when performing the calibration
process.
4.
Continue dispensing product until a sufficient weight is in the weight box or the weight box is full.
5.
Press the Stop button and toggle the master switch to the off position.
6.
Weigh the product dispensed (minus the weight box).
7.
Touch the Metered Weight button and use the on-screen keypad to enter the weight of the product in the
units displayed on the keypad.
8.
Touch the Accept icon in the lower, right corner of the screen to save the entered weight and return to the
Calibration Settings screen.
232
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Section Setup
The section set up for most seeder systems will require manual entry of offsets for sections based upon the
relative location of seed control or any optional liquid sections.
Note:
FIGURE 1.
Review the Section Setup section on page 148 for details on using the Section Setup Wizard.
OmniSeed Granular and Liquid Section Configuration Example
Example Granular
Product Section
x
(‘x’ indicates
the midpoint of
each section)
x
x
x
x
x
Example Liquid
Product Sections
To configure the seeder implement sections, use the Manually Configure option on the Configure Sections
screen.
When the section setup is complete for the seeder implement, the Section Configuration screen should display
an abstract layout of the seeder implement as shown in the figure below.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
233
Appendix I
Section Assignments
Sections must be assigned to the appropriate products to ensure that the field computer creates accurate
coverage maps during field operations. To configure section assignments on the Envizio Pro:
1.
From the field computer Home screen, select the Tools Menu icon.
2.
Select the Product Control icon from the System menu.
3.
Select the Section Assignments button to display the Section Assignments screen.
4.
Touch the indicator below each section to place a check mark to assign the product to the section or a red
‘x’ to disable the product for the assigned section.
234
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Section Switch Mapping
The Envizio Pro provides the ability to customize the section control switch functions as necessary for various
seeder configurations with or without liquid control sections. This capability allows the operator to control a full
seeder and application system using a 10 section switch box or to customize switch functionality to control
multiple sections with one switch.
For Example:
Map liquid product sections 1 and 2 in the figure below to section switch 1 to control both liquid sections using
the same section switch.
FIGURE 2.
OmniSeed Section Numbering
Air Seeder
Drill
(‘x’ indicates
the midpoint of
each section)
Granular Product Sections
(Full Implement Width)
5
x
6
x
7
x
1
3
8
10
12
x
x
x
x
x
2
4
x
9
x
11
x
13
x
Liquid Product Sections
x
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
235
Appendix I
Bin Level Sensor Calibration
Capacitive Bin Level Sensors
The Raven OmniSeed system utilizes capacitive low bin level sensors to ensure products are available in each
bin for the seeding operation.
Note:
The field computer monitors the capacitive low bin level sensors for low bin alarm and bin chaining
conditions. If the field computer does not display an alert or the bin chaining feature does not
operate as expected, the low bin level sensors may require recalibration.
It is recommended to check the low bin level sensors on occasion and recalibrate the sensors as necessary. To
calibrate the low bin level sensors:
FIGURE 3.
Capacitive Low Bin Level Sensor
Status LED
Sensitivity
Set Screw
1.
With an empty bin, check that the sensor status LED is off.
a.
If the LED is on and the bin is empty, check the sensor inside the bin and clean as necessary.
b.
If the LED is still on, adjust the sensitivity set screw until the LED extinguishes.
2.
Fill the bin to a level to cover the bin level sensor. If the LED illuminates after the bin is filled, no further
adjustment is required. It may be possible to fine tune the sensor for the specific crop, however, the
following steps are only necessary should the low bin level sensor sends intermittent or false alarms during
seeding operations.
3.
With the sensor covered, the sensor LED should be on.
a.
If the LED is off, adjust the sensitivity set screw until the LED illuminates. Turn the sensitivity set screw
an addition quarter to half turn.
b.
If the sensor displays intermittent or false bin level alarms during operation, adjust the sensitivity set
screw until the status LED is extinguished. Reverse the set screw a quarter to half turn and verify the
status LED is illuminated.
236
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Optional Ultrasonic Bin Level Sensors
The Raven OmniSeed system features optional ultrasonic bin level sensors which automatically detect the
level of product remaining in each bin. The bin sensor for each of the first three products must be calibrated to
accurately gauge the amount of product in the bin.
Note:
The air cart bins must be empty to calibrate the bin level sensors.
1.
Touch the Tools Menu icon and select the Product Control icon from the System menu.
2.
Next, select the Volume/Area Settings button from the Product Control Configuration screen.
3.
Touch the Bin Level button to display the Bin Height Calibration screen.
4.
Use the on-screen keypad to enter the height of the bin (in inches [centimeters]) when empty. The field
computer will use the overall height to determine the percent of product remaining in the bin during field
operations.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
237
Appendix I
Remote Calibration Console
The optional tank calibration kit (P/N 117-0171-302) allows the operator to perform all the necessary calibration
operations from the air cart making calibration of the OmniSeed system quick and convenient. The remote tank
console allows the operator to prime metering rollers and perform the catch test while watching the air cart
operation which can help the operator make correct system adjustments prior to starting a seeding operation in
a field.
WARNING
The metering rollers will turn during the
calibration procedure. Keep away from moving
components when performing a catch test using
the remote tank console.
Be aware of bystanders and alert anyone
around the air cart when performing the
calibration process.
Note:
When performing calibration with the remote tank console, the Envizio Pro field computer must be
powered up. To ensure that the tank console programs the system properly, the field computer
should not be used to navigate the calibration screens or the meter weight settings. The tank
calibration kit requires a hydraulic drive system to connect the remote tank console.
Kit Contents
TABLE 1. Remote
Tank Calibration Kit (P/N 117-0171-302)
Part/Description
Part Number
Console, Remote Tank
063-3001-004
Cable, Remote Tank Calibrator 115-3001-039
Console Connection
Note:
The remote tank console and cable should only be connected when using the console to calibrate
the system. Remove the remote tank console and console cable and replace the dust cap when
storing or operating the air cart.
To connect the remote tank console:
1.
Carefully insert the round 4-pin connector on the calibrator cable to the 4-pin port on the back of the tank
console. Be sure to line up the keyway on both the port and connector before securing the connector.
2.
Carefully insert the round 8-pin connector on the calibrator cable to the 8-pin port on the back of the tank
console. Be sure to line up the keyway on both the port and connector before securing the connector.
3.
Locate the 6-pin Deutsch connector labeled ‘Remote Cal’ on the air cart control cable. The ‘Remote Cal’
connector should be located on the left side of the air cart near the metering rollers.
4.
Remove the dust cap from the ‘Remote Cal’ connector and insert the 6-pin Deutsch connector on the
calibrator cable.
238
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Console Power
Press the blue power button to power up the remote tank console.
Power Button
If the console does not power up, check that all connections are secure and that the field computer is powered
on.
Note:
The current program and software version numbers will be displayed while the console initializes
during power up. Have these numbers available when contacting technical support.
To shutdown the remote tank console, press and hold the blue power button for approximately 3
seconds.
Remote Tank Console Operation
The remote tank console allows the operator to prime metering rollers, adjust valve response, perform a catch
test and enter the cal weight all while observing operation of the air cart to ensure proper operation of the
OmniSeed system.
Priming
To accurately calibrate the OmniSeed system for operation, the metering rollers must be primed and the meter
RPM set prior to performing the catch test. The operator may prime the metering rollers using the remote tank
console. To prime the metering rollers:
Note:
Place the weight box below the appropriate bin to avoid dumping product on the ground. The
metering rollers will not stop automatically. Do not leave the remote tank console until the process
is complete and the metering rollers have stopped rotating.
1.
With the remote tank console powered up, use the Next and Prev keys to select the desired bin and press
the Enter key.
2.
Press the Begin key to start the bin calibration.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
239
Appendix I
3.
Press the Enter key again to select the ‘Prime Meter Roller’ option and press the Start key.
WARNING
The metering rollers will begin turning during
the priming procedure. Keep away from moving
components and alert anyone around the air
cart when performing the priming process.
4.
Allow the metering roller to rotate until a consistent amount of product is dispensed and then press the Stop
key.
If necessary, use the INC or DEC keys to increase or decrease the PWM Output, or speed, of the metering
roller during the priming process.
Note:
5.
The PWM Output, or metering roller speed, will also be used for the catch test procedure,
however, the output may not be adjusted during the calibration. Be sure to set the PWM Output
during the priming process to ensure the best results.
A catch test may now be performed with the primed bin. To return to the Bin Calibration screen, press the
Back key. To return to the Bin Selection screen, press Back, Prev, and Exit.
Catch Test
To perform a catch test and determine the cal weight for seeding operations, perform the following procedures:
Note:
Place the weight box below the appropriate bin to avoid dumping product on the ground. The
metering rollers will not stop automatically. Do not leave the remote tank console until the process
is complete and the metering rollers have stopped rotating.
1.
With the remote tank console powered up, use the Next and Prev keys to select the desired bin and press
the Enter key.
2.
Press the Begin key to start the bin calibration.
3.
Press the Next key to select the ‘Start Calibration’ option and then select the Enter key.
240
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
4.
Press the Start key.
WARNING
The metering rollers will begin turning during
the calibration procedure. Keep away from
moving components and alert anyone around
the air cart when performing the calibration
process.
5.
Continue dispensing product until a sufficient weight is in the weight box or the weight box is full.
6.
Press the End key to complete the calibration.
Note:
Press the Stop key during the calibration process to pause the calibration and stop the metering
rollers if necessary. While paused, press Start key to resume the catch test. It is recommended to
run the catch test without pausing the calibration to get the most accurate results.
Press the Cancel key to stop the calibration process and return to the calibration screen without
entering a cal weight.
7.
Weigh the product dispensed (minus the weight box) and proceed to the Cal Weight section to complete the
calibration process.
Cal Weight
The Metered Weight Page will display automatically at the end of the catch test procedure. This screen
displays the number of metering roller revolutions detected during the catch test and allows the operator to
enter the weight of product dispensed to calibrate the OmniSeed system. To enter the cal weight value:
1.
Use the Left and Right keys to move the cursor below the bin cal weight value to the first digit of the
measured cal weight and press the Enter key.
Product or Cal
Weight Value
2.
Press the INC or DEC keys to set the appropriate value for the selected digit and press the Enter key to set
the value.
3.
Repeat the above procedure to set the remaining cal weight digits up to two decimal places.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
241
Appendix I
4.
To program the cal weight value, press the Right key to move the cursor past the last decimal place in the
cal weight value and press the Send key.
Send Key
The remote tank console will send the entered cal weight value to the appropriate control node and will
return to the bin calibration screen.
5.
Press the Exit key to return to the bin selection screen.
Using the Tank Console To Adjust Settings
The following settings may be entered using the remote tank console. Settings will be stored in the appropriate
nodes on the OmniSeed system and will be registered by the field computer when starting OmniSeed
application for seeding operations.
To adjust settings for a specific bin or product:
1.
With the remote tank console powered up, use the Next and Prev keys to select the desired bin and press
the Enter key.
2.
Press the Setup key to display the current settings for the selected bin.
3.
The following settings will be available on the first settings screen:
Note:
Use the Next or Prev keys to move the cursor between the screen options. Pressing the Prev key
on the decimal shift option will return to the bin calibration screen. Press the Next key on the cal
weight option to advance to the second settings screen.
Decimal Shift. Press the Toggle key on the decimal shift option to turn the decimal shift feature on or off.
Enable the decimal shift feature to increase the system accuracy for low application rates. In the standard
mode, the remote tank console and field computer will display values to one decimal place. With the
Decimal Shift feature enabled, values will be displayed to two decimal places.
Note:
242
When the field computer is initialized, all of the calibration values will need to be verified after the
Decimal Shift feature is either enabled or disabled. Change settings as necessary.
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Meter Cal. Press the Enter key on the meter cal option to edit the current meter cal value. The meter cal value
is the number of counts the metering roller sensor will detect per revolution of the metering roller.
Use the INC or DEC keys to adjust the meter cal value and press the Enter key to set the meter cal value.
Note:
It is recommended to enter a meter cal of 60 when using the Envizio Pro for the hydraulic drive
system.
Cal Weight. Press the Enter key on the cal weight option and use the INC or DEC keys to adjust the set cal
weight value. The cal weight value to set the cal weight sets the weight of product applied per revolution of
the metering roller.
Refer to Catch Test section on page 240 and the Cal Weight section on page 241 for details on using the
remote tank console to calculate the cal weight value.
4.
Press the Next key on the cal weight option to advance to the next settings screen.
Note:
The second settings screen is only accessible if the valve type for the selected product bin is set to
PWM or PWM close. Refer to the Valve section on page 103 for detailed information on valve type
selections.
The following settings are displayed on the second settings screen:
Note:
Use the Next or Prev keys to move the cursor between the screen options. Pressing the Prev key
on the PWM frequency option will return to the previous settings screen. Press the Next key on the
min PW option to exit the settings menu and return to the bin calibration screen.
PW Freq. Press the Enter key and use the INC or DEC keys to set the coil frequency of the PWM valve. The
default value for hydraulic drive systems is 122 Hz.
Min PW. Press the Enter key and use the INC or DEC keys to set the minimum desired RPM or hydraulic
output (zero point or shutoff point) for a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) control valve.
Max PW. Press the Enter key and use the INC or DEC keys to set the maximum desired RPM or hydraulic
output (zero point or shutoff point) for a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) control valve.
Note:
Refer to PWM Calibration Screen section on page 107 for details on using the calibration
assistance to calculate the Min and Max PW values.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
243
Appendix I
Troubleshooting
Issue
Remote tank
console will not
power on
Possible Cause
• Field computer not
Solution
• Power on the field computer.
powered on
• Power not provided
to remote tank
console
• Check and reconnect 6-pin Deutsch connector.
• Check and reconnect 4-pin round connector on the back
of the remote tank console.
• Check and reconnect air cart cable to chassis
connection.
Meter rollers do
not turn when
priming or
calibrating.
• Hydraulics to air cart
are not powered on.
• Turn hydraulics to air cart on and check pressure.
• Verify there is no debris or blockages in the hydraulic
circuit.
Error Messages
Issue
Check air cart
node or CAN
communication
Possible Cause
• Power/ground issue
with air cart node(s).
Solution
• Check the power and ground connections on air cart
nodes.
• Check CANbus system connections and reconnect
nodes.
No nodes have
been found. Verify
power to node
and CAN
connection
• Nodes not powered
or faulty logic power
connection
• CAN nodes not
connected to
controller.
Can not calibrate,
note enough
meter revolutions.
Press any key
• Valve PWM output
insufficient for
system
measurement
• Check CANbus system connections and reconnect
nodes.
• Verify hitch connections and check CANbus system
connections.
• Increase PWM output during priming procedure.
• Verify PWM or PWM close valve type is selected for the
selected product(s).
• Be sure the min and max PW values are programmed
correctly. Refer to the PWM Calibration Screen section
on page 107 for more information.
244
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
APPENDIX
J
Serial Console
Interfaces
Ap endixJ
Interface the Envizio Pro with the Bogballe Calibrator Zurf, Kuhn/Rauch LH5000, or Amazone Amatron+
console to add the data-logging, mapping, and 2D/3D guidance features to current system operations. If the
single product variable rate key (P/N 077-0180-031) has been activated on the Envizio Pro, the field computer
may be used to variable rate product application via the existing serial console.
Note:
When connected with the Bogballe Calibrator Zurf console, the Envizio Pro is capable of
performing AccuBoom, automatic section control, features during field operations. An AccuBoom
control node is not required to enable the AccuBoom feature on the field computer in this
configuration.
Console Connection
Connect the COM2 connector on the field computer interface (P/N 115-0171-746) or chassis interface (P/N
115-0171-926) cable with the Calibrator Zurf, LH5000, or Amatron+ serial input via a null terminated serial
cable (P/N 115-0171-040 or 115-0159-822).
FIGURE 1.
Connecting the Envizio Pro and Serial Control Console
Serial Control
Console
Connect the speed interface cable to send GPS speed from the field computer to the serial control console.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
245
Appendix J
Serial Control Setup and Configuration
Note:
When the Envizio Pro is setup to interface with the Bogballe Calibrator Zurf, LH5000, or Amatron+
console, the “Profiles” feature within the field computer will be disabled.
1.
From the field computer Home screen, touch the Tools Menu icon.
2.
Touch the Control Interface icon within the System submenu.
3.
Select “Bogballe Calibrator Zurf,” “Rauch LH5000,” or “Amazone Amatron+” from the product control
options list.
4.
Touch the green check mark icon to return to the main Tools Menu screen.
Section and Guidance Width Configuration
Note:
The field computer automatically configures a section width to the spread width value programmed
into the serial control console. Any changes to the spread width value on the console will
immediately affect the section width on the field computer.
1.
From the field computer Home screen, touch the Tools Menu icon.
2.
Select the Guidance Width icon within the Vehicle submenu.
3.
Use the on-screen keypad to enter the desired swath or spread width in inches [centimeters]. The field
computer uses the programmed guidance width to determine guidance paths.
4.
Touch the green check mark icon to return to the main Tools Menu screen.
Antenna Offsets
To ensure accurate mapping and application control, configure the GPS antenna offsets in the field computer
Tools Menu.
1.
Determine the spread distance using the appropriate spread chart.
2.
Measure the distance from the GPS antenna to the spinners.
Note:
3.
The Fore/Aft value must be measured parallel with the vehicle direction of forward travel.
Add the measured antenna offset and the spread distance together to determine the total offset value.
246
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Serial Console Interfaces
FIGURE 2.
Offset Distance Calculation
GPS Antenna
Spreader
Antenna/Spinner Offset
Distance (measured)
Spread Distance
(from Chart)
4.
From the field computer Home screen, touch the Tools Menu icon and select the Offsets icon from the
Vehicle submenu.
5.
Touch the Fore/Aft value on the Offsets Setup screen and use the on-screen keypad to enter the calculated
total offset value.
Note:
The values entered for the fore/aft value must be entered in the same units as shown above the
fore/aft offset value.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
247
Appendix J
AccuBoom™ Configuration
Note:
AccuBoom, automatic section control, features are only available for the Bogballe Calibrator Zurf
serial interface.
The turn-on/turn-off look-ahead values may be adjusted after this procedure is completed to
customize AccuBoom performance to the specific vehicle and spreader.
Use the following procedure to calibrate the AccuBoom turn-on and turn-off look-ahead values to the spreader:
1.
From the field computer Home screen, touch the Tools Menu icon and touch the Product Control icon within
the System submenu.
2.
On the Product Control Configuration screen, select the AccuBoom button to display the AccuBoom
Configuration screen.
Option
Enabled
3.
Enable the “Use Look Ahead Distance” option at the bottom of the screen by touching the box until a check
is displayed.
4.
Touch the Off Look Ahead button and use the up or down arrows to set the off look-ahead value to the
spread distance value determined from the appropriate spread chart.
5.
Touch the green check mark to return to the AccuBoom Configuration screen.
6.
Touch the On Look Ahead button and use the up or down arrows to set the on look-ahead value to zero.
Note:
The procedure above will configure the AccuBoom system for general operation with the spreader.
To fine tune AccuBoom performance for the specific system and the specific vehicle, adjust the
look-ahead values in small increments until the desired performance is achieved.
See Chapter 9, Using AccuBoom™, for more information on setting up and operating the
AccuBoom feature on the field computer.
248
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Serial Console Interfaces
Operation
When interfacing with the Calibrator Zurf, LH5000, or Amatron+ console, the field computer displays the user
entered target rate and actual rate from the serial control console in the upper, right corner of the Guidance
screen.
Hopper Content
Volume
Actual Rate
Target Rate
Area Covered
Coverage Map
Hopper Contents
The current hopper content volume registered by the Calibrator Zurf console will be displayed in the hopper
content volume display on the field computer Guidance screen. For volume displays with the LH5000 or
Amatron+, use the standard bin volume features as explained in Tank or Bin Indicator section on page 67.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
249
Appendix J
Area Covered & Coverage Mapping Information
The coverage map and area covered information on the field computer Guidance screen are based on the
GPS location recorded by the field computer.
Application Reports
While interfacing with a Calibrator Zurf, LH5000, or Amatron+ console, the field computer records coverage
area based upon GPS coordinate data. The coverage area in a field may then be output from the field
computer on an application report for use on a home or office PC.
Note:
No field or total volume information is recorded by the field computer while interfacing with the
serial control console.
Automatic Variable Rate
If the single product variable rate key (P/N 077-0180-031) is activated, the field computer will send target rate
information to the serial control console for automatic variable rate control and application.
250
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
APPENDIX
K
Reference of Icons
Ap endixK
Navigation
The following icons will be used to navigate within the menu screens and to edit and save settings.
Touch the Home icon when it appears to return to the Home screen. Any active jobs will continue
in the background. Note that some Tools Menus will not be accessible while a job is in progress.
Touch the Accept icon to confirm any changes to a screen. Touching the Accept icon will save
those settings and proceed to the next screen.
Touch the Cancel icon to exit the screen without saving any changes made on a screen. If the
Cancel icon is displayed in gray, the cancel feature is not available.
Like the Accept icon, the Next icon accepts changes and proceeds to the next screen in a setup
procedure. Touch this icon where it appears to access more settings or to continue a setup
procedure. The last screen in a setup procedure should display the Accept icon.
Touch the Previous icon to return to the last screen displayed during a setup procedure or wizard.
The Up icon, where it appears, increases displayed values in preset increments. Touch this icon to
increase a value until the desired value is displayed.
The Down icon, where it appears, decreases displayed values in preset increments. Touch this
icon to decrease a value until the desired value is displayed.
Touch the Create New icon when it appears to create and rename new job related files.
Note:
Names of jobs, vehicle profiles, guidance lines or boundary maps stored on the field computer
cannot begin or end with a space.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
251
Appendix K
Product 1
Selected
Product 2
Selected
The Cycle Product icons are used when more than one product is connected to
the CANbus system. The Cycle Product icons indicate for which product
information is currently being displayed. Touch the icon to cycle the selected
product to access settings or display information for additional product nodes or
control channels connected to the CANbus system.
Home Screen
The Home screen offers access to the following features of the field computer:
Touch the Start Job icon to begin a new job, select a previous job or to return to the Guidance
screen if a job is already in progress.
Touch this icon to access the Tools Menu. The Tools Menu is only available from the Home
screen. Refer to Chapter 7, Tools Menu, for information about settings and using the Tools Menu.
If a job is in progress, the End Guidance icon will appear on the Home screen. Touch this icon to
the end the active Guidance session.
When the console is powered on or when Guidance is not active, the Shutdown icon will be
displayed. Raven recommends using the Shutdown feature before pressing the power button.
Information
Touch the information icon in the upper, right corner of the home screen to display the software and image
versions currently installed on the field computer.
252
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Reference of Icons
GPS Status
The current source and status of DGPS signal is displayed in the upper, left corner of the Home screen.
RTK or
CORS
Note:
OmniSTAR
HP
OmniSTAR
XP/G2
Satellite GS
Slingshot GS
NovAtel
SBAS
(WAAS/EGNOS) GL1DE® or e-Dif
Standard
The standard GPS shield will be displayed if the Envizio Pro field computer cannot determine the
type of corrections being sent from the DGPS receiver.
The status icon on the Home screen will display:
• Green if the status of GPS is okay.
• Yellow if an error condition has been encountered.
• Red if GPS is non-functional. Make sure the DGPS antenna cable connections are secure and the antenna
has a clear, 360° view of the sky.
RTK Fixed and Float Modes
When using an RTK correction source with the internal dual frequency GPS receiver, the GPS status indicator
may be used to determine whether the receiver is operating in RTK fixed or float modes. The RTK shield will
display:
• Green to indicate a fixed RTK position. This mode indicates that the receiver has a full RTK position fix and
is providing sub-inch corrections.
The GPS Health screen will display a value of 4 for the differential mode when operating in RTK fixed mode.
• Yellow to indicate that the receiver is operating in RTK float mode. This mode indicates that the receiver is
not able to provide a full RTK position lock due to the distance from the base station, visibility of the sky,
time of day or interference around the base station location. In the float mode, the receiver is still providing
a course RTK correction signal, but accuracy of the receiver may not be at a sub-inch level.
The GPS Health screen will display a value of 5 for the differential mode when operating in RTK float mode.
Direction of Travel
The last direction of travel detected by the field computer is displayed on the screen when setting
up a job on the field computer and may also be found on the GPS Health screen by selecting the
GPS Status icon.
If the direction of travel displays incorrectly during a field application, touch the direction of travel
icon to manually toggle the course over ground.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
253
Appendix K
Wireless Communications Status
The current status of wireless communication is displayed along the top of the Home screen display.
This icon will appear:
•
•
•
•
Gray if no wireless communications device is connected to the field computer.
Green if communication is okay.
Yellow if an error condition has been encountered.
Red if wireless communication is not available.
Touch the shield icon to display the Wireless Status screen. Refer to the Appendix C, Wireless
Communications & Remote Service for more information.
Tools Menu
The following icons may be found within the Quick Access Bar at the top of the Tools Menu screen.
The Setup Wizard Menu is available in the Tools menu. Review the Setup Wizards section on
page 42 for more details on using the setup wizards.
Access the System Menu to setup the product control system or configure the optional AccuBoom
or AutoBoom systems.
The GPS Menu contains screens to setup the internal GPS receiver or to enable the field
computer to use signal from an external receiver. The GPS menu also contains screens to review
the status of GPS reception, set message outputs (for the internal DGPS receiver only), setup an
optional TM-1 Tilt Module or select the PRN.
The Computer Menu sets display and feature settings of the field computer. Access the Computer
menu to change the display brightness, language and units, adjust the on-screen or external light
bar, as well as activate features or update the field computer software.
Access the Vehicle Menu to setup or modify vehicle profiles for each machine or implement with
which the field computer will be used. Profiles allow the operator to setup GPS antenna heights
and offsets as well as the swath width and section setup for each implement once and quickly
reload a vehicle’s profile when transferring the field computer between vehicles.
Select the Show All icon to show an overview of the Tools menu. The Show All screen is displayed
each time the Tools menu is accessed.
254
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Reference of Icons
File Maintenance
To begin file maintenance from the Home screen:
1.
Touch the Tools Menu icon.
2.
Select the File Maintenance icon within the Computer menu.
Note:
3.
Select the type of files to transfer from the list at the top of the screen.
Note:
4.
Before performing file maintenance with a new USB flash drive, set up the required file
structure on the connected USB flash drive by selecting the icon shown to the right.
Verify that all desired file types (report, shapefile, Slingshot) are selected in the
Configure File Output screen.
Touch one of the following icons to select the direction in which to transfer files.
From Field
Computer
To Field
Computer
Transfer From Field Computer
Select left icon to transfer a selected file to the connected USB flash drive or the right
icon to transfer all files of the selected type currently saved on the field computer.
Select the left icon to export the Slingshot® data package for a selected job file to the
connected USB flash drive or the right icon to export data packages for all job files
currently stored on the field computer
Select the left icon to delete a selected file from the field computer or the right icon to
delete all files of the selected type currently saved on the field computer.
Note:
The Delete button will not affect any files on the flash drive. To remove files from the flash drive,
use the PC’s file browser (i.e. Windows Explorer) to remove, delete or copy files from the flash
drive.
Touch this icon to manually initiate upload of a selected file currently stored on the field computer
via a SlingShot® Field Hub and available wireless connection.
Note:
Refer to Appendix C, Wireless Communications & Remote Service, for more information on
transferring files using the Slingshot service.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
255
Appendix K
Transfer To Field Computer
Select the left icon to transfer a selected file to the field computer or the right icon to
transfer all files of the selected type currently stored on the USB flash drive.
CAN Diagnostics
Touch this icon to readdress product control nodes connected to the CANbus. Readdressing
product control nodes may be necessary if a node is not detected by the field computer. Verify that
the node is properly powered and connected to the CANbus communication lines before
readdressing the product control nodes. See the Readdressing Product Nodes section on page 31
for more information.
Select this icon to reset all product control nodes to their default values. Use the Calibration
Reference Sheet section on page vii if necessary to record the required calibration values for
system operation. To help record additional settings for each node, step through or review the
Product Control Setup Wizard section on page 44. After resetting nodes, it is recommended to run
the Product Control Setup Wizard to reconfigure each product node or control channel.
Touch this icon to retry CAN communications. If a node is not recognized when starting up the field
computer, restarting CAN communication may allow the system to recognize the node without
further troubleshooting steps. If a node is still not detected, additional troubleshooting or
readdressing the CANbus may be required. Refer to the CAN Troubleshooting section on page 34
or Readdressing Product Nodes section on page 31 for additional information.
Touch this icon to update CAN nodes via the field computer. Review Appendix E, Updating CAN
Nodes via the Envizio Pro, for more information on obtaining node update files and performing an
update via the field computer.
Detailed node hardware information is available by selecting a node listed on the CAN Diagnostics
screen and touching this icon. The hardware summary screen provides node operating
information that may be helpful when contacting technical support or while troubleshooting CAN
communication issues.
Note:
If the node is not capable of providing hardware information, the Hardware Summary screen will
display “N/A” for the unavailable diagnostic values.
The Raven product controller node is capable of providing up to four product control channels on
an Envizio Pro control system. By default, the product controller will make two control channels
available to the field computer for controlling product application.
Select one of the product controller node channels and select the Select Channels icon (shown to
the left) to set the number of control channels available via the node.
Note:
256
The Select Channels icon will display the current number of channels which the node is providing
to the field computer. Each control channel must be configured separately via the Tools Menu.
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Reference of Icons
Guidance Patterns
The following icons represent the available Guidance patterns available for use with the field computer.
The Enhanced Last Pass is well suited to provide guidance for irregular swaths due to irregular
field boundaries, well heads or waterways, etc.
The Straight (A-B) Line pattern is useful for applications in fields with row crops.
The Pivot pattern is useful for applications in fields irrigated by a center pivot.
The Fixed Contour pattern is ideal for creating and saving swaths which follow irregular field
boundaries, waterways, well heads, etc., or where the ability to skip swaths in an irregular pattern
is necessary. Refer to the Using Guidance Patterns section on page 63 for more information on
using Guidance patterns.
Guidance Screen
The following icons and tools are displayed on the Guidance screens.
The Vehicle Arrow represents the vehicle’s position in the field. The Vehicle Arrow may also be
used to toggle coverage mapping if the correct master switch option is selected. Refer to the
Product Control section on page 99 for more information about this feature.
Touch the Menu icon in the lower right corner of the Guidance screen to display a menu of
available views and tools.
Within the Menu, touch the Home icon to return to the Home screen. Any active jobs will continue
in the background until the job is ended. Note that some Tools Menus will not be accessible while
a job is in progress.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
257
Appendix K
Guidance Views
The following views may be selected for viewing the Guidance screen. To select the desired view, access the
Menu on the Guidance screen and touch one of the following icons.
Touch this icon to display the Down Field view. The Down Field view is the view displayed when
starting or resuming Guidance from the Home screen.
Touch this icon to switch to a Bird’s Eye view. The Bird’s Eye view is follows the vehicle’s current
position with a view looking down onto the vehicle indicator.
Touch this icon to switch to the field review mode. The field review mode can be used to review the
entire as applied map.
On-Screen Switch Box
The section or master switch is off. The control system will not control any sections or rows if the
section switch is in the off position. If the master switch is toggled off, the control system will shut
off product application for all rate control sections or rows.
On the Guidance screen, the master switch icon will display off if all sections are in the manual off
position.
Sections or master switch is on. If the master switch is toggled on, the control system will not
automatically shut off sections or rows.
On the Guidance screen, the master switch icon will display on if all sections are in the manual on
position.
The On/Off icon will be displayed if at least one section is in the manual on position and at least
one section is in the manual off position.
Sections or master switch is in the automatic position. The control system will automatically turn
on or turn off rate control sections or rows based upon previous coverage, field boundaries or
zone maps during field operations.
This icon is only displayed on the Guidance screen if all sections are set to the automatic control
mode.
Note:
Touch the master off, automatic or on icons to toggle all sections currently set to automatic control.
Tapping the master switch indicator will toggle any sections currently in the automatic mode to the
selected status. Tap the automatic mode will toggle those sections back to automatic while leaving
any manually controlled sections to the assigned mode.
Double tap the master switch icon to toggle all section switches to the selected status.
258
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Reference of Icons
Touch the AccuBoom timed override icon within the on-screen switch box to override AccuBoom
controlled sections for the time entered as the on override time. Refer to the On Override section
on page 164 for more information.
If available, touch the Liquid icon displayed in the upper, right corner of the on-screen switch box
display to toggle to the Liquid Shutoff Sections Override screen. This screen allows the operator to
manually override the liquid shutoff sections on or off.
To allow the control system to automatically control the liquid shutoff sections based on the seed
application sections, set the liquid section switches to the automatic position. Toggle the switch on or off to
override automatic control and keep the liquid section(s) on or off as desired. The automatic section control
feature will not automatically shut off liquid sections that are not in the automatic position.
Note:
When connected to an Envizio Pro field computer, the OmniRow system requires the Raven
auxiliary planter node to control and map liquid product and liquid product sections during field
operations.
Without the auxiliary planter node, the field computer may still be used to shutoff liquid sections
based upon seed rate control sections. All seed rate control sections or rows must be off before
the liquid section will automatically shut off. If any seed rate section, group or row is enabled and
active, the corresponding liquid section will remain on.
If available, touch the Plant icon to toggle the on-screen switch box to the AccuRow Override
control screen. Use the switches on this screen to manually override seed rate control sections,
groups or rows. To allow AccuRow to automatically control section status, set all section switches
to the automatic position.
Field Review Mode Tools
The following icons appear in the field review mode.
Pan Lock
When the pan lock is disabled, the display will automatically scroll to the vehicle indicator as the
indicator moves out of the current view. Disable the pan lock to always display the vehicle
indicator while in field review mode.
When the pan lock is enabled, the display is locked to the current view regardless of the vehicle
indicator position. The operator can manually pan and zoom with the pan lock enabled to view
specific portions of a field while in field review mode.
To Pan the display Manually, touch the Field Review screen. Touch the screen to pan the center of
the field review display to the selected location.
Show Overlaps
With the show overlaps feature disabled, the field review mode displays the covered areas
(including overlaps) in a solid green color. Touch this icon to toggle the show overlaps feature.
When the show overlaps feature is enabled, application overlaps are displayed in red. Overlaps
appear where application (i.e. active boom sections) cover previously applied areas. Note that the
area covered will not display as an overlap unless product application has overlapped.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
259
Appendix K
Drift Shift
The drift shift feature allows the operator to manually adjust, or nudge, the reported GPS position
of all features (e.g. boundaries, coverage and zone maps, field markers, and guidance lines, etc.)
within the job simultaneously. This feature allows the operator to manually correct for GPS drift
over the course of a field operation or to “recalibrate” the position of field features if the job is
resumed at a later date or time.
Field Markers
Field markers allow the operator to mark locations such as well heads, rock piles, or points of
interest during a field operation. Markers will be displayed during the operation and will allow the
operator to view the marker information.
Toggle Maps on the Guidance Screen
During a job with an active prescription or zone map, the field computer will display either map on the
Guidance and Field Review screens. If both a prescription map and a zone map will be used, the operator may
toggle which map to display on the guidance and field review screens by selecting the toggle maps icon.
To toggle the displayed map, touch:
The view zone map icon to view the loaded zone map.
The view prescription map icon to display the loaded prescription map on all guidance displays.
A-B Path Tools
The following tools and features may be found in the Menu when the Straight Line, Fixed Contour or Pivot
guidance patterns are active.
Loading an A-B Line
If an A-B Line has been saved on the field computer, touch the Load A-B Line icon to load a saved
line into the current job. This icon will not appear if an A-B Line has already been set. Reset the
line to access the Load A-B Line tool.
Note:
The A-B Line must be stored in the field computer internal memory to be able to access and load
the guidance path. Be sure to transfer all necessary files to the field computer before beginning a
job.
A-B Lines stored on the field computer cannot begin with a space.
260
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Reference of Icons
Setting A-B Points
To create a New A-B Line, the operator must set A and B
points. The following icons and tools may be used to set
a New A-B Line.
Straight (A-B) Line
Pivot
Fixed Contour
Set A
Touching the Set A icon will place the first, or A, point of
the path at the vehicle’s current location. Regardless of
Set B
where the vehicle moves from this point, the field
computer will use the selected pattern to connect this
point with the next set point. After the Set A icon is selected, the Set B icon will appear.
Touch the Set B icon to place the second, or B, point of the guidance path. Once the B point has been set, the
field computer will use the selected Pattern to create the Guidance Path displayed on the Guidance screen.
Set B by Heading
The Set B by Heading feature is only available with the Straight Line Guidance Pattern. This feature allows the
operator to set an A-B Line before completing the first swath.
Use the Set B by Heading feature to create a guidance path along a heading. Touch this icon and
use the displayed keypad to enter a heading between 0° and 359° (with 0° being due North).
A-B Path Configuration
The following tools are available in the Menu when a compatible A-B Line is displayed on the Guidance
screen.
Select the A-B Tools icon to access additional tools for use with the current A-B Line.
Select the Reset A-B Line icon to clear the displayed path. If the displayed path will need to be
recalled in the future, be sure to save the current path before selecting reset.
Touch the Save A-B Line icon to save the displayed path. Once saved, an A-B Line can be
recalled at any time or loaded into other jobs. In addition, saved paths can be transferred from the
field computer via the File Maintenance feature. See Chapter 8, Software Updates and File
Maintenance, for details on the File Maintenance feature and transferring saved paths.
Use the Re-calibrate A-B Line tool to re-calibrate the displayed path to the machine’s current
position. Due to DGPS drift over time, this feature allows the operator to re-calibrate the A-B Line
to a known position in a field.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
261
Appendix K
Nudge Feature
The Nudge Feature allows the operator to fine tune the displayed path for actual field conditions. The Nudge
Feature works especially well with the Raven SmarTrax assisted steering systems. Contact a local Raven
dealer for more information about these systems.
During an active job, touch the Menu button and select the Edit Nudge icon to display the In Job
Nudge Settings screen. This screen allows the operator to enable the on-screen nudge controls,
adjust the nudge values and select the active nudge applied when the nudge icons are selected.
See the Nudge Feature section on page 75 for more information on setting up and using the
Nudge Feature.
On-Screen Nudge Enabled
The following icons will be displayed on the Guidance screen if the on-screen nudge controls option is set to
Enabled.
Touch the Nudge Right icon to move the displayed guidance path to the right. The distance which
the path will be nudged is determined by the user defined value for the Active Nudge.
Touch the Nudge left icon to move the displayed guidance path to the left. The distance which the
path will be nudged is determined by the user defined value for the active nudge.
A-B Tools Menu Nudge
The following nudge icons appear in the Menu on the Guidance screen. Touch the Menu icon and select the
A-B Tools icon to access the following nudge tools.
Touch the Nudge Right icon in the A-B Tools menu to move the guidance path to the right in 1 inch
[2 cm] increments.
Touch the Nudge Left icon in the A-B Tools menu to move the guidance path to the left in 1 inch [2
cm] increments.
262
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Reference of Icons
Field Boundary Tools
The following icons will be used while creating a field boundary.
Touch the Boundary Tools icon to display boundary tools available for the current job.
A previously recorded boundary can be loaded into the current job file by selecting the Load Field
Boundary icon in the Menu. A list of files stored on the field computer is displayed. Select the
desired field boundary to load the selected field boundary into the current job.
Touch the Delete Boundary icon to reset the current field boundary. A field boundary must be
present in the current job or this icon will not appear in the Menu.
Touch the Record Field Boundary icon to begin recording a new field boundary. While a field
boundary is being recorded, the Pause and End Field Boundary icons are displayed on the
Guidance screen.
Pause, Resume and End Boundaries
The following icons will appear on the Guidance screen while a field boundary is being recorded.
Touch the Pause Boundary icon to pause recording of the field boundary. Use this feature when
the vehicle’s path will not reflect the boundary such as when re-filling tanks, etc. To resume
recording, touch the Resume icon.
While paused, the Resume Boundary icon replaces the Pause and End Boundary icons on the
Guidance screen. Touch this icon to resume recording of the current boundary.
To finish recording a boundary, touch the End Field Boundary icon. Note: The field computer
draws a straight line from the boundary starting point to the vehicle’s current location when closing
a boundary.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
263
Appendix K
Alarms
Depending upon the alert or warning condition, the field computer may display one or more of the following
icons:
The Product Control Alarm icon is displayed if an alarm condition such as a low bin or tank, or
when product control cannot reach the target rate.
The AutoBoom Alarm icon is displayed if an alarm condition such as sensors too low or high, the
pressure is higher than the set point or if a sensor has gone off line. Refer to Chapter 10, Using
AutoBoom®, for more information about the optional Glide Series AutoBoom system and
troubleshooting AutoBoom alarms.
Touch the Show All Alarms icon to view all current alarm conditions.
AccuBoom™
The following tools and icons will be displayed when working in a job with the AccuBoom feature enabled.
Select the zone mapping tools to display AccuBoom and zone map tools available for the current
job. Tools displayed in this menu may only appear if certain map features are present within the
current job. Read the descriptions of the following tools for more information regarding when the
tool or feature is available.
While editing zone maps, the Home button is replaced with the Accept button. To save the
currently displayed map and restore normal Menu tools, select the Accept button.
Touch the Record No-Spray Zone icon to begin recording points along a no-spray zone boundary.
The area inside of the completed boundary will become a no-spray zone.
Touch the Record Spray Zone icon to begin recording points along a spray zone boundary. The
area inside of the completed boundary will become a spray zone.
Touch the Record Field Boundary icon to create a new AccuBoom field boundary. With zone
mapping mode enabled, AccuBoom will assign a minimum of three boom widths outside of the
completed boundary as a no-spray zone.
264
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Reference of Icons
On-Screen Tools
While recording a zone map feature, the following icons may be displayed on the Guidance screen.
Pause
Select the Pause button displayed on the Guidance screen to temporarily interrupt recording the current zone
map feature.
Pause No-Spray
Zone
Pause
Spray Zone
Pause Field
Boundary
This feature is useful if the vehicle course will move away from the boundary path to refill a tank, etc.
Resume
While Paused, a Resume button will replace the Pause and End buttons on the Guidance screen. Touch this
button to resume recording the paused zone feature.
Resume
No-Spray Zone
Resume
Spray Zone
Resume Field
Boundary
Stop
When finished recording a Zone or Boundary, touch the Stop button to close Zone or Boundary.
Stop No-Spray
Zone
Note:
Stop Spray
Zone
Stop Field
Boundary
The field computer will draw a straight line from the starting point of the feature to the machine’s
current location when closing the zone map feature.
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
265
Appendix K
AutoBoom®
The AutoBoom Off icon is displayed when the feature is turned off. Touch this icon to toggle
AutoBoom On. Automatic boom height management cannot be Enabled if AutoBoom is Off.
The AutoBoom On icon is displayed when the feature is turned on. Touching this icon will toggle
the feature Off. Important: Each boom must be Enabled before the Glide Series AutoBoom will
automatically control boom height.
AutoBoom® Status Indicator
The AutoBoom Off indicator is displayed when the AutoBoom feature is turned off. Boom height
management is not enabled.
The AutoBoom On/Disabled indicator is displayed when the AutoBoom feature is On but boom
height management is not enabled.
The AutoBoom On/Left Enabled indicator displays when AutoBoom is On and boom height
management is only Enabled for the left boom. AutoBoom will not adjust the height of the right
boom.
The AutoBoom On/Right Enabled indicator displays when AutoBoom is On and boom height
management is only Enabled for the right boom. AutoBoom will not adjust the height of the left
boom.
The AutoBoom On/Enabled indicator displays when AutoBoom is On and boom height
management is Enabled for both booms.
Note:
266
If operating with an UltraGlide AutoBoom system, the set Sensor Height is displayed in the Status
Display. If an optional center rack sensor is installed, the actual height of the center rack will be
displayed in this area.
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Index
A
A-B Path Tools 73
AccuBoom™ 163
Creating a Zone Map 174
Enable Override Popup 167
Enabling 167
Examples of Zone Maps 176
Loading a Field Boundary 172
Look Ahead 167
Mapping Tools 173
Modes of Operation 169
On Override 164
Setup 164
Turn Off Percent 166
Zone Maps 172
Alarm Settings 116
Alarms 87
Applying Software Updates 162
AutoBoom™ 179
Operation 180
PowerGlide Plus 179
Status Display 180
Turning On the AutoBoom™ Feature 180
UltraGlide 180
Off-line Errors 34
Readdressing 31
Retry CAN Communication 32
Version Information 31
CANbus Diagnostics 29
Care and Use 11
Computer Menu 135
Applying Software Updates 162
Demo Mode 140
Display 135
File Maintenance 140
Region 137
Updates 14, 138, 160
Configuring Section Labels 150
Connecting External DGPS Receiver
Systems 22
Creating a Zone Map 174
D
Demo Mode 140
Display 135
E
B
Electrical
Boom Cal 190, 199
Boom Sections 147
Enabling AccuBoom™ 167
Enhanced Last Pass 64
Envizio Pro
C
Calibration
Additional Data 202
Entering Bin Level 202
Entering Tank Volume 202
Volume/Area Display Information 202
Granular Applications
Product Density 200
Rate Cal 200
Spreader Constant 199
Calibration Settings 109
Calibration Values
Boom Cal 147, 190, 199
Calculating 187
Fan or Pump Cal 110
Granular Applications 199
Liquid Applications 190
Meter Cal 109, 191
Pressure 1 and 2 Cal 111
Product Density 109
Rate Cal 110, 196
Speed Cal 102, 187
Spinner Cal 109
Spinner RPM 201
Spreader Constant 111
Valve Cal 194
Valve or Flow Cal 103
CAN (Controller Area Network)
Connections 27
Troubleshooting 34, 186
CAN Diagnostics 30, 98
CAN Nodes
Diagnostics 30
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
Safety 2
Startup 38
Envizio Pro Features
See Features
Error Messages 185
GPS 186
Job 185
F
Features 4
Front Panel 8
Internal DGPS Receiver 5
On-Screen Guidance 5
Optional Features 7
Rear Panel 10
Speed Compensated Product Control and Datalogging 4
Field Boundaries 80
Field Boundary Tools 81
Field Review Mode Tools 78
File Maintenance 140, 154
File Outputs 154
Performing 155
File Structure 158
Fixed Contour 65
G
GPS Menu 120
Differential 125
e-Dif 126
GPS Health 122
Output 131
Source 133
GPS Status 52
267
Index
Guidance Patterns
Fixed Contour 65
Last Pass 64
Pivot 66
Straight (A-B) Line 65
Guidance Screen 62
Features 62
AutoBoom™ Status Display 180
Menu 72
On-Screen Rate Bump buttons 71
Pressure or Fan Speed Display 71
Product Rate Display 68
SmarTrax Status 63
Tank or Bin Level Indicator 67
Guidance Views 72
Field Review Mode 78
Guidance Width 141
H
I
Important Safety Information 1
Electrical 2
Hydraulics 2
In Job Product Configuration 69
Initial Setup 37
Initial Startup
Wizard 40
Installation 15
DGPS Antenna 21
External DGPS Receiver Systems 22
Mounting the Field Computer 17
Optional Equipment 23
AutoBoom™ 27
Light Bar 25
Serial Console 26
SmarTrax™ 26
TM-1 Tilt Sensor 25
Overview 15
Introduction
Unit Definitions and Conversions viii
Unit of Measure Conversions viii
Unit of Measure Definitions viii
AccuControl Setup 59
AutoBoom™ Setup 61
Product Setup 59
Resume an Existing Job 58
Setting up a Job 56
Start a New Job 58
Starting a Job 56
268
M
Master Pressure 166
Menu 72
Meter Cal 109, 191
Mounting the Field Computer 17
N
Node Version Information 31
O
Overview of the Installation Process 15
Performing File Maintenance 155
Pivot 66
Prescription (Rx) Settings 112
Prescription Maps 85
Safety 2
Job Error Messages 185
Job Files 55
Jobs
Kit Contents 16
P
Height 144
Home 72
Home Screen 51
Hydraulic
J
K
Applying Prescription Maps 86
Loading Prescription Maps 85
Using Prescription Maps 87
Pressure 1 and 2 Cal 111
Product Control Features 66
Product Control Options 94
Product Density 109
Product Rate Display 68
Pump or Fan Cal 110
R
Rate Bump 111
Rate Cal 196
Rate Cal 110
Readdressing the Nodes 31
Reference of Icons
A-B Path Tools 260
AccuBoom™ 264
Alarms 264
AutoBoom™ 266
Field Boundary Tools 263
Field Review Mode Tools 259
GPS Status 253
Guidance Patterns 257
Guidance Screen 257
Guidance Views 258
Home Screen 252
Navigation 251
Tools Menu 254
Region 137
Retry CAN Communication 32
Rx Settings
See Prescription (Rx) Settings
S
Screens
Guidance Screen 62
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Index
Home Screen 51
Section Assignments 119
Serial Port Configuration 98
Setup Wizard Menu 42
AutoBoom™ Setup Wizard 49
Product Control Setup Wizard 44
Section Setup Wizard 43
Special Features Registration 138
Speed Cal 102, 187
Spinner Cal 109
Spreader Constant 111
Straight (A-B) Line 65
System Menu 93
Verifying Flow Rate Limits 110
Volume
Bin Level 113
Tank Volume 113
Volume and Area Settings 113
W
Weather Station 211
Configuration 212
Connecting 212
Overview 211
Using the Weather Station 213
AutoBoom™ 120
Control Interface 94
Light Bar 136
Product Control 99
T
Tank or Bin Level Indicator 67
Test Speed 102
Testing Cables
Flow Meter 204
Speed Sensor 203
Tiered Boom Settings 111, 197
Time Zone Settings 137
Tools Menu
Computer Menu 135
Special Features Registration 138
GPS Menu 120
Navigation 91
Show All 152
System Menu 93
Tilt Sensor 134
Vehicle Menu 141
Touch Screen Calibration 39
Troubleshooting 183
Coverage Map Issues 185
General Issues 183
Job Issues 184
Setup Issues 184
U
Updates 14, 138, 160
Special Features Registration 138
Time Zone Settings 137
Updating 215
Using Guidance Patterns 63
Using Zone Maps 172
V
Valve 103
Valve Cal 194
Variable Rates 85
Vehicle Menu 141
Boom Sections
Section Setup 148
Guidance Width 141
Height 144
Offsets 142
Sections 147
P/N 016-0171-493 Rev. I
269
Index
270
Envizio Pro™ and Envizio Pro II® Installation and Operation Manual
Limited Warranty
What Does this Warranty Cover?
This warranty covers all defects in workmanship or materials in your
Raven Applied Technology Division product under normal use,
maintenance, and service when used for intended purpose.
How Long is the Coverage Period?
Raven Applied Technology products are covered by this warranty for 12
months from the date of retail sale. In no case will the Limited Warranty
period exceed 24 months from the date the product was issued by
Raven Industries Applied Technology Division. This warranty coverage
applies only to the original owner and is non-transferable.
How Can I Get Service?
Bring the defective part and proof of purchase to your Raven dealer.
If the dealer approves the warranty claim, the dealer will process the
claim and send it to Raven Industries for final approval. The freight cost
to Raven Industries will be the customer’s responsibility. The Return
Materials Authorization (RMA) number must appear on the box and all
documentation (including proof of purchase) must be included inside
the box to be sent to Raven Industries.
What Will Raven Industries Do?
Upon confirmation of the warranty claim, Raven Industries will (at our
discretion) repair or replace the defective product and pay for the
standard return freight, regardless of the inbound shipping method.
Expedited freight is available at the customer’s expense.
What is not Covered by this Warranty?
Raven Industries will not assume any expense or liability for repairs
made outside our facilities without written consent. Raven Industries
is not responsible for damage to any associated equipment or
products and will not be liable for loss of profit, labor, or other
damages. The obligation of this warranty is in lieu of all other
warranties, expressed or implied, and no person or organization is
authorized to assume any liability for Raven Industries.
Damages caused by normal wear and tear, misuse, abuse,
neglect, accident, or improper installation and maintenance are
not covered by this warranty.
016-0171-537 Rev. A, E19889
Extended Warranty
What Does this Warranty Cover?
This warranty covers all defects in workmanship or materials in your Raven Applied
Technology Division product under normal use, maintenance, and service when
used for intended purpose.
Do I Need to Register My Product to Qualify for the
Extended Warranty?
Yes. Products/systems must be registered within 30 days of retail sale to receive
coverage under the Extended Warranty. If the component does not have a serial
tag, the kit it came in must be registered instead.
Where Can I Register My Product for the Extended Warranty?
To register, go online to www.ravenhelp.com and select Product Registration.
How Long is the Extended Warranty Coverage Period?
Raven Applied Technology products that have been registered online are covered
for an additional 12 months beyond the Limited Warranty for a total coverage period
of 24 months from the date of retail sale. In no case will the Extended Warranty
period exceed 36 months from the date the product was issued by Raven Industries
Applied Technology Division. This Extended Warranty coverage applies only to the
original owner and is non-transferable.
How Can I Get Service?
Bring the defective part and proof of purchase to your Raven dealer. If the dealer
approves the warranty claim, the dealer will process the claim and send it to Raven
Industries for final approval. The freight cost to Raven Industries will be the
customer’s responsibility. The Return Materials Authorization (RMA) number must
appear on the box and all documentation (including proof of purchase) must be
included inside the box to be sent to Raven Industries. In addition, the words
“Extended Warranty” must appear on the box and all documentation if the failure is
between 12 and 24 months from the retail sale.
What Will Raven Industries Do?
Upon confirmation of the product’s registration for the Extended Warranty and the
claim itself, Raven Industries will (at our discretion) repair or replace the defective
product and pay for the standard return freight, regardless of the inbound shipping
method. Expedited freight is available at the customer’s expense.
What is Not Covered by the Extended Warranty?
Raven Industries will not assume any expense or liability for repairs made outside
our facilities without written consent. Raven Industries is not responsible for
damage to any associated equipment or products and will not be liable for loss of
profit, labor, or other damages. Cables, hoses, software enhancements, and
remanufactured items are not covered by this Extended Warranty. The obligation of
this warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied, and no person
or organization is authorized to assume any liability for Raven Industries.
Damages caused by normal wear and tear, misuse, abuse, neglect, accident,
or improper installation and maintenance are not covered by this warranty.
016-0171-536 Rev. A, E19889
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement